Subaru 2026 Outback Touring XT Owner's Manual

(3,1)
FOREWORD
FOREWORD
sfw
sfwaa
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Manual has all the
information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to
properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission
pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand
your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU
dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those
in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to
change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without
incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all
equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore
may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will
need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
C Copyright 2025 SUBARU CORPORATION
*
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
0
(4,1)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(5,1)
This manual describes the following vehicle type.
0
S_002466-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(4,1)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2024/ 7/ 11
(1,1)
Table of Contents
Introduction........................................................................................ 5
Illustrated Index ................................................................................19
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags .......................................................35
1
Keys and Doors .............................................................................. 115
2
Instruments and Controls ...............................................................153
3
Climate Control ...............................................................................253
4
Audio...............................................................................................269
5
Interior Equipment ..........................................................................273
6
Starting and Operating ...................................................................301
7
Driving Tips.....................................................................................405
8
In Case of Emergency.....................................................................435
9
Appearance Care ............................................................................459
10
Maintenance and Service................................................................467
11
Specifications ................................................................................. 511
12
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects....................525
13
Index ...............................................................................................555
14
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(2,1)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(7,1)
INTRODUCTION
*
Warranties ...........................................................................................6
sint
Warranties for U.S.A...........................................................................
6
Warranties for Canada ....................................................................... 6
Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ........................................... 6
*
How to Use This Owner’s Manual .....................................................6
Using Your Owner’s Manual ............................................................... 6
Safety Warnings................................................................................. 7
Safety Symbol.................................................................................... 7
Abbreviation List ............................................................................... 8
*
*
Vehicle Symbols .................................................................................9
Safety Precautions When Driving .....................................................9
Seatbelt and SRS Airbag .................................................................... 9
Child Safety ..................................................................................... 10
Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)........................................... 11
Drinking and Driving ........................................................................ 11
Drugs and Driving............................................................................ 11
Driving When Tired or Sleepy........................................................... 12
Modification of Your Vehicle ............................................................. 12
Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving............................................ 12
Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation System........................... 12
Driving with Pets ............................................................................. 13
Tire Pressures ................................................................................. 13
On-Road and Off-Road Driving ......................................................... 13
Attaching Accessories ..................................................................... 13
Vehicle Operation............................................................................. 14
*
General Information..........................................................................15
California Perchlorate Advisory ........................................................ 15
Noise from under the Vehicle ........................................................... 15
Vehicle Data Recording .................................................................... 15
Event Data Recorder ........................................................................ 16
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
0
(8,1)
6
INTRODUCTION
WARRANTIES
s00aa
WARRANTIES FOR U.S.A.
HOW TO USE THIS OWNER’S MANUAL
s00ab
s00aa01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Systems Warranties
All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Read these warranties
carefully.
WARRANTIES FOR CANADA
s00aa05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.
WARRANTIES EXCEPT FOR
U.S.A. AND CANADA
s00aa06
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
USING YOUR OWNER’S MANUAL
s00ab01
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to
your vehicle.
Each chapter in this manual begins with a
brief table of contents. This will usually
allow you to tell at a glance whether or not
a chapter contains the information you
want.
Introduction
This chapter informs you general information before driving.
Illustrated Index
This chapter informs you about the
vehicle layout with illustrations.
Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS
Airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and Doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls
This chapter informs you about the
operation of instrument panel indicators
and how to use the instruments and other
switches.
Chapter 4: Climate Control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your
audio system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(9,1)
7
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 6: Interior Equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and Operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving Tips
This chapter informs you how to drive
your SUBARU in various conditions and
explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In Case of Emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance Care
This chapter informs you how to keep
your SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the
dimensions and capacities of your
SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer Information
and Reporting Safety Defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s
in this manual. You can use it to quickly
find something you want to read.
For EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle
shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of equipment.
SAFETY WARNINGS
s00ab02
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as
well as all other portions of this manual
carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU
vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution
is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions
how to make better use of your vehicle.
SAFETY SYMBOL
s00ab03
S_002288-W
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
0
(10,1)
8
INTRODUCTION
ABBREVIATION LIST
Abbreviation
Meaning
s00ab04
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation
SRS
Supplemental restraint system
TIN
Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring system
Meaning
ABS
Anti-lock brake system
A/C
Air conditioner
AKI
Anti knock index
ALR
Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
AVH
Auto Vehicle Hold
AWD
All-wheel drive
BSW
Blind Spot Warning
CVT
Continuously variable transmission
DRL
Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distribution
ELR
Emergency locking retractor
GAW
Gross axle weight
GAWR
Gross axle weight rating
GPS
Global positioning system
GVW
Gross vehicle weight
GVWR
Gross vehicle weight rating
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LCA
Lane Change Assist
LED
Light emitting diode
MIL
Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
OBD
On-board diagnostics
RAB
Reverse Automatic Braking system
RCTW
Rear Cross Traffic Warning
RON
Research octane number
SRH
Steering Responsive Headlight
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(11,1)
9
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE SYMBOLS
s00ac
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Table of Warning and Indicator Lights”
�P32.
Mark
Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions carefully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
0
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DRIVING
s00ad
SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAG
s00ad01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the
vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,
the possibility of serious injury
becomes greater in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the driver
and all passengers must always
wear seatbelts when in the vehicle.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not replace
the safety benefits of wearing a
seatbelt. Used in combination with
the seatbelts, the SRS airbag
offers vehicle occupants the best
possible protection in the event of a
serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not seated in
the proper upright position when
the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the
driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(12,1)
10
INTRODUCTION
. For the seatbelt system, refer to
“Seatbelts” �P55.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)” �P83.
. Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit in the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out. Refer
to “Child Safety Locks” �P139.
CHILD SAFETY
. Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Refer
to “Windows” �P139.
s00ad02
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will be
caught between the passenger
and objects inside the vehicle.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. SUBARU strongly recommends
that ALL infants and children (including those in child restraint
systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker
than adults, their risk of being
injured from deployment is greater.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P67.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. When leaving the vehicle, close all
windows and lock all doors.
. In models with power rear gate,
when it operates, the rear gate
moves with remarkable force. It is
possible to be injured if anyone is
caught in or hit by the rear gate so
be sure to obey the following
cautions.
– Check that there are no children around the rear gate
before operating the power
rear gate.
– Do not allow children to operate
the power rear gate.
For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to
“Seatbelts” �P55.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child Restraint Systems” �P67.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(13,1)
11
INTRODUCTION
System Airbag)” �P83.
. For the power rear gate, refer to
“Power Rear Gate” �P142.
DRINKING AND DRIVING
ENGINE EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide)
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception, judgment and
attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if you drink just a little – it
will increase the risk of being involved
in a serious or fatal accident, injuring
or killing yourself, your passengers
and others. In addition, if you are
injured in the accident, alcohol may
increase the severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
s00ad04
WARNING
s00ad03
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and
odorless gas which is dangerous,
or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine
is running. If that is unavoidable,
then use the ventilation fan to force
fresh air into the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves or
other obstructions to ensure that
the ventilation system always
works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked
and corrected as soon as possible.
If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas from
entering the vehicle.
Drunken driving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since
alcohol affects all people differently, you
may have consumed too much alcohol to
drive safely even if the level of alcohol in
your blood is below the legal limit. The
safest thing you can do is never drink and
drive. However if you have no choice but
to drive, stop drinking and sober up
completely before getting behind the
wheel.
DRUGS AND DRIVING
s00ad05
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them,
it may increase your, your passengers’
and other persons’ risk of being
involved in a serious or fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking
can impair your driving ability. Do not
drive after taking any medications that
can make you drowsy or otherwise affect
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
0
(14,1)
12
INTRODUCTION
your ability to safely operate a motor
vehicle. If you have a medical condition
that requires you to take drugs, please
consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR
SLEEPY
s00ad06
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’ and other persons’ chances
of being involved in a serious accident
may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you are
tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should
make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
s00ad07
. Vehicle settings
. Clock
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types of
modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under
warranties.
USE OF CELL PHONES/TEXTING AND DRIVING
s00ad16
CAUTION
Do not talk on a cell phone or text while
driving; it may distract your attention
from driving and lead to an accident. If
you use a cell phone to talk or text, first
pull off the road and park in a safe
place. In some States/Provinces, it
may be lawful to talk on a phone while
driving, but only if the phone is handsfree.
DRIVING VEHICLES EQUIPPED
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
s00ad09
WARNING
Do not remove the genuine SUBARU
navigation and/or audio system. Doing
so could cause the following functions
to be inoperable.
. Instrument cluster display
. Rear view image and help lines
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss
of attention to driving could lead to an
accident. If you wish to operate the
controls of the navigation system, first
take the vehicle off the road and stop it
in a safe location.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(15,1)
13
INTRODUCTION
DRIVING WITH PETS
s00ad10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also
for their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
ON-ROAD AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING
0
s00ad13
This vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a
higher ground clearance and higher
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It
also handles and maneuvers differently
from other passenger cars. For this
reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and
precautions in order to prevent serious
injury or death due to loss of control,
rollover and other accidents. Refer to
“On-Road and Off-Road Driving” �P411.
ATTACHING ACCESSORIES
s00ad15
WARNING
TIRE PRESSURES
s00ad11
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month and
before any long journey.
. Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stickers) to
the windshield. Such items may
obstruct your view.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. For detailed
information, refer to “Tires and Wheels”
�P486.
. If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly become
hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the
tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
. Do not connect any unauthorized
accessories or devices to the data
link connector (OBDII port). This
connector should be used only with
compatible diagnostic devices for
inspection and maintenance by an
authorized service technician
using authorized service tools.
Connecting unauthorized devices,
such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, may adversely affect vehicle systems, including safety systems, or allow others to access
information stored in your vehicle.
The use of unauthorized devices
may also cause unexpected mal– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(16,1)
14
INTRODUCTION
functions, such as a drained battery, or may damage vehicle systems. The manufacturer’s warranty
will not cover any part that malfunctions, fails, or is damaged due
to the use of an unauthorized
device with the data link connector.
VEHICLE OPERATION
s00ad18
Before leaving vehicle unattended
s00ad1801
CAUTION
Always lock your vehicle and carry
your access key fob with you.
There is a risk for vehicle theft or
unauthorized persons tampering with
the vehicle or installing malicious
electronic devices.
Vehicle modifications
s00ad1803
WARNING
. Do not install parts, make custom
adjustments or perform wiring or
other operations that are not suitable for the vehicle.
. Do not connect accessories to the
vehicle wiring or connectors unless
they are genuine SUBARU products. SUBARU’s vehicle warranty
does not cover any malfunctions
resulting from connecting the vehicle to products other than those
specified.
. It may be illegal to modify the
vehicle by installing parts other
than genuine SUBARU parts.
Consult your SUBARU dealer
about the kinds of parts (tires,
wheels, mufflers, etc.) you can
legally install on your vehicle.
Key number plate storage
s00ad1802
NOTE
. The key number is required when
repairing the vehicle or making a
spare access key fob. If you lose the
plate with these numbers stamped on
it, you will not be able to make a spare
access key fob. To prevent it from
being stolen, do not leave it in the
vehicle and store it in a safe place.
Refer to “Keyless Access with PushButton Start System” �P117.
. If you lose your key, we recommend
that you delete the lost access key fob
registration to prevent theft. Only a
SUBARU dealer can delete key fob
registration. We recommend that you
consult your SUBARU dealer. Refer to
“Key Replacement” �P129.
Device installation
s00ad1804
WARNING
Connecting devices that are not intended to be used in the vehicle or in a
particular connector can adversely
affect the vehicle system or cause the
auxiliary battery to discharge. It may
also cause personal information leaks
or unauthorized remote operation of
vehicle features, resulting in unforeseen complications. Any complication
caused by connecting a device other
than one intended to be used in the
vehicle is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. SUBARU also
bears no responsibility for any such
complication.
. The vehicle trouble diagnosis connector should only be used to
connect the vehicle data link connector (OBDII) for inspection and
maintenance purposes.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(17,1)
15
INTRODUCTION
0
. Use the USB port only for data
communication with your vehicle
and for device charging.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Suspicious device handling
Certain vehicle components, such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless entry transmitter batteries,
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.
gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
s00ad1805
WARNING
If you find an unrecognized device on
your vehicle, consult your SUBARU
dealer immediately.
Any problem or safety risk due to the
connection of an unauthorized device
is not covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty. SUBARU also bears no
responsibility for any such cause.
Deleting personal information
from vehicle
s00ad1806
CAUTION
When transferring ownership of your
vehicle, delete the personal information registered in the vehicle by performing a Factory Data Reset. For
details about the Factory Data Reset,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation
system.
Note that certain personal information
inputted in the Head Unit and the
phone number of any paired device
will remain in vehicle data logs even
after the Factory Data Reset. These
data logs are strictly for quality assurance purposes and not viewable by
any subsequent purchaser. To have
those logs deleted permanently from
the vehicle, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
s00ak
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
s00ak03
NOISE FROM UNDER THE VEHICLE
s00ak01
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction. This noise is caused by the
operation of the fuel evaporation leakage
checking system and the operation is
normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15 minutes.
VEHICLE DATA RECORDING
s00ak08
The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
. Vehicle speed
. Engine speed
. Engine control information
. Shift state information
. Driving information, etc.
Data usage
s00ak0801
SUBARU may use the data recorded in
this computer to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and
improve quality.
SUBARU will not disclose the recorded
data to a third party except:
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(18,1)
16
INTRODUCTION
. With the consent of the vehicle owner
or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
. In response to an official request by
the police, a court of law or a government agency
. For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit
. For research purposes where the data
is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle
or the EDR.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
s00ak04
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for
a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/
fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(19,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(20,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(21,1)
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Exterior ..............................................................................................20
sill
Interior ...............................................................................................22
Cargo Area ........................................................................................25
Instrument Panel...............................................................................26
Steering Wheel..................................................................................27
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches ........................28
Instrument Cluster............................................................................29
U.S.-Spec. Models ............................................................................ 29
Canada-Spec. Models....................................................................... 30
*
Table of Warning and Indicator Lights............................................32
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(22,1)
20
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
EXTERIOR
s00ay
S_002467-W
Engine hood (page 473)
Headlights (page 212, 504)
Turn signal lights (page 221, 504)
Windshield wipers (page 223, 496)
Moonroof (page 149)
Outside mirrors (page 245)
Roof rails (page 420)
Door locks (page 132)
Tire pressure (page 489)
Flat tires (page 439)
Tire chains (page 417)
Fog lights (page 220, 504)
Tie-down hooks (page 447)
Front camera (page 353)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(23,1)
21
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
1
S_002468-W
Rear view camera (page 362)
Rear wiper (page 225)
Rear window defogger (page 226)
Lights (page 212, 504)
Turn signal lights (page 221, 504)
Fuel filler lid and cap (page 305)
Child safety locks (page 139)
Tie-down holes (page 447)
Rear gate (page 142)
Towing hook (page 447)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(24,1)
22
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
INTERIOR
s00az
S_002447-W
Lock release straps (page 47)
Head Restraint Adjustment for rear
seat (page 50)
Seatbelts (page 55)
Dome light (page 274)
Head Restraint Adjustment for front
seat (page 45)
Front seats (page 37)
Lower anchors for child restraint system (page 78)
Rear seats (page 47)
Reclining the seatback (page 50)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(25,1)
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
23
1
S_002448-W
Wireless charger (page 284)
Select lever (page 321)
USB power supply (page 283)
Glove box (page 278)
Bottle holder (page 281)
Center console (page 279)
Auto Start Stop OFF switch (page 348)
View monitor switch (page 353)
Cup holder (page 280)
Accessory power outlets (page 282)
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 332)
Electronic parking brake switch (page
339)
Auto Vehicle Hold switch (page 343)
Console USB power supply (page 283)
Rear seat heater switches (page 54)
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(26,1)
24
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
S_002449-W
Sun visors (page 276)
Inside mirror (page 228)
Buttons for MySubaru Connected Services
Overhead console (page 278)
Door interlock switch (page 274)
Map light (page 274)
Moonroof switch (page 150)
NOTE
For models with MySubaru Connected
Services: Refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for MySubaru Connected
Services.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(27,1)
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
25
CARGO AREA
s00bf
S_002450-W
Cargo area light (page 275)
Rear gate light (page 275)
Rear center seatbelt (page 60)
Temporary spare tire (page 436)
Maintenance tools (page 438)
Under-floor storage compartment
(page 298)
Tether anchors (page 82)
Multi-use cargo cover hook holders
(page 294)
Accessory power outlets (page 282)
Cargo tie-down hooks (page 297)
Shopping bag hooks (page 294)
Release lever for rear seatback (page
47)
Power rear gate lock button (page 145)
Power rear gate button (page 145)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(28,1)
26
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL
s00ba
S_002451-W
Power window switches (page 139)
Driver’s seat memory (page 41)
Remote control mirror switch (page
246)
Ventilators (page 254)
Instrument cluster (page 185)
Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 249)
Push-button ignition switch (page 310)
Center information display (page 197)/
Audio*1/Navigation system*1
Camera for Distraction Mitigation System (page 389)
Hazard warning flasher switch (page
158)
Climate control panel (page 255)
Illumination brightness control dial
(page 161)
Power rear gate button (page 144)
Hood release knob (page 473)
Fuse box (page 502)
*1: For details about how to use the audio and
navigation system (if equipped), refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(29,1)
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
27
STEERING WHEEL
s00bb
S_002452-W
Audio control switch*1
TRIP RESET switch (page 158)
Talk switch for voice assistance system*1
Cruise control switches*2
Shift paddles (page 325)
X-MODE switch (page 335)
Heated Steering Wheel switch (page
249)
SRS airbag (page 83)
Horn (page 250)
Hands-free phone switch*1
Control switches for instrument cluster
display (page 187)
*1: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for
the EyeSight system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(30,1)
28
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
LIGHT CONTROL AND WIPER CONTROL LEVERS/
SWITCHES
s00bc
S_002330-W
Windshield wiper (page 221)
Mist (page 223)
Windshield washer (page 225)
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 225)
Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 224)/Sensor sensitivity control
(page 224)
Wiper control lever (page 223)
Light control switch (page 212)
Fog light switch (page 220)
Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 213)
Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 215)
Turn signal lever (page 221)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(31,1)
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
29
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
s00bd
U.S.-SPEC. MODELS
s00bd01
S_002453-W
Tachometer (page 158)
Instrument cluster display (page 185)
Speedometer (page 158)
Digital speed screen (page 193)
Fuel gauge (page 159)
Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 180)
Trip meter and odometer (page 158)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
(page 160)
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(32,1)
30
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
CANADA-SPEC. MODELS
s00bd03
S_002454-W
Tachometer (page 158)
Instrument cluster display (page 185)
Speedometer (page 158)
Digital speed screen (page 193)
Fuel gauge (page 159)
Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 180)
Trip meter and odometer (page 158)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
(page 160)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(33,1)
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
31
1
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(34,1)
32
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
TABLE OF WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
s00be
Mark
Name
Page
Mark
Name
Page
Seatbelt warning light
163
Low fuel warning light
174
Front passenger’s seatbelt
warning light
163
All-Wheel Drive warning
light
174
Rear seatbelt warning light
164
Power steering warning
light
174
SRS airbag system warning light
165
Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
173
Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator light
166
Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
175
Front passenger’s frontal
airbag OFF indicator light
166
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light
176
CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator
light
166
Access key warning indicator
176
Coolant temperature low
indicator light (blue)/Coolant temperature high
warning light (red)
167
Security indicator light
180
Charge warning light
168
Turn signal indicator lights
180
Oil pressure warning light
168
High beam indicator light
181
Engine low oil level warning light
168
High beam assist indicator
181
AT OIL TEMP warning light
169
LED headlight warning
light
181
/
ABS warning light
170
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
181
/
Brake system warning
light
171
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
181
/
Electronic parking brake
indicator light
172
Front fog light indicator
light
181
Door open indicator light
174
Headlight indicator light
181
Engine hood open warning
light
174
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(35,1)
33
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
Mark
Name
Page
Low tire pressure warning
light (except for Canadaspec. models)
Mark
Name
Page
169
Distraction Mitigation System OFF indicator light
184
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
174
Distraction Mitigation System temporary stop indicator light
184
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light
181
Front Cross Traffic Braking
warning indicator (if
equipped)
184
Auto Start Stop indicator
light (green)
182
Front Cross Traffic Braking
OFF indicator (if equipped)
184
Auto Start Stop warning
light (yellow)
181
Auto Start Stop No Activity
Detected indicator light
182
BSW/RCTW warning indicator
183
BSW/RCTW OFF indicator
183
Vehicle detected in neighboring lane indicator
182
X-MODE indicator
182
Hill descent control indicator light
183
Icy road surface warning
indicator
183
RAB warning indicator
183
RAB OFF indicator
183
Proximity Warning Detection OFF indicator
184
Electric damper system
warning light (if equipped)
182
Distraction Mitigation System operation indicator
light (green)
184
Distraction Mitigation System warning light (yellow)
184
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(36,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(37,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1-1.
Front Seats ....................................................................................37
s01
Manual Seat (If Equipped) ............................................................. 39
Power Seat (If Equipped)............................................................... 40
Driver’s Seat Memory Function (If Equipped) ................................. 41
Head Restraint Adjustment............................................................ 45
1-2.
Rear Seats .....................................................................................47
Folding Down the Rear Seatback................................................... 47
Reclining the Seatback.................................................................. 50
Head Restraint Adjustment............................................................ 50
Armrest ........................................................................................ 52
1-3.
Seat Heater and Front Seat Ventilation (If Equipped) ................53
Front Seat Heater.......................................................................... 53
Front Seat Ventilation (If Equipped) ............................................... 54
Rear Seat Heater (If Equipped) ...................................................... 54
1-4.
Seatbelts ........................................................................................55
Seatbelt Safety Tips ...................................................................... 55
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).............................................. 56
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor
(ALR/ELR)................................................................................... 56
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ................................................ 57
Fastening the Seatbelt .................................................................. 57
Seatbelt Maintenance .................................................................... 63
1-5.
Seatbelt Pretensioners .................................................................64
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner....................................... 64
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt Pretensioners ................ 65
System Monitors ........................................................................... 66
System Servicing .......................................................................... 66
Precautions against Vehicle Modification....................................... 66
1-6.
1-7.
Rear Seat Reminder......................................................................67
Child Restraint Systems...............................................................67
Safety Precautions ........................................................................ 67
Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems ......................... 68
Choosing a Child Restraint System ............................................... 70
When Installing the Forward Facing Child Restraint System
on the Front Passenger’s Seat .................................................... 70
Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt ............. 72
Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion ................................ 76
Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower and
Tether Anchors (LATCH).............................................................. 78
1-8.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag) ...............83
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System ...................... 83
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System for
Accessories and Any Objects ..................................................... 85
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System and
Children...................................................................................... 87
Components ................................................................................. 90
SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System.................................... 92
SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag.................................... 103
SRS Airbag System Monitors ...................................................... 110
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(38,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
SRS Airbag System Servicing ......................................................111
Precautions against Vehicle Modification..................................... 112
How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer Concerning
Modifications for Persons with Disabilities That May Affect
the Advanced Airbag System .................................................... 113
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(39,1)
37
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1-1. FRONT SEATS
back in the seat.
s01aa
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving,
as personal injury or loss of vehicle
control may occur.
WARNING
. Before adjusting the seat, ensure
nothing is blocking the adjusting
mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to ensure the seat is
securely locked. If it is not, it may
move suddenly or the seatbelt may
not operate properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with front
seat locking mechanism and cause
an accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back
and upright in the seat. To reduce
the risk of sliding under the seatbelt
in a collision, the front seatbacks
should always be used in the
upright position while the vehicle is
running. If the front seatbacks are
not in the upright position and a
collision occurs, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not seated in
the proper upright position when
the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the
driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control,
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
S_103040-MW
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. SUBARU strongly recommends
that ALL infants and children (including those in child restraint
systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker
than adults, their risk of being
injured from deployment is greater.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P67.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(40,1)
38
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
WARNING
. SRS seat cushion airbag
. Front seat heater
. Front seat ventilation (if equipped)
. Power seat (if equipped)
WARNING
S_103041-MW
To prevent the passenger from sliding
under the seatbelt in the event of a
collision, always put the seatback in
the upright position while the vehicle is
in motion. Also, do not place objects
such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so,
the risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
S_103043-MW
Do not press your feet onto the
instrument panel. Doing so may prevent the occupant detection function
of the SRS airbag system and SRS
airbag from functioning correctly. This
may result in serious injury or death in
the event of an accident.
WARNING
S_103042-MW
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may interfere
with the proper operation of the
following systems and could result in
serious injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
S_103044-MW
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint
when the occupant sits well back and
upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between
occupants and seatbacks or seat
cushions. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the lap
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(41,1)
39
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
belt sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
1
Reclining the seatback
s01aa0102
WARNING
1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the
seatback to the desired position, and
then release the lever.
S_103045-MW
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
MANUAL SEAT (If Equipped)
s01aa01
Forward and backward adjustment
S_103309-W
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force
when pulling up the lever. While operating
the lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
s01aa0101
1. Sit in the seat.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to
the desired position, and then release
the lever.
S_103308-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(42,1)
40
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
POWER SEAT (If Equipped)
s01aa02
NOTE
During forward/backward adjustment of
the seat, you cannot adjust the seat
cushion angle or seat cushion height.
Lumbar support control switch
(driver’s seat)
s01aa0212
S_103292-W
Seat position forward/backward control
switch
Seat cushion angle control switch
Seat height control switch
Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward:
Move the seat position forward/backward
control switch forward or backward.
To adjust the seat cushion angle:
Pull up or push down the front end of the
seat cushion angle control switch.
To adjust the seat height:
Pull up or push down the rear end of the
seat height control switch.
To adjust the angle of the seatback:
Move the seatback angle (reclining) control switch.
S_103293-W
2-way lumbar support models
4-way lumbar support models
2-way lumbar support models:
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease lower
back support, push the rear side of the
switch.
4-way lumbar support models:
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease lower
back support, push the rear side of the
switch.
To adjust the lumbar support height, push
the upper or lower side of the switch.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(43,1)
41
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Thigh extension (if equipped)
s01aa0210
CAUTION
When the thigh extension is pulled out
to its fullest, do not put weight on the
top of it. Doing so could break the part.
. When retrieving a registered seat
position, make sure the hands, feet
and possessions of rear seat
passengers are clear of the seat
adjusting mechanism.
. When any unusual conditions or
malfunctions occur during the retrieval of the seat position, stop the
retrieval of the seat position by
performing any of the following.
– Operate any of the power seat
switches.
– Press the “SET” button.
– Press button “1” or “2”.
– Operate the outside mirror
control switch.
S_103372-W
The seat front length can be adjusted.
Pull up the lever to adjust the length and
release the lever to lock it.
DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY
FUNCTION (If Equipped)
s01aa03
WARNING
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or
personal injury, never perform the
following operations while driving.
– Adjusting the seat
– Retrieving the seat position
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure that cargo or the hands and
feet of rear seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. Perform the seat position retrieval
before driving. Be sure to confirm
that the select lever is in the “P”
position, and the parking brake is
applied, when adjusting the seat
position. Do not drive until the
retrieval of the seat position is
complete.
Some seat positions can be registered.
Register the seat position with button “1”
or “2” or each of the key fobs and retrieve
the seat position.
The following seat positions can be
registered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of the seatback
. Angle of the seat cushion
. Height of the seat
. Angle of the outside mirrors
. Angle of the outside mirrors while the
vehicle is in reverse
NOTE
The seat position can also be retrieved
with the Distraction Mitigation System
user information. To do so, perform user
registration in the Distraction Mitigation
System settings. Refer to “Using the
Distraction Mitigation System” �P398.
Registration of memory position with button “1” or “2”
s01aa0301
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(44,1)
42
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The select lever is in the “P”
position.
2. Register the adjusted positions by
either of the following procedures.
. Press the “SET” button, then press
either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds
within 5 seconds.
. While pressing and holding the
“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”
until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.
S_103340-W
A chirp will sound once to signal that the
following items were registered.
. Driver’s seat position
. Both outside mirrors’ angles
. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles (passenger’s side only)
NOTE
If a new position is registered for the same
button, the previously registered memory
position is deleted.
Registration of the reverse tiltdown mirror angle with button
“1” or “2”
s01aa0302
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror
angle.
1. Move the select lever to the “R”
position, then the outside mirror angle
will move to the reverse tilt-down
position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For
details about the settings, refer to
“Remote control mirror switch”
�P246.
3. Move the select lever to the “P”
position, then the outside mirror angle
will return to its original position.
4. Register the adjusted positions by
either of the following procedures.
. Press the “SET” button, then press
either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds
within 5 seconds.
. While pressing and holding the
“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”
until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.
A chirp will sound once to signal that the
following items were registered.
. Driver’s seat position
. Both outside mirrors’ angles
. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles (passenger’s side only)
NOTE
The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as the front passenger’s side mirror. The setting of the right
and left side mirror/front passenger’s side
mirror operation can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
Registration of memory position with a key fob
s01aa0303
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “OFF”
position.
. The select lever is in the “P”
position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(45,1)
43
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
2. Hold the access key fob and press and
hold the “SET” button, then press the
“ ” button of the access key fob.
3. Move the select lever to the “P”
position, then the outside mirror angle
will return to its original position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
5. Hold the access key fob and press and
hold the “SET” button, then press the
“ ” button of the access key fob.
A chirp will sound once to signal that the
following items were registered.
. Driver’s seat position
. Both outside mirrors’ angles
. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles
(passenger’s side only)
S_103341-W
A chirp will sound once to signal that the
following items were registered.
. Driver’s seat position
. Both outside mirrors’ angles
. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles (passenger’s side only)
NOTE
When registering the seat position, carry
the access key that you want to register
with you. If you are carrying 2 or more
access keys, registration may not be
possible.
Registration of the reverse tiltdown mirror angle with the key
fob
s01aa0304
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as the front passenger’s side mirror. The setting of the
right and left side mirror/front passenger’s side mirror operation can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
. The system stores the adjusted mirror
angle for approximately 45 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position. Register the mirror
angle while the memory function is
available.
Retrieval of memory position
registered with button “1” or
“2”
s01aa0305
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror
angle.
1. Move the select lever to the “R”
position, then the outside mirror angle
will move to the reverse tilt-down
position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For
details about the settings, refer to
“Remote control mirror switch”
�P246.
WARNING
Be sure to press the correct button to
retrieve your registered seat position.
If the seat position is not optimum for
you, it may adversely affect your
driving and may reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt. That could result
in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(46,1)
44
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
2. Put the select lever is in the “P”
position and apply the parking brake,
then press button “1” or “2”.
2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing
the “ ” button or touching the sensor
behind the door handle.
S_103158-W
S_103342-W
A chirp will sound and the seat and
outside mirror move to the registered
position.
When the select lever is moved to the “R”
position, the outside mirror will move to
the registered reverse tilt-down position.
NOTE
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered memory position data will
not be deleted.
. When the button “1” or “2” is pressed
within 45 seconds after the driver’s
door is opened, the registered memory position can be retrieved even if
the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
position.
. If buttons “1” and “2” are pressed at
the same time, execution of seat
position retrieval may not be possible.
. When the retrieved position is the
same as the current seat position, a
chirp will sound twice.
Retrieval of the memory position registered with access key
fob
s01aa0306
1. Hold the registered access key fob.
3. Open the driver’s door.
A chirp will sound and the seat and angle
of the outside mirrors moves to the
registered position.
When the select lever is moved to the “R”
position, the outside mirror will move to
the registered reverse tilt-down position.
NOTE
. A retrieved seat position might deviate
as the function is used continuously
over time.
. A retrieved seat position might deviate
if you attempt to continue operating
the registered seat in the same direction when the registered seat is
already at the farthest possible point of
adjustment in any direction.
. If the registered memory position
cannot be retrieved after performing
the previous procedures, try the following procedures.
(1) Press the “SET” button on the
driver’s door.
(2) Press the “ ” button on the
access key fob or the door lock
button to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
disabled, the memory position cannot
be retrieved by touching the sensor
behind the driver’s door handle.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(47,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
However, the memory position can still
be retrieved by pressing the “ ” button
on the access key fob. For information
about how to enable/disable the keyless access function, refer to “Disabling Keyless Access Function”
�P126.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key fob, the previously
registered memory position data will
be deleted.
. If you are carrying 2 or more access
keys, seat position retrieval may not
be possible.
. If, while carrying an access key, 45
seconds passed after you enter the
operating range of the keyless access
function, it may not be possible to
retrieve the registered memory position even if the door is open. For the
operating range of the keyless access
function, refer to “Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access” Entry
Function” �P120.
Clearing the registered seat
position with access key fob
s01aa0307
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Hold the access key fob and press and
hold the “SET” button, then press the
“ ” button on the access key fob.
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat
position and outside mirror angle on the
passenger’s side will be cleared.
45
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck from
the rear. Also, never install the
head restraints backwards. Doing
so will prevent the head restraints
from functioning as intended.
Therefore, when the head restraints are removed, all head
restraints must be reinstalled
properly to protect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit
in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be installed into the rear seats only. Do
not attempt to install the front seat
head restraints into the rear seats,
or the rear seat head restraints into
the front seats.
Both the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjustable in the following ways.
NOTE
After deleting the seat position, wait for a
few moments before registering a new
seat position.
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
s01aa04
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(48,1)
46
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Head restraint height adjustment
s01aa0401
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be pulled
out or installed due to insufficient clearance between the head restraint and the
roof, tilt the seat and then perform the
installation and removal tasks.
S_103209-W
Head restraint
Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button.
To remove:
Pull out the head restraint while pressing
the release button.
To install:
Press and hold the release button while
pushing the head restraint in until it locks
in place.
S_103048-MW
Each head restraint should be adjusted
so that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(49,1)
47
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1-2. REAR SEATS
s01ac
FOLDING DOWN THE REAR
SEATBACK
s01ac02
WARNING
WARNING
. When you fold down the seatback,
check that there are no passengers
or objects on the rear seat. Not
doing so creates a risk of injury or
property damage if the seatback
suddenly folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride on
the folded rear seatback or in the
cargo area. Doing so may result in
serious injury or death.
S_103049-MW
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint
when the occupant sits back and
upright in the seat. Do not place
cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or
seat cushions. By doing so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
WARNING
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent them
from being thrown around inside
the vehicle and causing serious
injury during a sudden stop, a
sudden steering maneuver or a
rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to its
original position, shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is
securely fixed in place. If the seatback is not securely fixed in place,
the seatback may suddenly fold
down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the cargo area, which could
cause serious injury or death.
S_103045-MW
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback as
it could tumble forward and injure
passengers in the event of a sudden
stop or accident.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(50,1)
48
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
back while holding it. Do not hold
the seatbelt guide or strap when
raising the seatback.
WARNING
. Do not hang anything on the lock
release strap or belt guide.
. Do not insert the lock release strap
into the hole of the strap attachment part.
Folding down the rear seatback
S_103367-W
s01ac0202
1. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in
the belt guide, and then slide the rest
of the belt out.
S_103368-W
Striker
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lead
to serious injury or an accident because the operation efficiency of the
seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not be caught
in the seatback and it should be
fully visible.
S_103365-W
2. Lower the head restraint.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the striker for the seatback.
CAUTION
. Do not hang luggage etc. on the
striker. The possibility exists that
the seatback may not be able to be
fixed firmly in place. This could lead
to unexpected accidents
. When returning the seatback to its
original position, raise the seat-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(51,1)
49
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
3. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
strap or lever as shown in the illustration, and then fold the seatback down
by supporting it with your hands.
lowing precaution.
Failure to observe the precaution
may damage the seatbelt, impairing its effectiveness, and possibly
result in a serious injury.
. When returning the seatback to its
original position, pull the seatbelt
out towards the vehicle exterior so
that it will not be caught between
the seatback and the trim.
1. To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it
locks into place.
2. To pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide, draw out the seatbelt, insert
one edge of the belt into the open gap
in the belt guide, and then slide the
rest of the belt in so that the entire belt
fits inside the belt guide.
S_103343-W
Lock release strap
Release lever
Return the rear seatback
S_103373-W
s01ac0204
WARNING
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, shake the seatback
slightly to confirm that it is securely
fixed in place. If the seatback is not
securely fixed in place, the seatback
may suddenly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may move
out from the cargo area, which could
cause serious injury or death.
S_103344-W
. When returning the seatback to its
original position, observe the fol– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(52,1)
50
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
RECLINING THE SEATBACK
s01ac06
WARNING
S_103365-W
S_103041-MW
2. Pull the strap and adjust the seatback
to the desired position.
To prevent the passenger from sliding
under the seatbelt in the event of a
collision, observe the following precautions:
. Keep the seatback in the upright
position while the vehicle is in
motion.
. Do not place objects such as
cushions between the passenger
and the seatback.
Otherwise, the risk of sliding under the
lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up
over the abdomen will increase, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with a multiuse cargo cover, observe the following
precaution.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the head restraint and the
multi-use cargo cover when you
recline the rear seat.
1. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in
the belt guide, and then slide the rest
of the belt out.
S_103405-W
3. Release the strap and move the
seatback back and forth to confirm
that it is securely fixed in place.
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
s01ac03
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck from
the rear. Therefore, when the head
restraints are removed, all head
restraints must be reinstalled
properly to protect vehicle occupants.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(53,1)
51
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
. All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit
in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be installed into the rear seats only. Do
not attempt to install the front seat
head restraints into the rear seats,
or the rear seat head restraints into
the front seats.
Rear windows side seating position
s01ac0301
S_103406-W
Head restraint
Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull
out the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes
that are located on the top of the seatback
until the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the seat occupant’s
ears. When the seats are not occupied,
lower the head restraints to improve
rearward visibility.
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be pulled
out or installed due to insufficient clearance between the head restraint and the
roof, tilt the seat and then perform the
installation and removal tasks.
Rear center seating position
s01ac0302
CAUTION
S_103214-MW
Incorrect (retracted position)
Correct (extended position)
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended position.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(54,1)
52
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
ARMREST
s01ac01
S_103215-W
Head restraint
Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull
out the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes
that are located on the top of the seatback
until the head restraint locks. Press and
hold the release button to lower the head
restraint.
S_103345-W
To lower the armrest, pull the armrest’s
top edge.
WARNING
. Make sure to have the rear passengers wear the seatbelts before
lowering the armrest. If the rear
passengers wear the seatbelts
after lowering the armrest, seatbelts cannot provide maximum
restraint, causing serious injuries.
. To avoid serious injury, never allow
passengers to sit on the center
armrest while the vehicle is in
motion.
When the rear center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(55,1)
53
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1-3. SEAT HEATER AND
FRONT SEAT VENTILATION
(If Equipped)
s01ab
The seat heater and front seat ventilation
operate when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
NOTE
When the vehicle battery power is low, the
seat heater and front seat ventilation will
stop. Start the engine to use the seat
heater and front seat ventilation.
FRONT SEAT HEATER
s01ab05
CAUTION
. Do not sit on or apply weight to the
front seatback when it is reclined.
. Do not kick the front seatback from
the rear seat.
. When reclining the front seatback,
ensure it does not make contact
with the rear seat.
. Do not put hard or heavy objects or
ones with protrusions on the seat,
and do not stab the seat with sharp
objects, such as pins or needles.
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat, such
as a blanket, cushion, or similar
items. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle, be
sure to turn off the seat heater.
. If water or liquid is spilled on the
seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth
immediately.
. Do not use the rear seat heater
while the rear seatback is folded
down. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat.
S_103346-W
Seat heater indicator (orange)
Driver’s seat heater button
Front passenger’s seat heater button
Press the driver’s/passenger’s seat heater button on the climate control panel.
Each time you press the button, the mode
will change as follows.
ZOM0967-W
HIGH:
3 indicator lights are illuminated in orange.
MID:
2 indicator lights are illuminated in orange.
LOW:
1 indicator light is illuminated in orange.
OFF:
All indicator lights turn off.
Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(56,1)
54
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Holding and releasing the seat heater
button turns the seat heater off in any
mode.
NOTE
The front seat heater function cannot be
used simultaneously with the seat ventilation.
Holding and releasing the seat ventilation
button turns the seat ventilation off in any
mode.
REAR SEAT HEATER (If
Equipped)
s01ab06
CAUTION
FRONT SEAT VENTILATION (If
Equipped)
s01ab09
Do not open and close the center
console lid while operating the rear
seat heater switch. There is the risk of
fingers being caught in the lid.
S_103347-W
Seat ventilation indicator (blue)
Driver’s seat ventilation button
Front passenger’s seat ventilation button
Press the driver’s/passenger’s seat ventilation button on the climate control
panel. Each time you press the button,
the mode will change as follows.
S_103218-W
Left side
Right side
Indicator lights
Press the rear seat heater switch. Each
time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
ZOM0967-W
HIGH:
3 indicator lights are illuminated in blue.
MID:
2 indicator lights are illuminated in blue.
LOW:
1 indicator light is illuminated in blue.
OFF:
All indicator lights turn off.
ZOM0978-W
HIGH:
2 indicator lights are illuminated.
LOW:
1 indicator light is illuminated.
OFF:
All indicator lights turn off.
Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(57,1)
55
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
NOTE
Only the front seat heater switches retain
the previous switch position even if the
vehicle has restarted. The rear seat
switch will reset.
1-4. SEATBELTS
s01ae
SEATBELT SAFETY TIPS
s01ae01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the
vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,
the possibility of serious injury
becomes greater in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
. All belts should fit snugly in order to
provide full restraint. Loose fitting
belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a
single belt for two or more persons
– even children. Otherwise, in an
accident, serious injury or death
could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attaching
hardware worn by occupants of a
vehicle that has been in a serious
accident. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. SUBARU strongly recommends
that ALL infants and children (including those in child restraint
systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, espe– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(58,1)
56
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
cially if they are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker
than adults, their risk of being
injured from deployment is greater.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P67.
Expectant mothers
s01ae0103
S_103055-MW
This vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which
will record whether the seatbelt is in use
by the front passenger when an SRS
frontal, side or curtain airbag deploys.
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap
belt should be worn securely and as low
as possible over the hips, not over the
waist.
Infants or small children
s01ae0101
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for this vehicle. Refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P67.
Children
s01ae0102
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than
in the front seating positions. Never allow
a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTOR (ELR)
s01ae02
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR/EMERGENCY
LOCKING RETRACTOR (ALR/
ELR)
s01ae03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor normally functions as
an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
The ALR/ELR has an additional locking
mode, “Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode”, intended to secure a child
restraint system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(59,1)
57
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode. For instructions on how to install
the child restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to “Installing Child Restraint
Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt” �P72.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
seatbacks should be always used
in the upright position while the
vehicle is running. If the front
seatbacks are not used in the
upright position in a collision, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both
can result in serious internal injury
or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants and
seatbacks or seat cushions. If you
do so, the risk of sliding under the
lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up
over the abdomen will increase,
and both can result in serious
internal injury or death.
WARNING
SEATBELT WARNING
LIGHT AND CHIME
s01ae04
Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and
Chime” �P163.
FASTENING THE SEATBELT
s01ae06
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a collision,
this spreads the force of the lap belt
over stronger hip bones instead of
across the weaker abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. To
reduce the risk of sliding under the
seatbelt in a collision, the front
S_103056-MW
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase the
risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather; they
could burn an occupant. Do not touch
such hot parts until they cool.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(60,1)
58
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position.
s01ae0601
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Driver’s seat:
Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat:
Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as
possible.
S_103058-MW
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and
pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out
slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips, not on the waist.
Adjusting the front seat
shoulder belt anchor height
s01ae0611
S_103375-W
S_103057-MW
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best suited for
the driver/front passenger. Always adjust
the anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push and hold the upper part of the
anchor and slide the anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it
is locked in place.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(61,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
59
1. Check that the shoulder belt is fitted in
the belt guide.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it
does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a
lower position. Placing the shoulder
belt over the neck may result in neck
injury during sudden braking or in a
collision.
1
Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the button on the buckle.
s01ae0612
S_103374-W
S_103219-MW
Button
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and
pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after
giving a strong pull on it, then pull it
out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
Rear seatbelts (except rear
center seatbelt)
s01ae0602
WARNING
S_103057-MW
Fastening your seatbelt with the
shoulder belt twisted can increase the
risk and severity of injuries in an
accident. When attaching the shoulder
belt to the belt guide, make sure that
the shoulder belt is not twisted.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(62,1)
60
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Rear center seatbelt
s01ae0603
S_103220-W
S_103058-MW
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips, not on the waist.
Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the button on the buckle.
Center seatbelt tongue plate
Anchor tongue plate
Anchor buckle
Center seatbelt buckle
s01ae0613
S_103219-MW
Button
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
WARNING
S_103069-W
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident. When
fastening the belt after it is pulled out
from the retractor, especially when
inserting the anchor tongue plate into
the mating buckle (on right-hand side),
always check that the webbing is not
twisted.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(63,1)
61
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
recess of the ceiling.
1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate from
the slot in the recess by pulling the
anchor tongue plate, then pull out the
seatbelt slowly.
WARNING
S_103070-W
. Be sure to fasten both tongue
plates to the respective buckles. If
the seatbelt is used only as a
shoulder belt (with the anchor
tongue plate not fastened to the
anchor buckle on the right-hand
side), it cannot properly restrain the
wearer in position in an accident,
possibly resulting in serious injury
or death.
S_103071-W
2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide.
. Before fastening the seatbelt, confirm that the seatbelt is routed
through the belt guide. A seatbelt
not routed through the belt guide
can cause neck injuries during
sudden braking or in a collision,
since it may slip up on the neck.
S_103072-W
3. Make sure that the “ ” mark on the
anchor tongue plate and the “ ” mark
on the anchor buckle face outwards.
S_103202-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(64,1)
62
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
4. After confirming that the webbing is
not twisted, insert the anchor tongue
plate attached at the webbing end into
the buckle on the right-hand side until
a click sounds.
6. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
S_103076-W
7. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips, not on the waist.
S_103074-W
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and
pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
give it a strong pull and let it retract
slightly, then pull it out slowly again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae0614
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side)
to unfasten the seatbelt.
S_103221-W
Button
NOTE
S_103075-W
When the seatback is folded down, it is
necessary to disconnect the connector.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(65,1)
63
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
pointed object into the slot in the
anchor buckle on the right-hand side
and push it in. The anchor tongue
plate will then disconnect from the
buckle.
CAUTION
1
S_103080-W
S_103295-W
3. With the belt held by hand, allow the
retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You
should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it
is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue
plate in the recess on the ceiling and
then insert the anchor tongue plate
into the slot located at the front of the
recess.
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit
against the trim, causing damage to
the trim.
. Do not allow the retractor to roll up
the seatbelt too quickly.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so
that the tongue plates are neatly
stored.
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
s01ae07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
S_103079-W
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes, oils,
chemicals and particularly battery
acid.
. Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating properly.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(66,1)
64
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1-5. SEATBELT PRETENSIONERS
s01af
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt
pretensioner.
. Driver’s seatbelt
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Window-side rear passenger’s seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to be activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
and side collision and rollover accident.
.
.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection, the
occupants should sit in an upright
position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to “Seatbelts”
�P55.
. Do not modify, remove or strike the
seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or surrounding area. This
could result in accidental activation
of the seatbelt pretensioners or
could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious
injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have
no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding seatbelt retractor
assemblies equipped with seatbelt
pretensioners or scrapping the
entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult
your SUBARU dealer.
.
.
– Front impact sensors
– Side impact sensors
– Rollover sensor
Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt pretensioners
should be replaced only by an
authorized SUBARU dealer. When
replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
pretensioner does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction
or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged,
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with seatbelt pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer of the
contents in this section.
SEATBELT WITH SHOULDER
BELT PRETENSIONER
s01af01
NOTE
This section is applicable to the following
components.
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (windowside)
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts. The pretensioner can
also be activated by the following
sensors.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(67,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
65
SEATBELT WITH SHOULDER
BELT AND LAP BELT PRETENSIONERS
s01af02
NOTE
This section is applicable to the driver’s
seatbelt.
S_103084-W
If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner
is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
S_103222-W
The window-side rear passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension
reducing device that limits the peak
forces exerted by the seatbelt on the
occupant in the event of a collision.
The front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device
which limits the peak forces exerted by
the seatbelt on the occupant in the event
of a collision.
. Adaptive force limiter
The front passenger’s side adaptive force
limiter will select a reducing load to suit
the body size of the occupant as detected
by the occupant detection sensor.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard
and a small amount of smoke will be
released. These occurrences are normal
and not harmful. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter)
Lap belt pretensioner
If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner
is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner,
which is located at the base of the center
pillar. The lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the belt to eliminate slack
if a certain level of frontal collision force is
detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more
effectively.
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which
limits the peak forces exerted by the
seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
collision.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(68,1)
66
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
. Adaptive force limiter
The driver’s side adaptive force limiter will
select a reducing load to suit the body
size of the occupant as detected by the
driver’s seat position sensor.
consult your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard
and a small amount of smoke will be
released. These occurrences are normal
and not harmful. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Components” �P90.
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by
your authorized SUBARU dealer.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
SYSTEM MONITORS
s01af03
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
with the ignition switch in the “ON”
position. The seatbelt pretensioners
share the control module with the SRS
airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner,
the SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS
Airbag System Monitors” �P110.
SYSTEM SERVICING
s01af04
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping the
entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result in
accidental activation of the seatbelt
pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or
could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious
injury. Do not use electrical test
equipment on any circuit related to
the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS
airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner,
CAUTION
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent that
the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST VEHICLE MODIFICATION
s01af05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications can
interfere with proper operation of the
seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genuine
SUBARU accessory parts to the
front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different size
and construction from the tires
specified on the vehicle placard
attached to the driver’s door pillar
or specified for individual vehicle
models in this Owner’s Manual.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(69,1)
67
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1-6. REAR SEAT REMINDER
s01at
This function prompts the driver to confirm the presence of passengers and
cargo in the rear.
This function will be activated when the
rear doors are opened and closed.
It alerts the driver by warning messages
on the instrument cluster display and
beeps when the ignition switch is turned
from the “ON” position to the “OFF”
position.
1-7. CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
s01ag
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s01ag19
S_103087-MW
Infants and children must be placed in an
infant or child restraint system on the rear
seat while riding in the vehicle.
S_103266-W
NOTE
. This function does not directly detect
passengers and cargo in the rear seat.
. This function detects the opening and
closing of the rear doors. In this
situation, there is the possibility that
the following phenomenon may occur.
– It may alert the driver even if there
are no passengers or cargo in the
rear seat.
– It may not alert the driver even if
there are passengers and cargo in
the rear seat.
. This function can be set to on or off by
the “Settings”. For details, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
. The ON/OFF setting will not be changed even if the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position.
. The ON/OFF setting will be returned to
the default setting if the battery is
removed.
You must use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower
and Tether Anchors (LATCH)” �P78).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(70,1)
68
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
moving.
WARNING
WARNING
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
. Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior temperatures may cause heat stroke and
dehydration that result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
S_103088-MW
Never let a passenger hold a child on
their lap or in their arms while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child (or infant) from
injury in a collision, because the child
will be caught between the passenger
and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, if a passenger holds a child on
their lap or in their arms in the front
seat, they expose the child to another
serious danger. Since the SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
S_103089-MW
Children should be properly restrained
at all times when in the vehicle. Never
allow a child to stand or kneel on any
seat. An unrestrained child will be
thrown forward during a sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously. Additionally, a child who
stands or kneels on or in front of the
front seat is exposed to another
serious danger. Since the SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
SAFETY TIPS FOR INSTALLING
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
s01ag16
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child in
it.
. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If a
seatbelt extender is used when
installing a child restraint system,
the seatbelt will not securely hold
the child restraint system. Use of a
seatbelt extender could cause
death or serious injury to children
or other passengers in sudden
braking, swerving, or accidents.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(71,1)
69
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
. Attach the child restraint system to
the anchors properly. When using
the LATCH anchors, be sure that
there are no foreign objects around
the anchors. Make sure the child
restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise, it may cause
death or serious injury to children
or other passengers in sudden
braking, swerving, or accidents.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems
can be thrown around inside of the
vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or
accident; they can strike and injure
vehicle occupants as well as result
in serious injuries or death to the
child.
. Several types of child restraint
systems may conceal the buckle of
the neighboring seat. If the occupant of the neighboring seat cannot
correctly fasten the seatbelt, that
person must move to a different
seat. If the seatbelt cannot be
correctly fastened, there is the risk
of serious injury or death in the
event of sudden braking or a
collision.
. If the child restraint system cannot
be correctly installed because it
contacts the driver’s seat, move
the child restraint system to a
different seat. If it cannot be
installed in a different seat (other
than the driver’s seat), adjust the
front seat so that contact does not
occur.
. Even with advanced airbags, infants and children can be seriously
injured by the airbag. Seat children
in the rear seat properly restrained.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are not restrained
or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker
than adults, their risk of being
injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint systems on the REAR seats. You
should choose a restraint system
which is appropriate for the child’s
age, height and weight. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in
the front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchors for a seat
in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
. Do not connect two or more lower
anchor attachments onto the same
lower anchor.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Do not allow children to lean their
heads or any other parts of their
bodies against the door or the area
of the seat, front and rear pillars or
roof side rails. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
deploy even if children are seated
in the child restraint system, and
the impact could cause death or
serious injury to the child.
. To secure the child restraint system, be sure to comply with all
installation instructions provided
by the child restraint system manufacturer. Not doing so could result
in death or serious injury to children
in a sudden stop or accident.
. When installing a child restraint
system (except when using
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(72,1)
70
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
LATCH), always ensure the seat
belt is threaded through the belt
guide to secure the child restraint
system.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held securely
in position. If it is not held tight and
secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the event of
an accident may be increased.
NOTE
Some sizes of child restraint systems
may not fit the vehicle seat. Before
purchasing a child restraint system,
check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.
WHEN INSTALLING THE FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT
s01ag15
WARNING
CHOOSING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
s01ag02
S_103091-MW
S_103090-MW
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United
States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards for Canada. It can be identified
by looking for the label on the child
restraint system or the manufacturer’s
statement of compliance in the document
attached to the system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child
restraint system is compatible with the
vehicle in which it will be used.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. The front passenger’s seat is not
equipped with tether anchors.
Therefore, when installing a child
restraint system that uses tether,
do not install it on the front
passenger’s seat.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(73,1)
71
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Only forward facing child restraint systems (including booster seats) can be
installed on this seat and should only be
installed when it is unavoidable. When
you install a forward facing child restraint
system to the front passenger’s seat,
perform the following procedure.
1. Adjust the front passenger’s seat as
illustrated.
1
S_103349-W
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
S_103224-W
Seat position: Rearmost as possible
Seat cushion height (if equipped):
Uppermost
Seatback: Upright
2. Install the child restraint system to the
front passenger’s seat. Refer to “Installing a forward facing child restraint
system” �P74.
3. Place and secure the child in the child
restraint system.
4. Check that the front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON/OFF indicator light
status meets the requirements of your
child restraint system.
When front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator light is illuminated:
Only forward facing child restraint
systems can be installed on the front
passenger’s seat.
When front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator light is illuminated:
The child restraint systems cannot be
installed on the front passenger’s seat.
Install the child restraint system on the
rear seats. For more details, refer to
“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag
System” �P92.
5. Check that the child restraint system
does not contact the head restraint. If
the child restraint system does make
contact with the head restraint, raise
the head restraint to the extended
position. If the child restraint system
still makes contact, remove the head
restraint. For details, refer to “Head
Restraint Adjustment” �P45.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(74,1)
72
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WITH ALR/
ELR SEATBELT
s01ag04
CAUTION
child restraint system.
1. Check that the shoulder belt is fitted in
the belt guide. For details, refer to
“Return the rear seatback” �P49.
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be
increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to the
original position. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained, which may
result in death or serious injuries in
the event of sudden stop, sudden
steering maneuver or an accident.
Installing a rearward facing
child restraint system
s01ag0401
S_103374-W
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system in the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against the
contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system in the window-side seating
position to be safe.
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear seat, always
ensure the seat belt is threaded
through the belt guide to secure the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(75,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
73
seatbelt. It should not be possible to
move the child restraint system more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction
along the seatbelt path.
1
S_103094-MW
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
S_103096-MW
8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder
portion of the belt to confirm that it
cannot be pulled out (ALR properly
functioning).
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
S_103095-MW
6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode
is recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions supplied with the
child restraint system, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor
over from the Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate
the retractor functions as ALR.
7. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back
and forth and right and left to check if it
is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
restraint system can be more firmly
secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
S_103097-MW
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to
retract fully.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(76,1)
74
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Installing a forward facing child
restraint system
s01ag0402
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT IF
THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
FRONTAL AIRBAG ON INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved.
4. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint, raise
the head restraint to the extended
position. If the child restraint system
still makes contact, remove the head
restraint. For details, refer to “Head
Restraint Adjustment” �P50.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear seat, always
ensure the seat belt is threaded
through the belt guide to secure the
child restraint system.
1. Check that the shoulder belt is fitted in
the belt guide. For details, refer to
“Return the rear seatback” �P49 and
“Rear center seatbelt” �P60.
S_103201-W
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system in the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against the
contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system in the window-side seating
position to be safe.
CAUTION
Store the removed head restraint in
the cargo area. Do not place the head
restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger compartment
in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
S_103374-W
2. Place the child restraint system in the
appropriate position.
3. For models with rear seat reclining
mechanism, if there is a gap between
the child restraint system and the
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
the child restraint system following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the rear center seating
position, pass the rear center
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(77,1)
75
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
seatbelt through the belt guide
properly. For details, refer to “Rear
center seatbelt” �P60.
along the seatbelt path.
1
S_103101-MW
S_103099-MW
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
10.Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out
(ALR properly functioning).
11. Attach the tether onto the tether
anchor and tighten the tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to
“Tether anchors” �P82.
S_103100-MW
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over
from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow
the belt to rewind into the retractor. As
the belt is rewinding, clicks will be
heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR.
9. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back
and forth and right and left to check if it
is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
restraint system can be more firmly
secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt. It should not be possible to
move the child restraint system more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction
S_103102-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(78,1)
76
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
12.To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
INSTALLING A BOOSTER SEAT
OR BOOSTER CUSHION
s01ag05
S_103226-W
S_103103-MW
Remember that the head restraint is not
intended to be used at the lowest position
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
rear center seat is occupied (including
when a child restraint system is installed)
next time, be sure to raise the head
restraint to the extended position.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to
retract fully.
Booster seat
Booster cushion
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A BOOSTER
SEAT/CUSHION ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S FRONTAL AIRBAG ON INDICATOR
LIGHT ILLUMINATES. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. When installing a booster seat/
cushion in the rear seat, always
ensure the seat belt is threaded
through the belt guide to secure the
booster seat/cushion.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(79,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1. Check that the shoulder belt is fitted
into the belt guide. For details, refer to
“Return the rear seatback” �P49.
77
For booster cushion:
Raise the head restraint to the extended position. Do not remove the
head restraint.
3. Place the booster seat/cushion, and
then sit the child on it. The child should
sit well back on the booster seat/
cushion.
S_103374-W
2. Adjust the head restraint as follows.
For booster seat:
S_103107-W
S_103201-W
Raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the booster seat still
makes contact, remove the head
restraint. For details, refer to “Head
Restraint Adjustment” �P50.
CAUTION
Store the removed head restraint in
the cargo area. Do not place the head
restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger compartment
in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
4. For models with rear seat reclining
mechanism, if there is a gap between
the booster seat/cushion and the
seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. For booster seat/cushion with a belt guide, use the seatbelt
through the belt guide.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is
positioned as low as possible on the
child’s hips.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(80,1)
78
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
7. To unfasten the seatbelt, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle
and allow the belt to retract.
INSTALLATION OF CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BY USE OF
LOWER AND TETHER ANCHORS (LATCH)
s01ag07
S_103108-W
S_103109-W
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind the
child’s back. If an accident occurs,
this can increase the risk or
severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or reducing
injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A highpositioned lap belt will increase the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
WARNING
. Attach the child restraint system to
the anchors properly. When using
the LATCH anchors, be sure that
there are no foreign objects around
the anchors. Make sure the child
restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause
death or serious injury to children
or other passengers in sudden
braking, swerving, or accidents.
. When installing a child restraint
system using LATCH anchors with
the rear seatbelt fastened, ensure
that the rear seatbelt does not
become caught in the child restraint system or the lower LATCH
anchors.
NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the rear
seats detects if any of the seats are
occupied by a passenger. Installing a
child restraint system in the rear seating
area, using the LATCH anchors, may
result in the activation of the passenger
seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior to installing
the child restraint system will avoid
activating the passenger seatbelt warning
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(81,1)
79
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
light and chime. For details, refer to “Rear
passenger’s seats” �P164.
Except for Canada-spec. models:
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchors provided on the vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchors are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
1
S_103312-W
There are a total of 5 lower anchors at the
rear seat. The second lower anchor from
the right side is used for both the right seat
and center seat. Each lower anchor is
located where the seat cushion meets the
seatback.
Canada-spec. models:
S_103110-MW
Your vehicle is equipped with 5 lower
anchors and 3 tether anchors for accommodating such child restraint systems.
Lower anchors
s01ag0702
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower
anchor attachments onto the same
lower anchor.
S_103370-W
Two lower anchors are provided for
installing a child restraint system in the
rear seat window-side seating positions.
Lower anchors for window-side seating
positions may be used for a seat in the
center seating position if a child restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions permit this installation method and specify
using anchors as far apart as those in this
vehicle. Each lower anchor is located
where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(82,1)
80
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Using lower and tether anchors
s01ag0704
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place.
Otherwise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into
place. For details, refer to “Folding
Down the Rear Seatback” �P47.
2. You will find “ ” marks at the bottoms
of the rear seatback. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower
anchors.
Each lower anchor is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Except for Canada-spec. models
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held securely
in position. If it is not held tight and
secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the event of
an accident may be increased.
Peel off the lower anchor cover completely from the selected side of the rear
seatback to expose the lower anchors to
be used for installation of the child
restraint system.
If it is hard to install the child restraint
system because the lower anchor cover
returns to the original position, press the
lower anchor cover to the seat cushion
until it is flat.
S_103310-W
S_103311-W
Canada-spec. models
S_103371-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(83,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
81
3. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the
rear seating position where the child
restraint system is to be installed,
raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint
system still makes contact, remove
the head restraint. For details, refer to
“Head Restraint Adjustment” �P50.
4. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system
manufacturer, connect the lower anchor attachments onto the lower anchors located at “ ” marks on the
bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
S_103201-W
5. For models with rear seat reclining
mechanism, if there is a gap between
the child restraint system and the
seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved.
6. If your child restraint system is a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts), push the child restraint
system into the seat cushion and pull
both left and right lower tether belts up
to secure the child restraint system by
taking up the slack in the belt.
S_103115-MW
CAUTION
Store the removed head restraint in
the cargo area. Do not place the head
restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger compartment
in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
S_103116-MW
7. Attach the tether onto the tether
anchor and tighten the tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to
“Tether anchors” �P82.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(84,1)
82
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
8. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back
and forth and right and left to check if it
is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
restraint system can be more firmly
secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion. It should not be possible
to move the child restraint system
more than 1 in (2.5 cm).
able.
Tether anchor location:
S_103227-W
Left seat anchor
Center seat anchor
Right seat anchor
S_103117-MW
Three tether anchors are installed on the
back side of the rear seatback.
9. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installation.
To hook the tether:
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the
closest inspection location in the U.S.,
refer to the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) website.
In Canada, check with Transport Canada.
. Remove the head restraint when
mounting a child restraint system.
Otherwise, it might be possible that
the tether anchor cannot be fastened tightly.
Tether anchors
s01ag0701
Your vehicle is equipped with three tether
anchors so that a child restraint system
having a tether can be installed in the rear
seat. When installing a child restraint
system using tether, proceed as follows,
while observing the instructions by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
CAUTION
. Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area.
Do not place the head restraint in
the passenger compartment to
prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
Since a tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a
tether whenever one is required or avail-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(85,1)
83
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1. Attach the tether to the appropriate
tether anchor.
1-8. SRS AIRBAG (Supplemental Restraint System
Airbag)
s01ah
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
name is used because the airbag system
supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side
seating positions.
S_103102-W
2. Tighten the tether securely.
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the
closest inspection location in the U.S.,
refer to the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) website.
In Canada, check with Transport Canada.
The system also controls seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and
precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Pretensioners” �P64.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
s01ah10
WARNING
To obtain maximum protection in the
event of an accident, the driver and all
passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS
airbags are designed only to be a
supplement to the primary protection
provided by the seatbelt. They do not
eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts.
Used in combination with the seatbelts, the SRS airbag offers vehicle
occupants the best possible protection
in the event of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the
chance of severe injury or death in a
crash even when the vehicle has the
SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to
“Seatbelts” �P55.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(86,1)
84
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
. Do not strike the area around SRS
airbag system component parts or
subject the area to impact.
WARNING
WARNING
S_103119-MW
The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants
who are not seated in the proper
upright position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment,
the driver should always sit upright
and well back in the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control,
and the front passenger should move
the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
WARNING
S_103338-W
. If you notice any damage or cracks
where an SRS airbag is stored,
have it replaced by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
S_103120-MW
. Do not sit or lean close to either
front door. The SRS side airbags
are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they
provide protection by deploying
rapidly in the event of a side impact
collision. However, the force of
SRS side airbag deployment can
injure an occupant if they are too
close to an SRS airbag.
. Since this vehicle is equipped with
SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or
lean close to the front or rear door
on either side. Do not put body
parts out of the window. The SRS
curtain airbags on both sides of the
cabin are stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point
behind the rear quarter glass), and
they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side
impact, rollover or an offset frontal
collision. However, the force of its
deployment can injure an occupant
if they are too close to an SRS
airbag.
. Do not sit or lean close to the SRS
airbag. Because the SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force to protect in high speed
collisions, the force of an airbag
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(87,1)
85
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
can injure an occupant whose body
is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear a
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant who is not
seated in the proper upright position.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that an
occupant may suffer minor injuries,
such as abrasions and bruises to
the face or arms, because of the
SRS airbag deployment force.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released. This
smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
If you or your passengers have
breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
WARNING
S_103138-MW
. Keep arms away from either door
or its internal trim. Vehicle occupants could be injured in the event
of SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag. If
the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
notify the buyer of the applicable
section in this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply
will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire
caused by leaking fuel. For details
about restarting of the engine, refer to
“If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an
Accident” �P456.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM FOR ACCESSORIES AND
ANY OBJECTS
s01ah13
WARNING
S_103350-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(88,1)
86
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
over the inside rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
WARNING
S_103122-MW
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cords) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard.
– These objects could be entangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from operating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and
could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
WARNING
S_103123-W
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror
S_103124-MW
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a
front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
hands-free microphone or other
accessory in such a location could
be propelled through the cabin with
great force by the curtain airbag, or
it could prevent correct deployment
of the curtain airbag. In either case,
the result could be serious injuries.
. Never hang or place coat hangers
or other hard or pointed objects
near the side windows. If such
items are present when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they could
be thrown through the passenger
compartment and cause serious
injuries. They could also prevent
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(89,1)
87
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
proper operation of the SRS curtain airbags.
WARNING
S_602905-W
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging on
the coat hooks during deployment of
the SRS curtain airbags, they could
cause serious injuries by coming off
the coat hooks and being thrown
through the cabin or by preventing
deployment of the curtain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang clothing
directly on the coat hooks without
using hangers.
and do not attach labels or stickers
to the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seat surface on or
near the SRS side airbag or the
SRS seat cushion airbag. They
could prevent proper deployment
of the SRS side airbag or the SRS
seat cushion airbag, reducing protection available to the occupant of
the driver’s seat or the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not install a seat cover unless it
is a genuine SUBARU seat cover
exclusively designed for use with
the SRS airbag. Even when using a
genuine SUBARU seat cover, the
SRS side airbag or the SRS seat
cushion airbag may not function
normally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM AND CHILDREN
s01ah14
WARNING
WARNING
S_103040-MW
S_103126-MW
. Do not put any kind of clothes or
other objects over the driver’s seat
and front passenger’s seatback
SUBARU strongly recommends that
ALL infants and children (including
those in child restraint systems) sit in
the REAR seat properly restrained in a
child restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the child’s
age, height and weight. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they are
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(90,1)
88
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter
and weaker than adults, their risk of
being injured from deployment is
greater. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions. For
instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to
“Child Restraint Systems” �P67.
WARNING
S_103089-MW
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill
the child.
WARNING
S_103091-MW
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT, AND NEVER INSTALL A
FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S FRONTAL
AIRBAG ON INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
S_103088-MW
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can injure
or even kill the child.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(91,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
89
WARNING
1
S_103127-W
S_103128-W
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window.
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback.
– Put his/her head, arms or other
parts of the body out of the
window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also equipped
with a front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, children and infants
should be placed on the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(92,1)
90
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
COMPONENTS
s01ah11
The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.
S_103228-W
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the
center portion of the steering wheel
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag: near the top of the dashboard
SRS side airbag: in the door side of
each front seat seatback
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point
over the rear seat)
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
SRS seat cushion airbag: in the front
passenger’s seat cushion
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(93,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
91
1
S_103364-W
Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)
Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
Side airbag module (driver’s side)
Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
Side impact sensor (center pillar lefthand side)
Side impact sensor (center pillar righthand side)
Airbag wiring
Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
force limiter (driver’s side)
Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
force limiter (front passenger’s side)
Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s side)
Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
Front passenger’s occupant detection
sensors
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator lights
SRS airbag system warning light
Side impact sensor (front door lefthand side)
Side impact sensor (front door righthand side)
Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)
Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s side)
Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s
side)
Seat cushion airbag module (front
passenger’s side)
Driver’s seat position sensor
Passenger’s seat position sensor
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(94,1)
92
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
SUBARU ADVANCED FRONTAL AIRBAG SYSTEM
s01ah02
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that
complies with the new advanced frontal
airbag requirements in the amended
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well
as whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS seat cushion airbag for front
passenger
. SRS curtain airbag
. SRS knee airbag for driver
These components supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
NOTE
Only driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
s01ah0201
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates
in different ways depending on the severity of impact.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag
s01ah0202
S_103407-W
This vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” �P90.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
S_103230-MW
Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection sensors are
installed between the seat and seat rails,
and monitor the physique and posture of
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(95,1)
93
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or
not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner operates with the driver’s seatbelt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Pretensioners” �P64.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly or
cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such as
by kicking.
seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat upholstery.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual Seat” �P39
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
SRS airbag system warning light
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion.
. Do not remove or disassemble the
front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory (such
as an audio amplifier) other than a
genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not place any objects (books,
etc.) around the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint removed.
S_103267-W
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. If the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates,
immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and consult a SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
to your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(96,1)
94
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator lights
s01ah0203
S_103349-W
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
Refer to “Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF Indicator Lights”
�P166.
Occupant detection system
s01ah0209
WARNING
Do not kick the front passenger seat or
subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS airbag system warning light
may illuminate to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant
detection system. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and consult a SUBARU dealer.
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator lights do not work
properly, do not allow anyone to sit on the
front passenger’s seat and have the
occupant detection system checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
Also, if luggage is placed on the front
passenger’s seat, this may adversely
affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the
front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator lights from working properly. Check that the indicator lights work
properly.
When the OFF indicator light turns off and
the ON indicator light illuminates, the front
passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy
during a collision. Remove luggage from
the front passenger’s seat.
Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is
not activated
s01ah0204
S_103230-MW
Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection sensors are
installed between the seat and seat rails,
and monitor the physique and posture of
the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the following airbags
should be deployed or not.
. Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding
the front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an
infant or a child is restrained in it. (See
WARNING that follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detection system is malfunctioning.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(97,1)
95
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG
IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it
correctly in the REAR seat. Also, it is
strongly recommended that any child
seat or booster seat be installed in the
REAR seat, and that even children
who have outgrown a child restraint
system be also seated in the REAR
seat. This is because children sitting in
the front passenger’s seat may be
killed or severely injured should the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
deploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator light illuminates and the OFF indicator
light turns off even when an
infant or a small child is in a
child restraint system (including booster seat)
s01ah0213
S_103351-W
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe
the following precautions. Failure to
do so may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant detection
system, activating the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag even though
that seat is occupied by the infant in
the child restraint system.
. Do not place any article on the seat
other than the infant in the child
restraint system.
. Do not place more than one infant
in the child restraint system.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant
to place his/her hands or legs on
the front passenger’s seatback, or
allow him/her to pull the seatback.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Remove the child restraint system
from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as
well as the child restraint system
installation procedures in “Child Restraint Systems” �P67, correctly install the child restraint system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator light turns off and the OFF indicator
light illuminates.
If still the ON indicator light remains
illuminated while the OFF indicator light
turns off, take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint
system and the child occupant.
. For models with manual seat, ensure
that the backward-forward position
and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(98,1)
96
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
moving the seat back and forth.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator light still remains
illuminated while the OFF indicator light
turns off after taking the relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the
child restraint system to the rear seat and
immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is seated
in the front passenger’s seat, the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system
may or may not activate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depending
on the occupant’s seating posture. Children should always wear a seatbelt when
sitting in the seat irrespective of whether
the airbag is deactivated or activated. If
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated (the ON indicator light remains illuminated while the OFF indicator
light turns off), take the following action.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator light still remains
illuminated while the OFF indicator light
turns off despite the fact that the actions
noted above have been taken, seat the
child in the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection. Even if the system has
passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the
child always take the rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.
Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is
activated
s01ah0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may
lessen the load on the front passenger’s
seat, deactivating the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag despite the fact that
the seat is occupied by an adult. This may
result in personal injury.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any
article from behind and under the seat.
This may lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between
the front passenger’s seat and side
trim/pillar, door or center console box.
This may lift the seat cushion.
If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light illuminates
and the ON indicator light turns
off even when the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an
adult
s01ah0214
S_103352-W
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(99,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
97
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat
cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt,
position his/her legs out forward, and
adjust the seat to the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1
If the OFF indicator light remains illuminated while the ON indicator light remains
off, take the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, extra seat
cushion, seat cover, seat heater or
massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove
any unnecessary items before sitting
in the front passenger’s seat, or
should sit in a rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both
indicator lights turn off for 2 seconds.
Now, the ON indicator light should
illuminate while the OFF indicator light
remains off.
If the OFF indicator light still remains
illuminated while the ON indicator light
remains off, ask the occupant to move to
the rear seat and immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(100,1)
98
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Operation
s01ah0207
Driver’s side:
S_103246-W
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
Knee airbag
Passenger’s side:
S_103247-W
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately.
Seat cushion airbag
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
son, only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag
may deploy in the event of a collision, but
this does not mean failure of the system.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the characteristic of item(s)
or person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occupant detection sensors. For this rea-
If the following sensors detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passenger’s modules) instructing the module
(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(101,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
99
. The front impact sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
designed as follows.
. To deploy in most lesser frontal impacts*1
. To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents*2
After deployment
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone.
s01ah0210
After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired.
When only the SRS frontal airbag for the
driver is deployed, or when the SRS
frontal airbags for both the driver and front
passenger are deployed, the seatbelt
pretensioners for the driver and front
passenger are activated at the same
time.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not protect the occupant in those
situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
Example of accident in which
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will most likely deploy
s01ah0215
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the components
can be very hot as a result of deployment.
Example of the type of accident
S_103133-MW
s01ah0211
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be
activated when the vehicle is exposed to
a frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are designed as follows.
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(102,1)
100
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
s01ah0216
S_103134-MW
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(103,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
101
Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is
unlikely to occur
s01ah0217
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents
like those illustrated, the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
S_103233-MW
The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(104,1)
102
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s) are not
designed to deploy in most
cases
s01ah0218
S_103234-MW
First impact
Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/
are activated on the first impact, it/they
will not be activated on the second
impact.
SRS seat cushion airbag operation
s01ah0212
S_103136-MW
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most of the following cases.
. If the vehicle is struck from the side or
from behind
. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
. If the vehicle is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision
S_103235-W
Passenger’s side
WARNING
The SRS seat cushion airbag is
designed not to deploy when the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(105,1)
103
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
seatbelt for the corresponding seat is
not worn. For safety reasons, all
persons in the vehicle should wear
their seatbelts.
The SRS seat cushion airbags are
designed to deploy simultaneously when
the SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details about the operating conditions, refer
to “SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag
System” �P92.
The front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag is designed not to deploy in either
of the following conditions.
. The front passenger’s seatbelt is not
fastened (even when the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
light illuminates while the OFF indicator light remains off).
. The front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light is off while the OFF
indicator light illuminates.
NOTE
When the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag is deactivated by the occupant
detection system, the front passenger’s
SRS seat cushion airbag is also deactivated.
SRS SIDE AIRBAG AND SRS
CURTAIN AIRBAG
s01ah03
SRS side airbag
s01ah0302
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s chest
and waist. The SRS side airbag operates
only for front seat occupants.
SRS curtain airbag
s01ah0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
located at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and
supplement the seatbelt by reducing the
impact to the occupant’s head.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle
deploy between the occupant and the
side window and supplement the seatbelt
by reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head and chest.
Operation
s01ah0301
S_103140-MW
The following SRS airbags is active only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. Driver’s SRS side airbag
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(106,1)
104
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
When the following sensors detect a
certain amount of impact to the side of the
vehicle or detect that the vehicle is
leaning, airbag control units send signals
to the airbag control modules to deploy
the airbags.
. The side impact sensors
. The impact sensor in the airbag
control module
. The rollover sensor in the airbag
control module
Some of the airbags will deploy in a frontal
collision. For details, refer to “SUBARU
Advanced Frontal Airbag System” �P92.
SRS airbags are controlled by their airbag
control units and deploy as necessary to
effectively protect passengers depending
on the accident type. Therefore, these
airbags may deploy simultaneously.
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Components”
�P90.
After deployment
s01ah0304
After the deployment, the SRS side
airbag immediately starts to deflate.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an
impact is applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly
loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the front
seat seatback with bare hands right
after deployment. Doing so can cause
burns because the components can
be very hot as a result of deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag system
(from the front pillar to the part of the
roof side over the rear seat). Doing so
can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
Example of the type of accident
s01ah0305
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side
impact collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. In most lesser side impacts
. In most frontal or most rear impacts
(because the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag deployment would
not protect the occupant in those
situations)
The SRS curtain airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
extremely inclined state such as during a
rollover. They are not designed to deploy
in most lesser inclined state.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(107,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
105
Example of the type of accident
in which the SRS side airbag
will most likely deploy
s01ah0308
1
S_103369-W
A severe side impact near the front
seat.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(108,1)
106
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag
will most likely deploy
s01ah0309
S_103237-W
The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or the
roof.
An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(109,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
107
Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the
SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy
s01ah0310
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs
to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
S_103238-W
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or vehicle falling
The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a
curbstone laterally.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(110,1)
108
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is
unlikely to deploy
s01ah0311
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag
deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not
deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
S_103239-MW
The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or the
roof.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(111,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
109
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag
is unlikely to deploy
s01ah0312
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain
airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
S_103240-MW
The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(112,1)
110
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
s01ah0313
S_103242-MW
First impact
Second impact
SRS curtain airbag
SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deploy only once.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
S_103402-W
The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or
stationary).
The vehicle is struck from behind.
The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM MONITORS
s01ah04
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including seatbelt pretensioners) with
the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
SRS airbag system warning light
S_103267-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(113,1)
111
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
The SRS airbag system warning light will
show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The diagnostic system monitors the
components to ensure normal operation.
For information on the components the
system monitors, refer to “Components”
�P90. Note that the diagnostic system
does not monitor the SRS airbag system
warning light itself.
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of the
following conditions, immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe place, and consult
a SUBARU dealer. Unless a technician checks and repairs the system as
needed, the seatbelt pretensioners
and/or the SRS airbag will not operate
properly in the event of a collision,
which may result in injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning light
when the ignition switch is first
turned to the “ON” position
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the system’s wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have the
work performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag
control module, impact sensors and
airbag modules are stored in these
areas.
. Under the center of the instrument
panel
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Bottom of the steering column and
nearby areas
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby areas
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM SERVICING
s01ah05
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag module
or scrapping the entire vehicle
damaged by a collision, consult
your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no userserviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion and
rear wheel house on each side
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an
authorized SUBARU dealer. When the
components of the SRS airbag system
are replaced, use only genuine
SUBARU parts.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(114,1)
112
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear wheel
house or rear sub frame, or an area
near these parts, was involved in an
accident in which the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST VEHICLE MODIFICATION
s01ah06
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag
system.
This includes following modifications.
– Installation of custom steering
wheels
– Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
– Installation of custom seats
– Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
– Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
– Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way radio
on or near the SRS airbag
system components and/or
wiring is not advisable. This
could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system.
– Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement
or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not modify
any components of the doors or
door trims, such as the addition of
door speakers for example. Any
modifications to the doors will
create a risk of the airbag system
becoming inoperative or unintended airbag deployment.
. Installation of a tire of different size
and construction from the tires
specified on the vehicle placard
attached to the driver’s door pillar
or specified for individual vehicle
models in this Owner’s Manual.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(115,1)
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
skid plate, etc.) other than genuine
SUBARU accessory parts to the
front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Attachment of any equipment (side
steps or side sill protectors, etc.)
other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
HOW TO CONTACT THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS
FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES THAT MAY AFFECT THE
ADVANCED AIRBAG SYSTEM
s01ah15
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, instrument cluster, steering
wheel, steering column, tire, suspension
or floor panel can affect the operation of
the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If
you have any questions, you may contact
the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Headquarters:
Customer Advocacy Department
One Subaru Drive
P.O. Box 9103
Camden, NJ 08101-9877
Texas office:
360 North Freeport Parkway,
Coppell TX 75019
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
113
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850-A Pukoloa St.,
Honolulu, HI 96819
877-215-0338
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automobiles
491 East Marine Corps Drive,
Dededo, Guam 96929
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,
Puerto Rico
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Customer Care
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you
are in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
1
(116,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(117,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
2-1.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System .....................117
s02
Safety Precautions ...................................................................... 117
Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access” Entry Function .... 120
Unlock Using PIN Code Access................................................... 122
Power Saving Function ............................................................... 125
Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ................................. 125
Disabling Keyless Access Function............................................. 126
Selecting Audible Signal Operation ............................................. 128
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ............................... 128
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator....................................... 128
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ...................... 128
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob.......................................... 128
Replacing Access Key Fob.......................................................... 128
2-2.
Immobilizer ..................................................................................129
Security Indicator Light ............................................................... 129
Key Replacement ........................................................................ 129
2-3.
Remote Keyless Entry System ..................................................130
Locking the Doors ...................................................................... 130
Unlocking the Doors ................................................................... 131
Unlocking the Rear Gate ............................................................. 131
Setting Audible Signal Operation................................................. 131
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ............................... 131
Vehicle Finder Function .............................................................. 131
Sounding a Panic Alarm.............................................................. 131
Replacing the Battery.................................................................. 131
Replacing Lost Access Key Fobs ................................................ 132
2-4.
Door Locks ..................................................................................132
Locking and Unlocking from the Outside..................................... 132
Locking and Unlocking from the Inside ....................................... 133
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking ............................................. 134
Key Lock-In Prevention Function................................................. 135
Battery Drainage Reduction Function .......................................... 135
2-5.
Alarm System ..............................................................................136
Alarm System Operation ............................................................. 136
Arming the System ..................................................................... 137
Disarming the System ................................................................. 137
Alarm System Setting ................................................................. 138
If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm System .................. 138
2-6.
2-7.
Child Safety Locks......................................................................139
Windows ......................................................................................139
Power Window Switches ............................................................. 140
Operating the Window................................................................. 140
Locking the Passengers’ Windows .............................................. 141
Initialization of Power Window .................................................... 141
2-8.
Power Rear Gate .........................................................................142
Operating by the Power Rear Gate Button ................................... 144
Operating by the Buttons on the Rear Gate ................................. 145
Manual Operation........................................................................ 146
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(118,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
Memory Function ........................................................................ 146
Reverse Function........................................................................ 147
Rear Gate Drop Prevention Function ........................................... 148
Selecting Audible Signal Operation ............................................. 148
Initialization of Power Rear Gate ................................................. 148
2-9.
Moonroof (If Equipped) ..............................................................149
Moonroof Switches ..................................................................... 150
Sunshade ................................................................................... 151
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(119,1)
117
KEYS AND DOORS
2-1. KEYLESS ACCESS
WITH PUSH-BUTTON START
SYSTEM
An emergency key is attached to each
access key fob.
s02ap
2
S_204470-MW
S_204469-W
Access key fobs
Key number plate
The keyless access with push-button
start system allows you to perform the
following functions when you are carrying
the access key fob.
. Locking and unlocking all the doors
(including the rear gate and the fuel
filler lid)
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting
and Stopping Engine” �P310.
. Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm System” �P136.
NOTE
. Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be
controlled with the buttons on the
access key fob. For detailed information, refer to “Remote Keyless Entry
System” �P130.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key fob. It is
necessary for vehicle repair and additional registration of access key
fobs. For details, refer to “Key Replacement” �P129.
Release button
Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
The emergency key is used for the
following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s
door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s02ap11
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on the
vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmitting
antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and implanted
defibrillators.
If you wear electronic medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access with
push-button start system, refer to
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start system”
mentioned later, and contact the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(120,1)
118
KEYS AND DOORS
electronic medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The
radio waves from the transmitting
antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the
electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start system”
. The keyless access with pushbutton start system uses radio
waves of the following frequency*
in addition to the radio waves used
for the remote keyless entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas
installed on the vehicle as shown in
the following illustrations.
*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz
S_204631-W
Antennas
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key fob inside the vehicle or within
6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g.,
in the garage). The access key fob
may be locked inside the vehicle,
or the battery may discharge
rapidly. Note that the push-button
ignition switch may not turn on in
some cases depending on the
location of the access key fob.
. The access key fob contains electronic components. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
– It is recommended to have the
access key fob battery replaced at an authorized
SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately and
let it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Never leave the access key fob
in direct sunlight or anywhere
that may become hot, such as
on the dashboard. It may damage the battery or cause
circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key fob
in an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key fob
in humid or dusty locations.
Doing so may cause malfunctions.
– Keep the access key fob away
from magnetic sources.
– Do not leave the access key fob
near a personal computer or
home electrical appliance.
– Do not leave the access key fob
near a battery charger or any
electrical accessories.
– Do not apply metallic window
tint or attach metallic objects to
the windows.
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(121,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
sories or parts.
. If the access key fob is dropped,
the integrated emergency key inside may become loose. Be careful
not to lose the emergency key.
. When traveling in an airplane, do
not press the button of the access
key fob. If any button of the access
key fob is pressed, radio waves are
emitted and may affect the operation of the airplane. In a bag, take
measures to prevent the buttons
from being pressed accidentally.
.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting
procedure, refer to “Disabling Keyless
Access Function” �P126.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless access function is switched to the nonoperational mode, refer to “If Access
Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly”
�P451.
. The keyless access with push-button
start system uses weak radio waves.
The status of the access key fob and
environmental conditions may interfere with the communication between
the access key fob and the vehicle
under the following conditions, and it
may not be possible to lock or unlock
the doors or start the engine.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are
transmitted, such as a broadcast
station and power transmission
lines.
– When products that transmit radio
waves are used, such as an access
key fob or a remote transmitter key
of another vehicle.
– When carrying the access key fob
of your vehicle together with the
access key fob of another vehicle.
.
.
.
.
.
119
– When the access key fob is placed
near wireless communication
equipment such as a cell phone.
– When the access key fob is placed
near a metallic object.
– When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key fob.
– When carrying the access key fob
with an electronic appliance such
as a laptop computer.
– When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged.
The access key fob is always communicating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If
the battery becomes fully discharged,
replace it with a new one.
If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remaining
access key fobs be reregistered. For
reregistration of an access key fob,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
For a spare access key fob, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
Up to 7 access key fobs can be
registered for one vehicle.
Do not leave the access key fob in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle,
such as the door pocket, dashboard or
inside the cargo area. Vibrations may
damage the key fob or turn on the
switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
After the vehicle battery is discharged
or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may be required to
start the engine. In this case, perform
the following procedure to initialize the
steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching Power
Status” �P156.
(2) Open and close the driver’s door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.
When the steering is locked, the
initialization is completed.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(122,1)
120
KEYS AND DOORS
. Do not leave the access key fob in the
following places.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
If you do, the following situations may
occur.
– The access key fob is mistakenly
locked inside the vehicle.
– A false warning issues although no
malfunction actually occurs.
– No warning issues even when a
malfunction occurs.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
WITH “KEYLESS ACCESS”
ENTRY FUNCTION
s02ap01
When the access key fob is carried within
the operating range, all the doors (including the rear gate and the fuel filler lid)
can be locked/unlocked just by touching
the door handle.
NOTE
The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked
with the remote keyless entry system. For
details, refer to “Remote Keyless Entry
System” �P130.
Operating ranges
s02ap0101
S_204655-W
Antennas
Operating range
S_204473-W
LED indicator
When the access key fob is near either of
the front doors, the LED indicator on the
access key fob flashes. When the keyless
access functions are disabled, the LED
indicator does not flash unless a button
on the access key fob is pressed.
NOTE
. If the access key fob is placed too
close to the vehicle body, the keyless
access functions may not operate
properly. If it does not operate properly, repeat the operation from farther
away.
. If the access key fob is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from
the ground, even if it is in the indicated
operating range, the keyless access
function may not operate properly.
. When the access key fob is within the
operating range, it is possible for
anyone, even someone who is not
carrying the access key fob, to operate
the keyless access function. Note that
the keyless access function can be
operated only by the door handle, door
lock sensor or rear gate opener button
in the operating range in which the
access key fob is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors, the
rear gate and the fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
However, depending on the status of
the access key fob and the environmental conditions, the access key fob
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(123,1)
121
KEYS AND DOORS
may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking the vehicle, make sure
that you have the access key fob.
. When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged, or when operating it
in a location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used), or
while talking on a cell phone, the
operating ranges may be reduced, or
the keyless access function may not
operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and Unlocking”
�P451.
. The doors may lock or unlock when
the car is being washed or exposed to
a significant amount of water that
touches the door handle while the key
fob is still in the operating range.
How to lock and unlock
s02ap0108
It is possible to perform the following
operations when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel
filler lid.
. Lock and unlock the rear gate.
. If any of the doors (including the rear
gate) is not fully closed, the following
will occur to alert you.
– An electronic chirp sounds five
times.
– The hazard warning flashers flash
five times.
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
open, the doors, the rear gate and the
fuel filler lid cannot be locked.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate using the
keyless access function, it is not
possible to unlock the doors and/or the
rear gate using the keyless access
function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation can be changed by
operating the center information display. For details, refer to “Vehicle”
�P206. Also, the setting of the hazard
warning flasher operation can be
changed by your SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
Locking the vehicle
s02ap0109
NOTE
. It is not possible to lock the doors, the
rear gate and the fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the
push-button ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to
“Switching Power Status” �P156.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched four
times or more repeatedly, the system
will ignore the sensor operation.
. When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not
complete. After performing the locking
procedure, it is recommended to pull
the rear door handle to confirm that
the doors have been locked.
S_204641-W
Door lock sensor
Rear lock button
To lock all the doors, carry the access key
fob with you and perform one of the
following operations:
. Touch the door lock sensor.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(124,1)
122
KEYS AND DOORS
. Press the rear lock button.
An electronic chirp will sound once and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to lock
all of the doors (including the rear gate), if
you touch the door lock sensor once more
to attempt the lock operation without first
unlocking the doors, nothing will happen,
even if the door lock sensor is touched. In
this case, perform the unlocking operation once first. You can then touch the
door lock sensor to lock the doors.
Unlocking the vehicle
When the driver’s door handle is
gripped:
The driver’s door and the fuel filler lid will
unlock.
When the front passenger’s door
handle is gripped:
All the doors (including the rear gate) and
the fuel filler lid will unlock.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
. The setting can be changed by operating the center information display.
For details, refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
s02ap0110
UNLOCK USING PIN CODE ACCESS
s02ap21
S_204642-W
Front door handle sensor
Rear gate opener button
To unlock the door, carry the access key
fob with you and perform one of the
following operations:
. Grip the door handle.
. Press the rear gate opener button.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
Door unlock selection function
s02ap0105
When you use the keyless access function to unlock the vehicle, gripping the
driver’s door handle or the front passenger’s handle will cause trigger different
unlock operations as described below.
S_204643-W
Rear lock button
While all the doors (including the rear
gate and the fuel filler lid) are locked, you
can unlock them without a key by pressing the rear lock button.
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key
is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is
recommended that a 5-digit security code
(PIN code) is registered.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(125,1)
123
KEYS AND DOORS
Registration for a PIN code
s02ap2102
Steps
Operation
Time from the previous
step
1
Turn off the ignition switch.
—
2
Close all the doors (including the rear gate).
—
3
Press and hold the “ ” button on the access key fob,
then press and hold the rear lock button until a chirp
sounds intermittently.
—
4
Press the “ ” button on the access key fob.
Within 30 seconds
Input the PIN code using the rear lock button within 30
seconds after the chirp sound of step 4.
For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code,
perform the following procedure.
(1)
Press the button three times.
(2)
After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
(3)
After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
(4)
After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
(5)
After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
5
Within 30 seconds
6
Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds
after the chirp starts sounding intermittently.
—
7
All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code
will be registered.
—
NOTE
. Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and
move on to the registration stage. Unless the “ ” button is pressed within 30
seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.
. Press the rear lock button ten times to enter “0”.
. Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not
been changed or deleted. If the PIN code has been changed or deleted, reregister a
new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the “ ” or “ ” button
on the access key fob. Then start over from step 1.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register “00000” to “99999” or “12345”
as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license plate number or simple numbers such as
“11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. Doing so will increase the risk of vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”, the registered PIN code will be deleted. You
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access until a new code is registered.
. After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the
PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is disabled by
operating the access key fob.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(126,1)
124
KEYS AND DOORS
. Reregister the PIN code in the following case.
– When you forget the PIN code
– When you want to change the PIN code
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(127,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
Unlocking
s02ap2103
Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5
described in “Registration for a PIN
code”.
125
Recovery from power saving
mode
s02ap2301
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– When the access key fob is within
the operating ranges
– When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
. If you make an operation error during
the unlocking procedure, start over
with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN
codes are entered five times continuously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock
the doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
POWER SAVING FUNCTION
s02ap23
To protect the access key fob battery and
the vehicle battery, the keyless access
function will be disabled as follows.
. When the keyless access function and
the remote keyless entry system have
not been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button ignition switch has been turned off,
communication between the antennas and the access key fob will
be stopped.
(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors
(both lock sensor and unlock
sensor) on the front passenger’s
door will be disabled.
. When the access key fob has been left
in the operating range for 10 minutes
or longer while all doors are locked,
the keyless access function will be
disabled.
When one of the following operations is
performed, the keyless access function
will be recovered.
. Unlock by gripping the door handle
(only when the sensors on the front
passenger’s door are not disabled) or
pressing rear gate opener button on
the rear gate.
. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system.
. Open a door and then close it.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
POWER SAVING FUNCTION OF
ACCESS KEY FOB
s02ap26
This function stops the access key fob
from receiving signals and helps minimize
the battery consumption of the access
key fob.
1. Press the “ ” button twice while
holding the “ ” button.
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4
times to notify that the setting is
complete.
S_204473-W
LED indicator
When the access key fob is in the power
save mode, the keyless access function
and push-button start system will not be
available. To cancel the power save
mode, press one of the buttons on the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(128,1)
126
KEYS AND DOORS
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
access key fob.
DISABLING KEYLESS ACCESS
FUNCTION
s02ap07
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, perform
the procedure “By operating the driver’s door” �P127 to disable the
keyless access function. If you perform the procedure “By operating the
access key fob” �P126, the operation
of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected
by the radio waves from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle.
S_204379-MW
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and
“ ” button on the access key fob
simultaneously for more than 5 seconds.
NOTE
. If the access key is kept in or comes
near the vehicle, the system becomes
active and both the vehicle and access
key batteries’ energy will be consumed. If this occurs frequently or
continuously, both the vehicle and
access key batteries can become fully
drained.
. The locking and unlocking function by
the remote keyless entry system is not
disabled.
. To start the engine while the functions
are disabled, perform the procedure
described in “Starting Engine”
�P452.
S_204380-MW
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
By operating the access key fob
s02ap0703
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the access key fob, register a
PIN code for PIN Code Access. For
details about registering a PIN code, refer
to “Unlock Using PIN Code Access”
�P122.
1. Open the driver’s door.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(129,1)
127
KEYS AND DOORS
By operating the driver’s door
s02ap0704
2
S_204381-MW
To disable the keyless access function by operating the driver’s door, perform the
following procedures.
Steps
Operation
Time
Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door.
2
Push “ ” on the power door locking switch.
3
Open the driver’s door.
Within 5 sec.
Close?Open
4
Push “ ” on the power door locking switch
twice.
Within 5 sec.
Open
5
Close and open the driver’s door twice.
Within 10 sec.
Open?Close?Open?
Close?Open
6
Push “ ” on the power door locking switch twice
while the door is open.
Within 10 sec.
Open
7
Close and open the driver’s door once.
Within 10 sec.
Open?Close?Open
Within 5 sec.
Open?Close
8
Close the door.
—
Status
1
—
Close
Close
A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not pressed
firmly, the functions may not be disabled.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(130,1)
128
KEYS AND DOORS
Enabling functions
s02ap0702
When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, a chirp sound
will be heard, and the functions are
enabled.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the procedure in the same manner you
disabled the function (for example,
when disabling by operating the driver’s door, the function will not be
enabled even if you operate the
access key fob).
. Press the push-button ignition switch if
you do not know the procedure in
which the keyless access function was
disabled.
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: A chirp will not be
heard.
– When disabling by operating the
access key fob: A chirp will be
heard.
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
WARNING CHIMES AND
WARNING INDICATOR
s02ap06
The keyless access with push-button
start system is equipped with a warning
chime and the access key warning
indicator in order to minimize improper
operations and help protect your vehicle
from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning Chimes and
Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” �P176.
WHEN ACCESS KEY FOB
DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
s02ap08
Refer to “If Access Key Fob Does Not
Operate Properly” �P451.
REPLACING BATTERY OF ACCESS KEY FOB
s02ap09
SELECTING AUDIBLE SIGNAL
OPERATION
Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob” �P507.
s02ap12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you
can turn the audible signal off by operating the center information display. For
details, refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
REPLACING ACCESS KEY FOB
s02ap13
Access key fobs can be replaced at
SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
SELECTING HAZARD WARNING FLASHER OPERATION
s02ap18
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206. The setting can also be
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(131,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
129
KEY REPLACEMENT
2-2. IMMOBILIZER
s02ab03
s02ab
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
can be used to operate your vehicle. If
engine start is attempted with an unregistered access key fob or key, the engine
will not start. Even if the engine does start,
it will stop after a few seconds. This
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft
guarantee.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is seven.
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
immobilizer system. For security reasons,
the lost key’s ID code should be erased
from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
ID code, all keys that will be used are
required.
For details about new key registration and
erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the
following security precautions:
– Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle, close
all windows and the moonroof, and
lock all the doors (including the rear
gate and the fuel filler lid).
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT
s02ab02
Refer to “Security Indicator Light” �P180.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(132,1)
130
KEYS AND DOORS
2-3. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
s02ae
CAUTION
. Do not expose the access key fob
to severe shocks, such as those
experienced as a result of dropping
or throwing.
. Do not take the access key fob
apart except when replacing the
battery.
. Do not get the access key fob wet.
If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. When you carry the access key fob
on an airplane, do not press the
button of the access key fob while
in the airplane. When any button of
the access key fob is pressed,
radio waves are sent and may
affect the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the access key fob
in a bag on an airplane, take
measures to prevent the buttons of
the access key fob from being
pressed.
. Locking and unlocking all the doors
(including the rear gate and the fuel
filler lid)
. Unlock the rear gate
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming. For details,
refer to “Alarm System” �P136.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions. The system’s operable distance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. The remote keyless entry system will
not be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
once or twice when the access key fob
button is pressed in the following
cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When unlocking the rear gate
If desired, you can turn the hazard
warning flashers off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
LOCKING THE DOORS
s02ae01
S_204477-MW
Lock/arm button
Unlock/disarm button
Rear gate unlock button
PANIC button
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
Press the “ ” button to lock all the doors
(including the rear gate and the fuel filler
lid). An electronic chirp will sound once
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
once.
If any of the doors (including the fuel filler
lid) is not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors are not
properly closed.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(133,1)
131
KEYS AND DOORS
. An electronic chirp sounds five times.
. The hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will
occur.
. An electronic chirp sounds once.
. The hazard warning flashers flash
once.
UNLOCKING THE DOORS
s02ae02
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all the
doors and the rear gate, briefly press the
“ ” button again within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “ ” button for
unlocking all the doors is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
UNLOCKING THE REAR GATE
s02ae13
Press the “ ” button to unlock the rear
gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
This operation setting can be changed by
a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details.
SETTING AUDIBLE SIGNAL
OPERATION
s02ae07
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock.
If desired, you can turn the audible signal
off by operating the center information
display.
For details, refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
SELECTING HAZARD WARNING FLASHER OPERATION
s02ae26
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
The setting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
VEHICLE FINDER FUNCTION
s02ae05
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30
feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing
the “ ” button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button three
times, the system may not respond to the
signals from the access key fob.
SOUNDING A PANIC ALARM
s02ae06
To activate the alarm, press the PANIC
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the access key fob. If a button
on the access key fob is not pressed, the
alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.
REPLACING THE BATTERY
s02ae08
Refer to “Replacing Battery” �P507.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(134,1)
132
KEYS AND DOORS
REPLACING LOST ACCESS
KEY FOBS
s02ae09
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
seven can be programmed), you should
re-program all your access key fobs for
security reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the access key
fobs programmed into the remote keyless
entry system.
2-4. DOOR LOCKS
s02ac
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
FROM THE OUTSIDE
s02ac01
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a key
(including an emergency key) and open
the door while the alarm system is armed,
the alarm system is triggered and the
vehicle’s horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the access key
fob (except when the access key fob
battery is discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” position.
. Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener button.
For details about the alarm system, refer
to “Alarm System” �P136.
How to lock and unlock the
vehicle using the key
s02ac0101
S_204562-MW
Lock
Unlock
In this case, only the driver’s side door is
locked or unlocked.
NOTE
Models with “keyless access with pushbutton start system”:
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(135,1)
133
KEYS AND DOORS
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
How to lock the vehicle without
using the key
s02ac0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
Locking using lock lever
s02ac0103
*: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to “How to use the power door
locking switches” �P134.
In this case, all the closed doors, the fuel
filler lid and the rear gate are locked at the
same time.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
FROM THE INSIDE
s02ac02
To lock the door from inside the vehicle,
use the lock lever or power door locking
switch.
How to use the lock lever
s02ac0202
S_204480-MW
Move the lock lever to the lock position.
Close the door.
In this way, only the door that was
operated will be locked.
Locking using power door
locking switch
s02ac0104
S_204482-MW
Unlock
Lock
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
S_204481-MW
Press the side of the power door
locking switch.*
Close the door.
Always make sure that all the doors and
the rear gate are closed before starting to
drive.
WARNING
. Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(136,1)
134
KEYS AND DOORS
Along with the proper use of
seatbelts and child restraint systems, locking the doors reduces
the chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a
door from being accidentally
opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle
from inside while driving. The door
could open even if it is locked.
CAUTION
Do not pull the front inside door handle
while operating the door lock. There is
a risk that it will not be possible to open
or lock the front doors.
How to use the power door
locking switches
s02ac0203
All the doors (including the rear gate and
the fuel filler lid) can be locked and
unlocked by pressing either side of the
power door locking switches located on
the driver’s side and the front passenger’s side doors.
S_204483-MW
Lock
Unlock
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING/
UNLOCKING
s02ac08
All the doors (including the fuel filler lid)
are automatically locked or unlocked
under the following conditions.
For automatic door locking:
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12
mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory
default setting).
– When the select lever is shifted into a
position other than the “P” position.
For automatic door unlocking:
– When the driver’s door is open (factory default setting).
– When the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
– When the select lever is shifted into
the “P” position.
NOTE
. The automatic door lock and unlock
setting can be changed using the
center information display. Refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
. When locking the door by the power
door locking switches, automatic door
locking will not operate.
. When unlocking the door by the power
door locking switches, automatic door
unlocking will not operate.
. If the system detects a strong enough
impact to deploy the airbags, all doors
may be automatically unlocked. For
further details, refer to “Automatic
Door Locking/Unlocking Operation
When Involved in an Accident”
�P456.
. When getting out of the vehicle from a
rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(137,1)
135
KEYS AND DOORS
the power door locking switch. If a rear
door is unlocked from the inside door
lever then the door is opened and
closed, the Key lock-in prevention
function will be triggered. All doors will
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator “
” will appear
and the warning chime will also sound.
KEY LOCK-IN PREVENTION
FUNCTION
s02ac06
All the doors will not lock when the power
door locking switch is pushed with the
driver’s door open while the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTE
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
. When getting out of the vehicle from a
rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of
the power door locking switch.
. When getting out of the vehicle from a
rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of
the power door locking switch. If a rear
door is unlocked from the inside door
lever then the door is opened and
closed, the Key lock-in prevention
function will be triggered. All doors will
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator “
” will appear
and the warning chime will also sound.
. The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as “operational”.
This function’s operational/non-operational setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
Non-operation of key lock-in
prevention function
s02ac0602
When the system is set so that it does not
operate, the doors are locked by the
following operation.
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s
door open and the driver’s door is then
closed with the lock lever in that
position, the driver’s door is locked.
. If the emergency key is used to lock
the driver’s door from the outside of
the vehicle, the door is locked.
BATTERY DRAINAGE REDUCTION FUNCTION
s02ac03
Under various conditions, lights inside the
vehicle will automatically turn off to
reduce the risk of discharging the battery.
Battery drainage reduction
function for various conditions
s02ac0302
This function will enter standby mode
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
If the following actions are not performed
within 10 minutes, while the function is in
standby mode, any room lights that are on
will automatically turn off.
– Map light
– Dome light
– Ignition switch light
Turning off
– Cargo area light
lights
– Rear gate light*1
– Vanity mirror light
– Door step lights
Actions
– Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
– Open or close the doors, including
the rear gate.
– Push the unlock button on the
access key fob.
– Hold the front door handle and
unlock it while holding the access
key fob.
– Come close to the vehicle that the
front door was locked while holding
the access key fob (if OFF delay
timer setting for period of time is not
off).
– Push the panic button on the access
key fob.
*1: If equipped
Perform the action in the above table to
illuminate the lights again when the
battery drainage reduction function is
active.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(138,1)
136
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTE
2-5. ALARM SYSTEM
. The battery drainage reduction function cannot be turned off.
. If the battery drainage reduction function is in operation when a door is
open, the target room light will not be
illuminated.
. To protect the battery from battery
drainage, make sure that all doors,
including the rear gate, are completely
closed when leaving the vehicle.
. When the door is opened while the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” position,
the door open indicator light will
illuminate. The door open indicator
light will turn off after 2 minutes.
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The
horn sounds and the hazard warning
flashers flash if someone attempts to
break into your vehicle.
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or
access key fob.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
s02af
ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION
s02af01
When the alarm system is armed, it is
triggered by the opening any of the doors,
the rear gate or engine hood.
The alarm system will activate the following alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine
hood remains open after the 30-second
period, the horn will continue to sound for
a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
gate or engine hood is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30
seconds.
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger the
illumination of the following interior lights.
. Map lights (illuminates only when the
door interlock switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
. Dome light (illuminates only when the
dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(139,1)
137
KEYS AND DOORS
The notifications regarding the map lights
and dome light are deactivated as the
factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
ARMING THE SYSTEM
s02af04
The alarm system becomes armed when
the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) and turn the ignition switch
to the “OFF” position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the
vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
following methods.
. Locking using the remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry System”
�P130.
. Locking using the keyless access
function. For details, refer to
“Locking the vehicle” �P121.
. Locking using the power door locking switch. For details, refer to
“Locking using power door locking
switch” �P133.
NOTE
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp
sounds five times and the hazard
warning flashers flash five times to
alert you that the doors (or the rear
gate) are not properly closed. When
you close the door, doors will automatically lock and the system will
automatically arm in 30 seconds.
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
system will enter surveillance state.
When the system is in surveillance state,
the security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has
been armed for surveillance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
windows and/or moonroof are open.
Always make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If any of the following actions is done
during the standby period, the system
will not switch to the surveillance state.
– Doors (including the rear gate) are
unlocked using the access key fob.
– Doors (including the rear gate) are
unlocked using the keyless access
function.
– Any door (including the engine
hood) is opened.
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position.
DISARMING THE SYSTEM
s02af05
S_204564-W
. All doors, the rear gate and fuel filler lid
will lock, an electronic chirp will sound
once, the hazard warning flashers will
flash once, and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly.
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press unlock/disarm button (for
less than 2 seconds) on the access
key fob.
. Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear lock button.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(140,1)
138
KEYS AND DOORS
– Unlock using the PIN Code Access.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approximately every 3 seconds from twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the alarm system has been
disarmed.
Emergency disarming
s02af0501
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key fob (i.e., the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the access key fob.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “OFF” position
to the “ON” position with a registered key/
access key fob.
NOTE
If the access key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in “Switching Power Status”
�P452. In such a case, replace the
battery immediately. Refer to “Replacing
Battery of Access Key Fob” �P507.
Setting status
Instrument cluster
display
Horn
Activate
AL ON
Once
Deactivate
AL OFF
Twice
NOTE
You may have the above setting change
done by your SUBARU dealer.
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY
TRIGGERED THE ALARM SYSTEM
s02af03
To stop the alarm
s02af0301
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the access key
fob.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” position.
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If
the immobilizer transponder is not registered, the alarm will not stop.
ALARM SYSTEM SETTING
s02af11
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the System” �P137.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors, the rear gate and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power
door locking switch, open the driver’s
door within the following 1 second,
and wait 10 seconds without releasing
the switch. The setting will then be
changed as follows.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(141,1)
139
KEYS AND DOORS
2-6. CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
2-7. WINDOWS
s02ag
s02ah
WARNING
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children sit
on the rear seat. Serious injury could
result if a child accidentally opens the
door and falls out.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s body parts or any
other objects from being caught in
the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
S_204391-W
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be
opened from inside. The door can only be
opened from the outside.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety reasons
and never allow an unattended
child to remain in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window.
NOTE
. If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormality,
the window operation may be automatically stopped to prevent further
jamming, entrapment or malfunction.
– The closing window slides down
slightly and stops.
– The opening window stops sliding
down.
. The power window system may detect
resistance, an impact or an abnormality in the following cases.
– A substantial sized object is caught
between the window and the window frame.
– A foreign object is caught between
the window and the window frame.
– The vehicle drives over a deep
pothole.
. The window cannot be closed for a
few seconds after the window is
automatically stopped by the system.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(142,1)
140
KEYS AND DOORS
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
OPERATING THE WINDOW
s02ah09
s02ah10
You can raise and lower the vehicle
widows by operating the power window
switch.
The switch illuminates when activated.
Driver’s side power window switches:
S_204485-MW
Automatically close*
Close
Open
Automatically open*
S_204484-MW
For front left window
For front right window
For rear left window
For rear right window
Lock switch
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to the opposite side.
NOTE
Avoid the following.
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster on the driver
side door.
Passenger’s side power window
switch:
. Continuously operating a switch in the
same direction after the window is fully
closed or fully opened.
. Continuously operating three or more
switches all at once in the same
direction after the windows are fully
closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described above
may cause the power window breaker to
operate making it impossible to open or
close the window. Be sure to initialize the
power windows. Refer to “Initialization of
Power Window” �P141.
Anti-entrapment function
s02ah1001
S_204393-W
Each passenger’s window can be controlled by the power window switch
located on the door.
While closing the window automatically, if
the window senses a substantial enough
object trapped between the window and
the window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
If a foreign object is caught while window
is opening automatically, the window will
stop.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(143,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test the power
window operation using body
parts.
. If an object is caught just before the
window fully closes, the system
may not operate properly.
141
passengers’ window switches cannot be
operated.
When the indicator on the window
switches does not illuminate, the window
switch cannot be operated.
INITIALIZATION OF POWER
WINDOW
s02ah06
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar
to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encounters a deep pothole), the antientrapment function may operate.
. You cannot close the window for a few
seconds after the anti-entrapment
function operates.
Off delay function
s02ah1002
The windows can be operated for approximately 40 seconds even after the
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“OFF” position. If a front door is opened
within 40 seconds, the off delay function
is canceled.
If the one-touch auto up and down
function or off delay function does not
operate properly, operate each window
according to the following procedure in
order to initialize the power window
system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the window completely and then
press and hold down the power
window switch for approximately 1
second.
4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch
for approximately 1 second.
LOCKING THE PASSENGERS’
WINDOWS
s02ah11
S_204487-MW
Lock
Unlock
When the lock switch is in the lock
position, the rear passenger’s window
switches on the driver side door and the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(144,1)
142
KEYS AND DOORS
2-8. POWER REAR GATE
s02au
WARNING
. When operating the power rear
gate, observe the following precautions. Ignoring the precautions
may result in an injury (e.g., anyone’s body is hit against the rear
gate or is caught in the rear gate,
etc.)
– Make sure there are no people
around the rear gate.
– Never let anyone get close to
the rear gate.
. When closing the rear gate, be
extremely careful to prevent anyone’s fingers, arms, neck, head or
other objects from being caught in
the rear gate. Otherwise, serious
personal injury may be caused by
entrapment.
. After opening the rear gate on a
slope by using the power rear gate
feature, the rear gate may close.
Make sure that the rear gate has
stopped completely after opening
it.
. When leaving the vehicle, always
carry the key for safety and never
allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could result in
injury to a child operating the power
rear gate.
. The driver should be aware of and
pay careful attention to his/her
responsibilities.
. Use the power rear gate only when
the area around the rear gate is
clearly visible and when you have
checked that there is no danger of
people being caught in the gate.
. To prevent dangerous exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle, always
keep the rear gate closed while the
engine is running.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear gate
while holding the recessed grip.
Also do not close the rear gate by
pulling the grip from inside the
cargo space. There is a danger of
your hand being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. When closing the rear gate after
opening it, make sure to use the
power rear gate. If you close the
rear gate manually with extra force,
the power rear gate may be
damaged.
. Do not install any accessories
other than genuine SUBARU parts
on the rear gate. If the weight of
rear gate increases excessively,
the rear gate stay cannot support
the rear gate sufficiently when
opening the rear gate. Also, the
power rear gate may not function
properly or may malfunction.
. When loading and unloading cargo, be careful not to come in
contact with the hot engine exhaust
gas or the exhaust pipe, because
they could burn you.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when opening
or closing the rear gate and when
loading or unloading cargo.
You can open and close the power rear
gate in the following ways.
. Power rear gate button
For details, refer to “Operating by the
Power Rear Gate Button” �P144.
. Rear gate opener button
For details, refer to “Operating by the
Buttons on the Rear Gate” �P145.
. Manual operation
For details, refer to “Manual Operation” �P146.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(145,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
The power rear gate operates only when
all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle is stopped completely.
. The outside temperature is within a
range from −22°F to 140°F (from
−30°C to 60°C).
. The ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“ACC” position. Or, the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
We recommend using the power rear
gate function in most circumstances
instead of manual operation.
143
gate will not open. Wait for a while
before trying to open the rear gate via
the power rear gate function.
. If either of the operating conditions
has not been satisfied while operating
the power rear gate, an electronic
chirp will sound and the power rear
gate will be deactivated. In this case,
the rear gate may stop opening or
closing suddenly.
NOTE
. If the rear gate cannot be opened due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you
can unlock it by manually operating
the rear gate lock release lever. For
the procedure, refer to “If the Rear
Gate Cannot Be Opened” �P453.
. Avoid keeping the rear gate open for
more than a few hours. Doing so may
drain the vehicle battery.
. The rear gate may not move smoothly
when the battery power becomes low.
. Do not press the power rear gate
button repeatedly while the power rear
gate is operating. Otherwise, the
system may ignore the button operation in order to avoid being damaged.
. If the vehicle starts to move while the
power rear gate is operating, the
system sounds a buzzer and closes
the rear gate automatically. At this
time, if the system detects jamming, it
will deactivate the power rear gate and
the rear gate will not be closed. If this
occurs, close the rear gate manually.
For details, refer to “Manual Operation” �P146.
. If you try to open the rear gate using
the power rear gate function immediately after closing the rear gate using
the power rear gate function, an
electronic chirp will sound and the rear
S_204414-W
. The rear gate cannot be paused when
it is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm)
range from the fully closed position.
The system will ignore any button
operation and the rear gate will continue to open.
. The rear gate will remain unlocked
even after closing it. Always lock the
rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
. If you cannot open/close the rear gate
by performing the operation described
here, a short electronic chirp will
sound three times (beep, beep, beep).
In this case, perform the initialization
of the power rear gate. Refer to
“Initialization of Power Rear Gate”
�P148.
. Before using the power rear gate,
remove any accumulated snow from
the rear gate.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(146,1)
144
KEYS AND DOORS
OPERATING BY THE POWER
REAR GATE BUTTON
s02au02
NOTE
. If you cannot open the rear gate by
operating the power rear gate button
on the instrument panel, then it may
be locked by using the keyless access
function or the remote keyless entry
system. Unlock the doors using the
keyless access function or the remote
keyless entry system before pressing
the power rear gate button again.
. The factory setting (default setting) of
the operation for the “ ” button on
the access key fob is pressing and
holding. This setting can be changed
to non-operation or pressing twice at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
Pausing the rear gate while it is opening:
Briefly press the power rear gate button
while the rear gate is being opened.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
S_204644-W
Power rear gate button on the instrument panel
Power rear gate button on the access
key fob
Opening the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed.
An electronic chirp and the hazard warning flashers will operate as follows:
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the instrument panel:
sounds and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the access key fob: sounds
and flashes four times.
The rear gate will open automatically.
NOTE
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close.
Closing the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate
button.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
NOTE
If you briefly press the power rear gate
button again, the rear gate will open.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(147,1)
145
KEYS AND DOORS
OPERATING BY THE BUTTONS
ON THE REAR GATE
. Power rear gate button
. Power rear gate lock button
s02au03
NOTE
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close.
S_204645-W
Rear gate opener button
Closing the rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following buttons.
. Rear gate opener button
. Power rear gate button
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
NOTE
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will open.
Locking the doors using the power
rear gate lock button:
1. Carry the access key fob.
2. Press the power rear gate lock button.
S_204656-W
Power rear gate lock button
Power rear gate button
Opening the rear gate:
When the rear gate is
locked
Briefly press the rear gate
opener button while carrying the access key.
When the rear gate is
unlocked
Briefly press the rear gate
opener button.
After you operate the rear gate, an
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
The rear gate will open automatically.
Pausing the rear gate while it is opening:
Briefly press either of the following buttons while the rear gate is being opened.
. Rear gate opener button
All doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler
lid are locked, and the rear gate will be
closed. Also, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once, and an electronic chirp will
sound once.
NOTE
. When you push the power rear gate
lock button for more than 2 seconds,
all the doors will lock, but the auto
closing function of the rear gate will be
canceled.
. If you push the power rear gate lock
button while the access key is inside
the vehicle, an electronic chirp sounds
and the rear gate does not operate.
. When the ignition switch is placed in
the “ON” or “ACC” position, the rear
gate does not operate when you push
the power rear gate lock button.
. If any of the doors is not fully closed,
the electronic chirp sounds five times
to alert you that the doors are not
properly closed.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(148,1)
146
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTE
MANUAL OPERATION
s02au04
Opening the rear gate:
Lift the rear gate up to the midway
position. The rear gate will automatically
open from the midway position to the fully
open position.
Closing the rear gate:
. If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may
not operate automatically open or
close.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that all doors and the rear gate are
completely locked.
MEMORY FUNCTION
s02au06
The preferred rear gate height can be
registered.
Registration of the rear gate height:
1. Open the rear gate and stop it at the
preferable height.
2. Press and hold the power rear gate
button to register the height.
S_204657-W
Pull down the rear gate when the rear
gate is opened. The rear gate will close
automatically.
This function is disabled as the factory
default setting. To use the function, it must
be enabled. Consult your SUBARU
dealer to have this function set to enabled
or disabled. When opening and closing
the rear gate with this function disabled,
make sure to use the power rear gate by
operating the button.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull down on the inside handle as shown
in the illustration.
CAUTION
. Never attempt to close the rear
gate by grabbing or pressing on the
outer metal surface or damage
may result.
. Always use the inside handle to
avoid damaging the exterior surface of the gate.
S_204658-W
Power rear gate button
An electronic chirp sounds for confirmation.
The rear gate will stop at the registered
position when the memory function is on.
NOTE
. Register the rear gate height to turn on
the “Power Rear Gate Height Memory” automatically. Refer to “Vehicle”
�P206.
. To change the registered height, perform the registering procedure again.
. It is possible to register the height from
approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more from
the completely closed position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(149,1)
147
KEYS AND DOORS
Deactivation of the memory function:
Deactivate the memory function to open
the rear gate fully. Perform either of the
following operation to deactivate the
memory function.
– Deactivate the “Power Rear Gate
Height Memory” function on the center
information display (CID). Refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
– Register the position of the rear gate
at the fully open position.
Utilizing the memorized rear gate
height:
To open the rear gate and stop it at the
registered height, perform the following
procedure.
1. Check that “Power Rear Gate Height
Memory” is on. Refer to “Vehicle”
�P206.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear
gate buttons or briefly press the rear
gate opener button.
shape and the manner in which it
was caught. Be careful not to catch
your fingers and other body parts.
CAUTION
2
. If the reverse function is operated 3
times consecutively, automatic
opening and closing of the power
rear gate function will be canceled
and the rear gate will stop opening
or closing suddenly. However, the
rear gate may open or close
depending on the rear gate height
when automatic operation is
ceased. Be careful that the rear
gate does not hit anyone’s head or
face, etc. and that fingers and
baggage, etc. are not caught in it.
. Take care not to damage the touch
sensors. Otherwise, the reverse
function may cease to operate.
The rear gate will open to the position that
is stored in the memory function even if
the rear gate is opened by the reverse
function.
If, while opening or closing using power
rear gate, the rear gate catches persons
or baggage or hits an obstacle, an
electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the
rear gate will operate as follows.
REVERSE FUNCTION
When opening the rear gate:
The rear gate will automatically close.
NOTE
s02au07
WARNING
. Do not let parts of your body get
caught when operating the reverse
function. If the reverse function
does not operate for some reason,
this may lead to serious injury or
accidents.
When closing the rear gate:
The rear gate will automatically open.
. The reverse function may not
operate if foreign objects are
caught in the rear gate just before it
closes completely. Be careful not to
catch your fingers and other body
parts.
. The reverse function may not
operate depending on the object
S_204646-W
Touch sensor
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(150,1)
148
KEYS AND DOORS
Touch sensors are attached on the left
and right edges of the rear gate. If the
touch sensors detect fingers, baggage,
etc. while closing by the power rear gate
function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3
times and the rear gate will open automatically.
chirp such as that caused by “Reverse
Function” �P147, it cannot be set as nonoperational.
NOTE
If the power rear gate detects some
abnormality while operating, an electronic
chirp will sound and the power rear gate
operation will be automatically stopped in
either opening or closing position. In this
case, the system needs to be initialized in
the following order to restart the function
properly.
When the rear gate is opened using the
reverse function, it will be opened fully or
to the height registered in the memory
function.
REAR GATE DROP PREVENTION FUNCTION
s02au08
If, while fully opened via the power rear
gate function, the rear gate is lowered, the
rear gate drop prevention function will
apply braking to the rear gate so that it
prevents a rapid closure of the rear gate.
INITIALIZATION OF POWER
REAR GATE
s02au10
If the power rear gate is closed
s02au1001
1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener
button until it is unlocked (for approximately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear
gate.
NOTE
If you close the rear gate manually just
after the rear gate is fully opened using
the power rear gate function, the rear gate
drop prevention function will detect a
rapid closure of the rear gate and apply
braking to the rear gate. In this case, this
is not a malfunction.
SELECTING AUDIBLE SIGNAL
OPERATION
s02au09
Using an electronic chirp, the power rear
gate will give you an audible signal before
starting its operation. If desired, the
audible signal can be turned off by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
You can also turn the audible signal off by
operating the center information display.
For details, refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal
also works as the audible signal settings
for the “remote keyless entry system” and
the “keyless access with push-button
start system”. However, for the electronic
S_204645-W
Rear gate opener button
2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to
close automatically. The system will
be initialized once the gate is fully
closed.
3. Operate the power rear gate and
check that the function operates
properly.
If the power rear gate is opened
s02au1002
1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to
close automatically. The system will
be initialized once the gate is fully
closed.
If the rear gate will not close comple-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(151,1)
149
KEYS AND DOORS
tely, keep pressing the rear gate
opener button for approximately 5
seconds and pull down the rear gate.
2. Operate the power rear gate and
check that the function operates
properly.
2-9. MOONROOF (If
Equipped)
s02ak
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
WARNING
CAUTION
If the power rear gate function does
not operate properly, have your vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head
or any objects protrude from the
moonroof. A person could be seriously
injured if any of the following conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly.
. The vehicle turns sharply.
. The vehicle is involved in an
accident.
. Body parts protruding from the
vehicle are struck by outside objects.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions
without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof, make
sure that no one’s hands, arms,
head or other objects will be
accidentally caught in the moonroof.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety reasons
and never allow an unattended
child to remain in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-entrapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
2
(152,1)
150
KEYS AND DOORS
Sliding moonroof
CAUTION
s02ak0202
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to freeze
shut.
. The anti-entrapment function does
not operate when the moonroof is
being tilted down. Be sure to
confirm that it is safe to tilt the
moonroof down before doing so.
. If the moonroof does not close,
have the system checked by a
SUBARU dealer.
S_204648-W
Open
Close
MOONROOF SWITCHES
s02ak02
Tilting moonroof
s02ak0201
S_204647-W
Up
Down
To raise the moonroof, press and hold the
switch in the up side and release. To lower
the moonroof, press and hold the switch
in the down side.
NOTE
Release the switch after the moonroof
has been raised or has been lowered
completely. Pressing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof.
Opening the moonroof:
To open the moonroof using the automatic function, press and hold the open
side of the switch and then release it.
To stop the moonroof at a selected midway position while opening it, momentarily press the open or close side of the
switch.
The sunshade will also be opened
together with the moonroof.
The moonroof will stop at a position
approximately 3.8 in (9.7 cm) away from
the fully opened position.
Press the open side of the switch again to
open the moonroof completely.
Closing the moonroof:
To close the moonroof using the automatic function, press and hold the close
side of the switch and then release it.
To stop the moonroof at a selected midway position while closing it, momentarily
press the open or close side of the switch.
NOTE
. After washing the vehicle or after it
rains, wipe away water on the roof
prior to opening the moonroof to
prevent drops of water from falling into
the passenger compartment.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(153,1)
KEYS AND DOORS
151
. Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this
occurs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 3.8 in (9.7 cm) away
from the fully opened position.
. For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
2
Anti-entrapment function
s02ak0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically opens fully. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated
by a strong shock on the moonroof even
when there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts of
your body.
SUNSHADE
s02ak05
S_204400-W
The sunshade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
also moves back.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(154,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(155,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-1.
Push-Button Ignition Switch ......................................................156
s03
Safety Precautions ...................................................................... 156
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System ........................... 156
Switching Power Status .............................................................. 156
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ...................... 157
3-2.
3-3.
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................................................158
Meters and Gauges.....................................................................158
Speedometer .............................................................................. 158
Tachometer................................................................................. 158
Odometer.................................................................................... 158
Double Trip Meter ....................................................................... 159
Fuel Gauge and Driving Range on Remaining Fuel ...................... 159
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ............................................ 160
Instrument Cluster Settings......................................................... 160
3-4.
Illumination Brightness Control.................................................161
3-5.
Warning and Indicator Lights ....................................................162
Auto Dimmer Cancel Function..................................................... 161
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime .............................................. 163
SRS Airbag System Warning Light .............................................. 165
Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF Indicator Lights ... 166
CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator Light .......... 166
Coolant Temperature Low Indicator Light (Blue)/Coolant
Temperature High Warning Light (Red) ...................................... 167
Charge Warning Light ................................................................. 168
Oil Pressure Warning Light ......................................................... 168
Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light............................................ 168
AT OIL TEMP Warning Light ........................................................ 169
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (Except for Canada-Spec.
Models)..................................................................................... 169
ABS Warning Light ..................................................................... 170
Brake System Warning Light ....................................................... 171
Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light...................................... 172
Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light ................................................ 173
Low Fuel Warning Light .............................................................. 174
Door Open Indicator Light........................................................... 174
Engine Hood Open Warning Light ............................................... 174
Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ...................................... 174
All-Wheel Drive Warning Light..................................................... 174
Power Steering Warning Light ..................................................... 174
Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/Vehicle Dynamics
Control Operation Indicator Light .............................................. 175
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light............................. 176
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System.................................................. 176
Security Indicator Light ............................................................... 180
Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator............................................ 180
Turn Signal Indicator Lights ........................................................ 180
High Beam Indicator Light........................................................... 181
High Beam Assist Indicator ......................................................... 181
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(156,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
LED Headlight Warning Light ...................................................... 181
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator Light ..................... 181
Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light ............................. 181
Headlight Indicator Light ............................................................. 181
Front Fog Light Indicator Light.................................................... 181
Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)........................................ 181
Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light ............................................ 181
Auto Start Stop Indicator Light (Green) ....................................... 182
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator Light.................... 182
Electric Damper System Warning Light (If Equipped) ................... 182
X-MODE Indicator ....................................................................... 182
Vehicle Detected in Neighboring Lane Indicator........................... 182
Hill Descent Control Indicator Light............................................. 183
BSW/RCTW Warning Indicator..................................................... 183
BSW/RCTW OFF Indicator ........................................................... 183
Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator ............................................ 183
RAB Warning Indicator................................................................ 183
RAB OFF Indicator ...................................................................... 183
Proximity Warning Detection OFF Indicator ................................. 184
Distraction Mitigation System Operation Indicator Light
(Green) ..................................................................................... 184
Distraction Mitigation System Warning Light (Yellow) .................. 184
Distraction Mitigation System OFF Indicator Light ....................... 184
Distraction Mitigation System Temporary Stop Indicator Light ..... 184
Front Cross Traffic Braking Warning Indicator (If Equipped) ........ 184
Front Cross Traffic Braking OFF Indicator (If Equipped)............... 184
3-6.
Instrument Cluster Display ........................................................185
Basic Operation .......................................................................... 187
Instrument Cluster Display Mode................................................. 188
Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and Good-Bye Screen
(Ending Animation) ................................................................... 189
Warning Screen .......................................................................... 189
Meter Information Screen ............................................................ 189
Telltale Screen ............................................................................ 190
Basic Screens............................................................................. 191
Digital Speed Screen................................................................... 193
3-7.
Center Information Display (CID) Features...............................194
Welcome Screen and Good-Bye Screen....................................... 194
Touch Screen Operations ............................................................ 195
3-8.
Center Information Display ........................................................197
HOME Icon ................................................................................. 198
Outside Temperature and Clock .................................................. 198
Information Bar........................................................................... 198
Status Bar................................................................................... 198
Driver Profile Icon ....................................................................... 198
How to Change the Screen Settings ............................................ 199
Shortcut Icons ............................................................................ 199
Setting........................................................................................ 200
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(157,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-9.
Clock ............................................................................................210
Setting the Clock Manually.......................................................... 210
Setting the Clock Automatically................................................... 210
Setting 12-Hour Display/24-Hour Display ..................................... 211
3-10. Valet Mode ...................................................................................211
Activation of Valet Mode ............................................................. 211
Deactivation of Valet Mode .......................................................... 212
Change the Passcode ................................................................. 212
3-11. Light Control Switch...................................................................212
Headlights .................................................................................. 213
High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ............................................... 215
Headlight Flasher........................................................................ 215
High Beam Assist Function ......................................................... 215
Daytime Running Light System ................................................... 218
3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ......................................219
3-13. Front Fog Light Switch...............................................................220
3-14. Turn Signal Lever........................................................................221
One-Touch Lane Changer............................................................ 221
3-15. Wiper and Washer.......................................................................221
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ...................................... 223
Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch ...................................... 225
3-16. Defogger and Deicer...................................................................226
3-17. Mirrors .........................................................................................228
Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function) (If Equipped) ....... 228
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass (If Equipped) ............................... 228
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink® (If Equipped) ...... 229
Smart Rearview Mirror/Compass with HomeLink® (If Equipped) .... 235
Outside Mirrors........................................................................... 245
3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel...................................................249
3-19. Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped)...........................249
3-20. Horn .............................................................................................250
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(158,1)
156
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-1. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
s03bg
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s03bg04
Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P117.
OPERATING RANGE FOR
PUSH-BUTTON START SYSTEM
s03bg01
. When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the
access key fob battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in “If
Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly” �P451. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Refer
to “Replacing Battery of Access Key
Fob” �P507.
SWITCHING POWER STATUS
s03bg02
S_308336-W
Antennas
Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the
antennas inside the vehicle, the pushbutton ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key fob is
outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
close to the glass, it may be possible
to switch the power or to start the
engine.
. Do not leave the access key fob in the
following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– At the corner of the cargo area
S_308335-W
Operation indicator
Push-button ignition switch
The power status is switched every time
the push-button ignition switch is
pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal.
Every time the button is pressed, the
power is switched in the sequence of
“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When
the engine is stopped and the pushbutton ignition switch is in “ACC” or
“ON”, the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch illuminates
in orange.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(159,1)
157
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Power
status
Indicator color
Operation
OFF
Turned off
Power is turned off.
ACC
Orange
The following systems can be used:
audio and accessory power outlet.
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
ON
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
CAUTION
. To prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging, do not leave the pushbutton ignition switch in the “ON” or
“ACC” position for a long time.
. To avoid a malfunction, observe
the following precautions.
– Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button
ignition switch.
– Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand that
is soiled with oil or other
contaminants.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch does
not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is
turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot sun
for a long time, the surface of the
push-button ignition switch may
get hot. Be careful not to burn
yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-button
ignition switch flashes in green when
the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
Battery drainage reduction
function
s03bg0201
If you leave the push-button ignition
switch in the “ON” position (when the
engine is not running), a series of
messages will be displayed on the instrument cluster in the following order,
and then the push-button ignition switch
will be automatically set to “OFF”.
. After approximately 5 minutes, the
message “Turn Power OFF or Turn
Car ON to Charge Battery” will be
displayed.
. After approximately 15 minutes, the
battery charge drops and the message “Some Functions Disabled Reduced Battery Level” will be displayed.
. When the select lever is in the “P”
position and the ignition switch remains in the “ON” position for approximately 30 minutes, the system
automatically turns the push button
ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
WHEN ACCESS KEY FOB
DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
s03bg03
Refer to “If Access Key Fob Does Not
Operate Properly” �P451.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(160,1)
158
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-2. HAZARD WARNING
FLASHER
3-3. METERS AND GAUGES
s03ad
s03ab
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in some
of the meters and gauges in the instrument cluster. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.
SPEEDOMETER
s03ad03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
TACHOMETER
S_308337-W
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works
with the ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning flasher switch
on the instrument panel. All the turn signal
lights and the turn signal indicator lights
will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the
switch again.
s03ad06
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module to
protect the engine from overrevving.
The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
ODOMETER
s03ad04
S_308338-W
TRIP RESET switch
Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(161,1)
159
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
NOTE
If you press the TRIP RESET switch when
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. The indicators will turn off when the
TRIP RESET switch is not operated for
approximately 10 seconds.
DOUBLE TRIP METER
s03ad05
S_308339-W
TRIP RESET switch
Trip meter
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
. If the connection between the instrument cluster and battery is broken for
any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data
recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
or “ACC” position, the odometer/trip
meter will light up. It is possible to
switch between the A trip meter and B
trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
In addition, it is possible to reset the
trip meter by pressing and holding the
TRIP RESET switch.
The indicators will turn off when the
TRIP RESET switch is not operated
for approximately 10 seconds.
FUEL GAUGE AND DRIVING
RANGE ON REMAINING FUEL
s03ad07
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
TRIP RESET switch.
ZOM0972
To reset the trip meter, select either the A
trip or B trip meter, then press and hold
the TRIP RESET switch.
S_308340-W
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(162,1)
160
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE
. You will see the “
” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
lid is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
while the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge will
light up and indicate the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge will turn off when the TRIP
RESET switch is not operated for
approximately 10 seconds.
. The driving range on the remaining
fuel is only a guide. The indicated
value may differ from the actual driving
range on the remaining fuel, so you
must immediately fill the tank when the
low fuel warning light illuminates.
. If you refuel the vehicle with approximately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp
gal) or less of fuel, the values indicated on the fuel gauge and driving
range on the remaining fuel may not
update. As a guideline, refueling the
vehicle with approximately 2.6 US gal
(10 liters, 2.2 Imp gal) or more of fuel
will update the indicated values.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature
gauge reaches near the middle of the
range. Engine operation is optimum with
the engine coolant at this temperature
range and high revving operation when
the engine is not warmed up enough
should be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine Overheating”
�P446.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SETTINGS
s03ad16
Instrument cluster settings can be set on
the center information display. For details,
refer to “Displays” �P204.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
s03ad08
S_308341-W
Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(163,1)
161
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-4. ILLUMINATION BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
s03aj
“Brightness Dial Control” is on.
Instrument
cluster and
Operational
climate
item
control panel
Center information
display
Control dial
Available
“Brightness
Adjustment”*1 on
the center
information
display
S_308342-W
The illumination brightness of the instrument cluster, center information display
and climate control panel dims under the
following conditions.
. The light switch is in the “
” or “ ”
position when the ambient light is
dark.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not canceled
even when the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position.
. The operation method of illumination
brightness will differ depending
whether or not “Brightness Dial Control” in the center information display is
on. Refer to the operation method
indicated the following table.
Available
3
Not available
Not available
“Brightness Dial Control” is off.
Instrument
cluster and
Operational
climate
item
control panel
Center information
display
Control dial
Available
Not available
“Brightness
Adjustment” on
the center
information
display
Not available
Available
*1: When “Brightness Dial Control” is on,
“Brightness Adjustment” on the center
information display is not available.
For details about “Brightness Dial Control” on/off settings, refer to “Brightness/
Contrast” �P199.
AUTO DIMMER CANCEL
FUNCTION
s03aj01
When the ambient light is bright, the
illumination brightness is set to the maximum regardless of the position of the
control dial. In this case, you cannot
adjust the illumination brightness by
using the control dial. When the ambient
light is dark, you can dim the illumination
brightness as described above.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(164,1)
162
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
3-5. WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
s03ae
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several
seconds or after the engine has started:
: Rear seatbelt warning light
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
/
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
/
: ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
/
: Brake system warning light
: Electronic parking brake indicator
light
: Power steering warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light (except for Canada-spec. models)
: Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(165,1)
163
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
SEATBELT WARNING
LIGHT AND CHIME
s03ae01
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
Driver’s and front passenger’s
seats
s03ae0114
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their
seatbelts by illuminating the warning
lights in the locations indicated in the
following illustration and sounding a
chime.
Driver’s warning light
S_308060-W
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s
seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened while
driving, the seatbelt warning system
operates as follows according to the
vehicle speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when the vehicle speed is approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.
– The warning light will blink, and the
warning chime will make a beep
sound when the vehicle speed is
between approximately 4 mph (6
km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The
warning chime will stop when the
vehicle stops.
– The warning light will blink, and the
warning chime will sound loudly
when 15 seconds have elapsed
when the vehicle speed is between
approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and
13 mph (20 km/h).
– The warning light will blink, and the
warning chime will sound loudly
when the vehicle speed is approximately more than 13 mph (20
km/h).
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
system for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
seatbelt warning system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on the
front passenger’s seat.
Front passenger’s warning light
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
device from functioning correctly or
cause the device to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
S_308343-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(166,1)
164
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant
to place his/her hands or legs on
the front passenger’s seatback, or
allow him/her to pull the seatback.
Rear passenger’s seats
s03ae0115
Rear seatbelt warning light
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Front Seats” �P37.
If the seatbelt warning system for the front
passenger’s seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant, although we
strongly recommend that all children
sit in the rear seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward
position and seatback of front passenger’s seat are locked into place
securely by moving the seat back and
forth.
If still the seatbelt warning system for front
passenger’s seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective
actions described above, immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
S_308344-W
Rear left seat
Rear center seat
Rear right seat
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light and
chime reminds the rear passenger to
fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the
warning lights in the locations indicated in
the above illustration and sounding a
chime.
WARNING
. The driver must check that all the
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts properly since the seatbelt warning system may not detect
passengers under the following
circumstances.
– When cushions or child restraint systems, etc., are used.
– When a child or small adult is
sitting in the seat.
. Observe the following precautions
– Do not apply any strong impact
to the rear seat.
– Do not fold the seatback forward when objects are on the
seat.
– Do not spill liquid on the rear
seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(167,1)
165
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
– Do not remove or disassemble
the rear seat.
NOTE
. The seatbelt warning system of the
rear seat detects if the seat is occupied by a passenger. Heavy cargo or
large pets on the rear seat may result
in the activation of the passenger
seatbelt warning light and chime.
Fastening the rear seatbelt prior to
loading cargo or large pets will avoid
activating the passenger seatbelt
warning light and chime.
. When folding the rear seat, ensure
that the seat is empty prior to folding.
Items caught between the seat bottom
and seatback, when folded, may
damage the seat surface or activate
the passenger seatbelt warning light
and chime.
If passengers in the rear seats do not
fasten their seatbelts when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or
blink to indicate that their seatbelts are
not fastened.
NOTE
. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/
is still not fastened while driving, the
seatbelt warning system operates as
follows according to the vehicle
speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when the vehicle speed is approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.
– When the vehicle speed is approximately between 4 mph (6
km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h), the
seatbelt warning lights will blink
and a warning chime will sound.
The chime will make a beep sound
for 15 seconds, and it then will
become louder and continue for 35
seconds. The warning light will
blink for 50 seconds, then it will
illuminate steadily and the chime
will stop.
– The warning light will blink, and the
beep will sound loudly for 35
seconds when the vehicle speed is
approximately more than 13 mph
(20 km/h). After 35 seconds, the
blinking warning light will illuminate
steadily and the chime will stop.
The warning lights will continue to
illuminate until their seatbelts are
fastened.
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT
s03ae02
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of the
following conditions, immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe place, and consult
a SUBARU dealer. Unless a technician checks and repairs the system as
needed, the seatbelt pretensioners
and/or the SRS airbag will not operate
properly in the event of a collision,
which may result in injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning light
when the ignition switch is first
turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
For details about the components monitored by the warning light, refer to “SRS
Airbag System Monitors” �P110.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(168,1)
166
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
FRONT PASSENGER’S FRONTAL AIRBAG ON AND OFF INDICATOR LIGHTS
s03ae03
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag is deactivated, the passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indicator light will
remain off while the OFF indicator light
will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicator
lights remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
S_308345-W
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
For details about the operating conditions
of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer to
“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag
System” �P92.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator lights show you the
status of the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag.
The indicator lights are located as shown
in the illustration.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicator lights illuminate for 6 seconds
during which time the system is checked.
Following the system check, both indicator lights turn off for 2 seconds. After that,
one of the indicator lights illuminates
depending on the status of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator light will illuminate
while the OFF indicator light will remain
off.
CHECK ENGINE
WARNING LIGHT/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03ae04
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illuminates
while you are driving, have your
vehicle checked/repaired by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could cause serious damage, which
may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may
indicate that there is at least one problem
or potential problem somewhere in the
emission control system.
If the light illuminates constantly
s03ae0401
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the
engine starts, an emission control system
malfunction has been detected.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(169,1)
167
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light coming on could be a loose or missing fuel
filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it
until it clicks. Make sure nothing is
interfering with the sealing of the cap.
Tightening the cap will not make the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light turn off immediately. It
may take several driving trips. If the light
does not turn off, take your vehicle to your
authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the light is blinking
s03ae0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should conform
to the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU
dealer immediately.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE LOW INDICATOR
LIGHT (Blue)/COOLANT
TEMPERATURE HIGH
WARNING LIGHT (Red)
s03ae48
CAUTION
. After turning the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, if this indicator
light/warning light behaves in any
of the following ways, the electrical
system may be malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
– It remains blinking in RED.
– It remains illuminated in RED
for more than 2 seconds.
– It remains blinking in RED and
BLUE alternately.
. While driving, if this indicator light/
warning light behaves in any of the
following ways, take the specified
appropriate measure listed below.
– Blinking or illuminated in RED:
Safely stop the vehicle as soon
as possible, and refer to the
emergency steps to take in the
case of engine overheating.
After that, have the system
checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Engine Overheating” �P446.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE
alternately:
The electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
This coolant temperature low indicator
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following three functions.
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insufficient warming up of the engine.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(170,1)
168
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating.
. Illumination in RED indicates overheating condition of the engine.
If the engine coolant temperature increases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
At this time, the engine is close to overheating.
If the engine coolant temperature increases further, the indicator light/warning light illuminates in RED continuously.
At this time, the engine may be overheating.
When the indicator light/warning light
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED,
safely stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, and refer to the emergency
steps to take in the case of engine
overheating. Refer to “Engine Overheating” �P446. After that, have the system
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Also, if the indicator light/warning light
often blinks in RED, the electrical system
may be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in RED.
However, this is not a malfunction if the
indicator light/warning light turns off after
a short time.
CHARGE WARNING
LIGHT
s03ae05
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or
does not turn off after the engine starts,
stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the drive belt. If the drive
belt is loose, broken or if the drive belt is in
good condition but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT
s03ae06
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the oil
pressure warning light on. This may
cause serious engine damage.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or
does not turn off after the engine starts,
stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
ENGINE LOW OIL LEVEL
WARNING LIGHT
s03ae58
This light appears when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit.
If the warning light appears, check the
engine oil level on a level surface. When
the engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to
“Engine Oil” �P476. After adding or
changing the engine oil, warm up the
engine and stop it on a level surface, then
start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute
or more. Confirm that the warning light
has turned off after the engine has
started. If the warning light does not turn
off after refilling the engine oil, or the light
appears even though the engine oil level
is within the normal range, have the
vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the
system just after turning the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. If the oil
level is below the lower limit when the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(171,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the engine low oil level
warning light will turn on.
. When the vehicle is parked on a steep
slope, the engine low oil level warning
light may not illuminate even if the oil
level is below the lower limit to avoid
erroneous lighting.
AT OIL TEMP WARNING
LIGHT
s03ae07
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving,
immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
Transmission control system
warning
s03ae0701
If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may
indicate that the transmission control
system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
immediately.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
WARNING LIGHT (Except
for Canada-Spec. Models)
s03ae08
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure
warning light will illuminate for a few
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all
tires are properly inflated, the light will go
out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
169
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(172,1)
170
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate briefly
after the ignition switch is turned on or
the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
3) Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the
COLD tire pressure shown on the
tire inflation pressure label on the
door pillar on the driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may have significant damage and a
fast leak that causes the tire to lose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to
“Flat Tires” �P439.
When a replacement tire is mounted
or a wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute. This indicates the TPMS
is unable to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible for tire and sensor
replacement and/or system resetting.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system is
NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at
least monthly) using a tire gauge. After
any change to tire pressure(s), the tire
pressure monitoring system will not recheck tire inflation pressures until the
vehicle is first driven more than 25
mph (40 km/h). After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures are
now above the severe low pressure
threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes
later. Therefore, be sure to install the
specified size for the front and rear
tires.
ABS WARNING LIGHT
s03ae09
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, but
it does not turn off even after
starting the vehicle.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is off),
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(173,1)
171
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the ABS function shuts down;
however, the conventional brake
system continues to operate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates together with the brake system warning
light if the EBD system malfunctions. For
further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to “Brake System
Warning Light” �P171.
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light
illuminates, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle
in a safe location, use tire stops
under the tires to prevent the
vehicle from moving and contact
your SUBARU dealer. For details,
refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”
�P339.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described in the following conditions, the
ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illuminated
after the engine has been started, but
it turns off while driving.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may
illuminate. This is due to the low battery
voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully
charged, the light will turn off.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT
s03ae10
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous. This
indicates your brake system may
not be working properly. If the light
remains illuminated, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning light
illuminates, if the warning light behavior is as described in the following
examples, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is
applied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate immediately after the engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the warning light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate after the electronic parking
brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning
if the light turns off after a short period
of time.
. When the engine is started while the
electronic parking brake is applied/
released, the system may judge an
abnormal situation and the warning
light may illuminate. If the warning light
illuminates, turn the ignition switch
once to the “OFF” position and then
restart the engine. Then, apply/release the electronic parking brake. If
the warning light turns off, the system
will be restored.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(174,1)
172
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
This light has the following functions.
Brake fluid level warning
s03ae1002
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position and
with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning
s03ae1003
If the warning light remains on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately
and contact a SUBARU dealer.
Electronic brake booster warning
s03ae1009
The brake system warning light illuminates when the electronic brake booster
is malfunctioning. In addition, the warning
messages “Brake System” and “Check
Owner’s Manual” are displayed alternately on the instrument cluster display. If
the warning light illuminates, promptly
park in a safe location as soon as possible
and contact your SUBARU dealer.
Electronic parking brake system warning
s03ae1004
The brake system warning light illuminates when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the warning
light illuminates, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the electronic
parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”
�P339.
Frequent operation warning:
The brake system warning light illuminates and a chirp sound will be heard if
the electronic parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the electronic parking brake
switch is restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR LIGHT
s03ae85
Parking brake indicator
s03ae8501
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off
when the parking brake is fully released.
Electronic parking brake system warning
s03ae8502
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the engine is
running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off.
However, if the light still illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe
location immediately and have the
system inspected by a SUBARU
dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the electro-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(175,1)
173
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
nic parking brake system may be
malfunctioning. Immediately stop
your vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. For
details, refer to “Electronic Parking
Brake” �P339.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position with the electronic
parking brake applied, the electronic
parking brake indicator light remains
illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pulled to apply the electronic
parking brake while the ignition switch
is in the “OFF” position, the electronic
parking brake indicator light illuminates, remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then
turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunctioning.
– The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is
released.
. The electronic parking brake indicator
light may flash immediately after the
engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the indicator light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indicator
light may flash after the electronic
parking brake is frequently applied
and released. However, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turns off after a short
period of time.
indicator light flashes, promptly park in a
safe location as soon as possible and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator
light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the
electronic parking brake switch is pushed.
For details, refer to “Electronic Parking
Brake” �P339.
Parking brake apply inhibit warning:
The electronic parking brake indicator
light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp
sound will be heard if the electronic
parking brake switch is operated when
the parking brake cannot be applied.
Frequent operation warning:
The electronic parking brake indicator
light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp
sound will be heard if the electronic
parking brake switch is operated too
frequently. In this case, the operation of
the electronic parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
AUTO VEHICLE HOLD
INDICATOR LIGHT
s03ae94
CAUTION
If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
does not illuminate even when the
Auto Vehicle Hold switch is pressed to
activate the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the electronic parking brake
system may be malfunctioning.
This indicator illuminates when the Auto
Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator
blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details,
refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold Function”
�P343.
The electronic parking brake indicator
light flashes when the electronic parking
brake system is malfunctioning. If the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(176,1)
174
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
LOW FUEL WARNING
LIGHT
WINDSHIELD WASHER
FLUID WARNING LIGHT
s03ae11
s03ae42
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp gal).
It only operates when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
This light appears when the fluid level in
the washer fluid tank decreases to the
lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt (0.6
liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING LIGHT
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever
the low fuel warning light illuminates.
Engine misfires as a result of an empty
tank could cause damage to the
engine.
DOOR OPEN INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03ae61
When any of the doors or the rear gate is
not fully closed, the door open indicator
light appears. This function is effective
even if the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
or “ACC” position.
The open door is indicated by the
corresponding part of the door open
indicator light.
Always make sure this indicator does not
appear before you start to drive.
NOTE
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
position and the door open indicator light
is illuminated, it will automatically turn off
after two minutes to protect the battery.
ENGINE HOOD OPEN
WARNING LIGHT
s03ae13
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park in
a safe location and then check
whether all four tires are the same
diameter and whether any of the tires
has a puncture or has lost air pressure
for some other reason.
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
temporary spare tire should therefore be
restricted to the minimum time necessary.
Replace the temporary spare tire with a
conventional tire as soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on
its wheels or with the air pressure
excessively low in any of its tires.
POWER STEERING
WARNING LIGHT
s03ae53
s03ae98
The warning light illuminates if the engine
hood is not fully closed. This function is
effective even if the ignition switch is in
the “OFF” or “ACC” position.
Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.
While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power
steering system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning light
is illuminated, there may be more
resistance when the steering wheel is
operated. Drive carefully to the near-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(177,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
est SUBARU dealer and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering control
system may temporarily limit the power
assist in order to prevent the system
components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely
low speeds, such as while frequently
turning the steering wheel during
parallel parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the fully
turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resistance
when steering. However, this is not a
malfunction. Normal steering force will be
restored after the steering wheel is not
operated for a while and the power
steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power
steering is operated in a non-standard
way which causes power assist limitation
to occur too frequently, that may result in
a malfunction of the power steering
control system.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
CONTROL WARNING
LIGHT/VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL OPERATION INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03ae14
Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light
s03ae1401
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system
provides its ABS control through the
electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the
175
Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control.
As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes inoperative,
causing the warning light to illuminate.
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS are inoperative in
this case, the ordinary functions of the
brake system are still available. You
will be safe while driving in this
condition, but drive carefully and have
your vehicle checked at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself malfunctions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Antilock Brake System) remains fully
operational.
. The warning light illuminates when the
electronic control system of the ABS/
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light, ABS warning light, and brake
system warning light illuminate simultaneously if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD
system malfunction warning, refer to
“Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning” �P172.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be
considered normal.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(178,1)
176
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates after the
engine has started and turns off while
the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately and
remains off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
�P333.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. The light does not illuminate while the
system check.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position.
s03ae1402
The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for a
short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the
engine has warmed up) after the
engine has started.
WARNING CHIMES AND
WARNING INDICATOR OF THE
KEYLESS ACCESS WITH
PUSH-BUTTON START SYSTEM
s03ae55
S_308061-W
The keyless access with push-button
start system is equipped with a warning
chime and the access key warning
indicator in order to minimize improper
operations and help protect your vehicle
from theft.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
CONTROL OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
s03ae15
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Refer to “To Turn On/Off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control System”
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(179,1)
177
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
List of warnings
You cannot turn the warning chimes off.
However, the volume setting of the outside warning chime can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warning
indicator does not appear, take the
appropriate action.
s03ae5504
CAUTION
3
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indicator
on the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in green when starting the
engine. This indicates the status that
the steering wheel is not released and
could result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch flashes
in green, if the operation indicator
is still flashing in green, there could
be a steering lock malfunction.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside the
vehicle, the access key warning for
engine start may be provided depending on the status of the access
key fob and the environmental conditions.
. When the access key fob is taken out
of the vehicle through an open window, the access key takeout warning
or passenger access key takeout
warning will not be provided.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(180,1)
178
Inside
warning
chime
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Outside
warning
chime
Operation indicator on
push-button
ignition
switch
Status
Action
The driver’s door is opened
while the push-button ignition
switch is “ACC” position and the
select lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”, or close the
driver’s door.
When exiting the vehicle, be
sure to switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch
is switched to “OFF” while the
driver’s door is open.
Close the driver’s door.
—
Lockout warning:
The doors are locked by following methods when an access
key fob is left in the car.
. The door is closed when the
lock lever of the door is in
the lock position.
. The door is closed when the
power door locking switch is
in the lock position.
Take out the access key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the doors.
The doors cannot be locked
while the access key fob is
inside the vehicle.
A chirp sound will be heard, and
all doors will be unlocked.
—
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor is touched
while the push-button ignition
switch is “OFF” and the access
key fob is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the doors.
If the access key fob is inside the
vehicle, the doors cannot be
locked.
—
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched
while the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position and one of the
doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and
lock them.
If one of the doors including the
rear gate is opened, the doors
cannot be locked.
Ding
Long beep
(60 seconds max.)
—
Power warning:
The door lock sensor is touched
while you are carrying the access key fob, the push-button
ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
Return the access key fob inside
the vehicle, or switch the pushbutton ignition switch to “OFF”.
If the push-button ignition switch
is not switched to “OFF”, the
doors cannot be locked.
Ding, ding
...
(7 seconds)
—
—
Access key warning:
The vehicle is driven while the
access key fob is not inside the
vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and
drive the vehicle.
—
Access key warning for enCarry the access key fob, and
gine start:
The push-button ignition switch press the push-button ignition
is pressed while the access key switch.
fob is not inside the vehicle.
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with
the access key fob and closes
Switch the push-button ignition
the driver’s door while the pushswitch to “OFF”, and get out of
button ignition switch is in a
the vehicle.
position other than “OFF” and
the select lever is in a position
other than the “P” position.
Ding, ding
...
(intermittent)
—
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Beep,
beep,
beep,
beep, beep
(5 times)
Ding
Ding
—
Beep,
beep, beep
(3 times)
—
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(181,1)
179
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Inside
warning
chime
Ding
Long beep
(continuous)
Outside
warning
chime
Beep,
beep, beep
(3 times)
Long beep
(continuous)
Operation indicator on
push-button
ignition
switch
Status
Action
—
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exits the
vehicle with the access key fob
and closes a door other than the
driver’s door while the pushbutton ignition switch is in a
position other than “OFF”.
Return the access key fob to
inside the vehicle, or switch the
push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
—
Access key takeout without
“P” position warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with
the access key fob and closes
the driver’s door while the pushbutton ignition switch is in a
position other than “OFF” and
the select lever is in a position
other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P”
position, switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF” and exit
the vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
—
—
Select lever position warning:
. Case 1: The engine is
.
turned off by pressing the
push-button ignition switch
while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P”
position.
. Case 2: The driver’s door is .
opened while the push-button ignition switch is in a
position other than “OFF”
and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P”
position.
Ding
—
—
The battery of the access key
fob is low.
Case 1: Start the engine,
shift the select lever to the
“P” position, switch the
push-button ignition switch
to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Case 2: Shift the select
lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit
the vehicle.
Replace the battery of the access key fob.
For details, refer to “Replacing
Battery” �P507.
Ding
—
Flashes in
green
(15 seconds
max)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure is
performed, but the steering is
still locked.
While turning the steering wheel
right and left lightly, depress the
brake pedal and press the pushbutton ignition switch.
Ding
—
Flashes in
orange
System malfunction warning: Contact a SUBARU dealer imA malfunction is detected in the mediately and have the vehicle
power system or steering lock. inspected.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(182,1)
180
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SELECT LEVER/GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
SECURITY INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03ae43
s03ae16
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
Alarm system
s03ae1601
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm System”
�P136.
Immobilizer system
s03ae1602
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
. Immediately after the push-button
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the
following conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is
in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The engine is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the
power is not switched to “ON” and the
security indicator light continues blinking.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains off
in the following conditions. It means
that the matching of the ID code is
completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not
indicate a malfunction.
– While the engine is running
– The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the driver’s
door has not been opened or
closed
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such as
the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the functionality of the immobilizer system.
S_308068-W
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Select lever/gear position indicator
The select lever position is displayed on
the indicator.
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator, which shows the
current gear selection, and the available
up shift/downshift indicator light up. Refer
to “Selection of Manual Mode” �P325.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LIGHTS
s03ae20
These lights show the operation of the
turn signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be
burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as
possible. Refer to “Replacing Bulbs”
�P504.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(183,1)
181
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03ae21
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
operating the headlight flasher.
HIGH BEAM ASSIST INDICATOR
s03ae83
This indicator appears when the high
beam assist function is activated. For
details about the high beam assist function, refer to “High Beam Assist Function”
�P215.
LED HEADLIGHT WARNING LIGHT
s03ae76
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
STEERING RESPONSIVE
HEADLIGHT OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
s03ae89
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight function is off. For
details about the on/off setting, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
STEERING RESPONSIVE HEADLIGHT
WARNING LIGHT
s03aeb2
The light illuminates when a malfunction
occurs in the Steering Responsive
Headlight. Refer to “Steering Responsive
Headlight (SRH)” �P219.
HEADLIGHT INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03ae24
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
”
. The light switch is turned to the “
or “ ” position.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
s03ae25
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
AUTO START STOP
WARNING LIGHT (Yellow)
s03ae65
CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop warning light is
illuminated in yellow, there may be a
malfunction in the Auto Start Stop
system. When starting the engine
again after the Auto Start Stop warning light illuminates, if it is still illuminating, we recommend that you have
your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
The Auto Start Stop warning light will
illuminate in yellow if you open the engine
hood when the engine has been temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop
system.
In this case, to ensure safety, the engine
will not be automatically restarted, even if
you release the brake pedal. Use normal
operation to restart the engine.
AUTO START STOP OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
s03aeb3
This light will illuminate when the Auto
Start Stop OFF switch is pressed to
prevent the Auto Start Stop system from
operating. It will turn off when the Auto
Start Stop OFF switch is pressed once
more to enable operation of the Auto Start
Stop system. For details about the
setting, refer to “To turn on/off the Auto
Start Stop system” �P351.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(184,1)
182
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
X-MODE INDICATOR
CAUTION
s03ae68
If the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator
light does not illuminate when the Auto
Start Stop OFF switch is pressed, we
recommend that you contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
AUTO START STOP INDICATOR LIGHT (Green)
s03ae66
This indicator light illuminates when the
engine has been temporarily stopped by
the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off
when the engine is restarted.
S_308346-W
Models with 1 mode
Models with 2 modes (DEEP SNOW/
MUD, SNOW/DIRT)
This indicator appears while X-MODE is
activated. It will disappear when X-MODE
is deactivated. Refer to “To Activate/
Deactivate X-MODE” �P336.
AUTO START STOP NO
ACTIVITY DETECTED INDICATOR LIGHT
s03aea3
When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator
light illuminates when the operating condition of the Auto Start Stop system is not
met. The light will turn off when the
vehicle starts driving. Refer to “Nonoperational conditions” �P349.
VEHICLE DETECTED IN
NEIGHBORING LANE INDICATOR
s03aec2
ELECTRIC DAMPER
SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHT (If Equipped)
s03aeb8
This light illuminates if the Electric Damper System malfunctions.
WARNING
When the Electric Damper System
warning light illuminates, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
S_308481-W
When a vehicle is detected (white area
with yellow outline is indicated)
When the turn signal lever is being
operated while a vehicle is detected
(yellow area is indicated)
When BSW/RCTW detects a vehicle
approaching from behind in the neighboring lane, the system displays a vehicle
detected in neighboring lane indicator on
the screen. For details, refer to “BSW/
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(185,1)
183
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
RCTW” �P367.
NOTE
HILL DESCENT CONTROL INDICATOR LIGHT
s03ae69
This indicator appears while the hill
descent control function is in standby. It
will flash while the hill descent control
function is operating. It will disappear
when the hill descent control function is
not available. Refer to “Hill Descent
Control Function” �P337.
BSW/RCTW WARNING
INDICATOR
s03ae80
This warning indicator appears on the
instrument cluster display when the BSW
(Blind Spot Warning) or RCTW (Rear
Cross Traffic Warning) is malfunctioning
for any reason. For further details, refer to
“BSW/RCTW Warning Indicator” �P373.
If this indicator remains displayed, have
your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
BSW/RCTW OFF INDICATOR
s03ae86
This indicator appears on the instrument
cluster display when “Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Warning
(RCTW)” is touched to deactivate BSW
(Blind Spot Warning) and RCTW (Rear
Cross Traffic Warning), or when the BSW/
RCTW is suspended temporarily. For
details, refer to “BSW/RCTW OFF Indicator” �P373.
ICY ROAD SURFACE
WARNING INDICATOR
s03ae82
When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or less, the icy
road surface warning indicator will illuminate to inform the driver that the road
surface may be frozen.
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the
temperature may not be indicated
correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The icy road surface warning indicator
should be treated only as a guide. Be
sure to check the condition of the road
surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
indicator appears, it will not disappear
unless the outside temperature has
increased to approximately 41°F (5°C)
or higher.
RAB WARNING INDICATOR
s03ae91
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) System” �P375.
RAB OFF INDICATOR
s03ae92
This indicator illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is
turned OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is suspended temporarily. Refer to “Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) System”
�P375.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(186,1)
184
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
PROXIMITY WARNING
DETECTION OFF INDICATOR
s03ae93
This indicator illuminates when the
Proximity Warning Detection is turned
OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to
“Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/OFF Setting” �P386.
DISTRACTION MITIGATION SYSTEM OPERATION INDICATOR LIGHT
(Green)
DISTRACTION MITIGATION SYSTEM TEMPORARY STOP INDICATOR
LIGHT
s03aea6
This indicator illuminates when the Distraction Mitigation System is temporarily
stopped. Refer to “Distraction Mitigation
System temporary stop indicator light”
�P398.
NOTE
The Distraction Mitigation System stops
temporarily when the temperature of the
Distraction Mitigation System unit is high.
s03aea4
This indicator illuminates when the Distraction Mitigation System is activated.
Refer to “Distraction Mitigation System
operation indicator light (green)” �P398.
FRONT CROSS TRAFFIC
BRAKING WARNING INDICATOR (If Equipped)
s03aeb9
DISTRACTION MITIGATION SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHT (Yellow)
s03aeb6
This warning light illuminates if the Distraction Mitigation System malfunctions.
We recommend that you have your
vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Distraction
Mitigation System warning light (yellow)”
�P398.
The Front Cross Traffic Braking warning
indicator illuminates if there is a malfunction in the Front Cross Traffic Information and Front Cross Traffic Braking.
We recommend that you have your
vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Front Cross
Traffic Information” �P360.
FRONT CROSS TRAFFIC
BRAKING OFF INDICATOR (If Equipped)
s03aec1
DISTRACTION MITIGATION SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
s03aea5
This indicator illuminates when “Distraction Mitigation System” is touched to
deactivate the Distraction Mitigation
System. Refer to “Distraction Mitigation
System OFF indicator light” �P398.
This indicator illuminates when you touch
“Brake and Warning” on the screen to
deactivate the Front Cross Traffic Information and Front Cross Traffic Braking.
Refer to “EyeSight/Driving Assistance”
�P202.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(187,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
185
3-6. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
s03bn
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to safe
driving when operating the instrument
cluster display while the vehicle is in
motion. When operation of the instrument cluster display interferes with
your ability to concentrate on driving,
stop the vehicle before performing
operations on the screen. Also, do not
concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look
away from the road and could result in
an accident.
3
Various information will be shown on the
instrument cluster display. Also, a warning message will appear on the display if a
malfunction is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can
be performed.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(188,1)
186
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
S_308347-W
Meter information screen (Refer to
“Meter Information Screen” �P189.)
Warning and indicator (Refer to
“Warning and Indicator Lights”
�P162.)
Warning screen (Refer to “Warning
Screen” �P189.)
EyeSight screen*
Digital speed screen (Refer to “Digital
Speed Screen” �P193.)
Double trip meter (Refer to “Double Trip
Meter” �P159.)
Odometer screen (Refer to “Odometer”
�P158.)
X-MODE indicator (Refer to “X-MODE”
�P335.)
Select lever/gear position indicator
(Refer to “Select Lever/Gear Position
Indicator” �P180.)
Basic screen (Refer to “Basic Screens”
�P191.)
Warning screen (Refer to “Warning
Screen” �P189.)
Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale
Screen” �P190.)
*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight
Owner’s Manual.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(189,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
187
BASIC OPERATION
s03bn01
3
S_308348-W
By operating
or
of the control
switches, the screens can be changed.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display
accompanied by a beep. If such a screen
is displayed, take proper action according
to the message shown on the screen.
S_308126-W
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the
information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with
on the display,
press and hold the
switch on the
steering wheel.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(190,1)
188
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MODE
s03bn16
S_308349-W
Classic mode
In classic mode, the analogue tachometer and speedometer display respectively.
Map mode*1
In map mode, the tachometer and
speedometer are displayed together
with the genuine SUBARU navigation
system.
EyeSight mode*2
The EyeSight mode screen displays
the vehicle operating status and surroundings.
Calm mode
In calm mode, only the minimum
necessary information is displayed.
EyeSight system.
There are four different screen modes to
choose from. To change the screen
mode, press the “ ” switch or operate
the Center Information Display settings.
Refer to “Displays” �P204.
NOTE
. When a warning screen or a turn-byturn display is displayed, the screen
mode cannot be switched.
. Depending on the mode, the display
location of such things as the instruments, basic screen, and EyeSight
screen will change.
*1: For details about the audio and navigation
system, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the audio and navigation
system.
*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer
to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(191,1)
189
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WELCOME SCREEN (Opening
Animation) AND GOOD-BYE
SCREEN (Ending Animation)
WARNING SCREEN
s03bn05
Example of warning
s03bn08
Welcome screen and Good-bye screen
are motion graphics displayed on the
instrument cluster display and center
information display upon entering and
exiting the vehicle.
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed after unlocking the door, the
welcome screen (opening animation) will
appear on the instrument cluster display
for approximately 20 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, the instrument cluster
display gradually turns off by showing
good-bye screen (ending animation).
NOTE
. The welcome screen and the goodbye screen may differ in the actual
words and appearance.
. The basic screen will be shown when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position while the welcome screen is
displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears, it
takes a certain period of time to
display it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated after
unlocking the driver’s door, the welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and
closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry system
or the keyless access function while
the welcome screen is displayed.
. The welcome screen including the
audio/navigation unit can be set to on
or off.
3
S_307548-W
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear on
the instrument cluster display. Take the
appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.
METER INFORMATION
SCREEN
s03bn12
This screen informs the driver of various
information.
The meter information screen can be
changed. For details, refer to “Displays”
�P204.
Clock and temperature
s03bn1202
S_308256-W
This screen displays the clock and outside temperature.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(192,1)
190
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
TELLTALE SCREEN
NOTE
s03bn09
. The clock can be displayed in either
12-hour display or 24-hour display.
For details, refer to “Setting 12-Hour
Display/24-Hour Display” �P211.
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the
temperature may not be indicated
correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. You can set the temperature units to
be displayed in Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C). For details, refer to
“Displays” �P204.
Compass (if equipped)
s03bn1203
S_308350-W
Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,
the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
NOTE
. When there is warning information to
display, it will be displayed in five
warning indicators, starting on the left
in ascending order of severity.
. If there are 6 or more warning messages to display, the indicators will be
displayed in sequential order.
Mark
S_308257-W
The direction of the vehicle is displayed.
Name
Page
Door open indicator light
174
Engine hood open warning
light
174
LED headlight warning
light
181
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
181
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
181
Engine low oil level warning light
168
AT OIL TEMP warning light
169
All-Wheel Drive warning
light
174
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(193,1)
191
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Mark
Name
Page
BASIC SCREENS
s03bn06
By operating the
or
switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.
RAB warning indicator
183
Proximity Warning Detection OFF indicator
184
BSW/RCTW warning indicator
183
BSW/RCTW OFF indicator
183
Hill descent control indicator light
183
Auto Start Stop warning
light (yellow)
181
Auto Start Stop indicator
light (green)
182
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light
181
Auto Start Stop No Activity
Detected indicator light
182
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
174
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
Distraction Mitigation System operation indicator
light (green)
184
Displayed unit
Distraction Mitigation System warning light (yellow)
184
Distraction Mitigation System OFF indicator light
184
Distraction Mitigation System temporary stop indicator light
184
Icy road surface warning
light
183
Electric damper system
warning light (if equipped)
182
Front Cross Traffic Braking
warning indicator (if
equipped)
184
Front Cross Traffic Braking
OFF indicator (if equipped)
184
ECO gauge:
3
S_308382-W
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel consumption.
Needle position
“+” side
“−” side
MPG
Better
Poorer
l/100km
Poorer
Better
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is
not shown until driving for approximately 10 seconds. Until that time, the
ECO gauge does not operate.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(194,1)
192
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Average fuel consumption screen:
Driving information screen:
S_308383-W
AVG: Average fuel consumption
S_308085-W
: Journey time
This screen displays the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on the
remaining fuel, so you must immediately
fill the tank when the low fuel warning light
illuminates.
: Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
and journey distance (the distance that
has been driven since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
TPMS screen (except for Canadaspec. models):
Current fuel consumption screen:
S_308086-W
S_308384-W
: Current fuel consumption
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on the
remaining fuel, so you must immediately
fill the tank when the low fuel warning light
illuminates.
This screen displays each tire pressure.
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
and the tire pressure will be displayed on
the screen in yellow.
NOTE
. The tire pressure values are displayed
several minutes after driving.
. You can set the tire pressure units. For
details about setting the units, refer to
“Displays” �P204.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(195,1)
193
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. Once the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the low tire pressure,
the tire pressure values will display in
yellow until the system detects the
normal tire pressure.
. Immediately adjust the tire pressure
when the warning light illuminates.
When the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the adjusted tire pressure, the warning light will turn off and
the tire pressure values will turn to
white.
. For information about the specified
value of the air pressure, refer to
“Tires” �P517.
Navigation screen (if equipped):
Audio screen:
3
S_308088-W
The audio screen shows the status of
audio information. For details about the
audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
DIGITAL SPEED SCREEN
s03bn11
S_308087-W
When the route guidance is set in the
navigation system, this item shows the
navigation route information. For details
about the navigation system, refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
S_308351-W
Speed limit indicator
Vehicle speed
This screen displays the current vehicle
speed.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(196,1)
194
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-7. CENTER INFORMATION
DISPLAY (CID) FEATURES
s03bs
WARNING
Always pay attention to safe driving
when operating the center information
display while the vehicle is in motion.
When operation of the center information display is disturbing your
awareness and ability to concentrate
on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe
place before performing operations on
the display. Also, do not concentrate
on the display while driving. Doing so
could result in an accident.
All information is displayed on the center
information display, including vehicle
settings, vehicle status, navigation system (if equipped) operation and audio
operation.
Items
Page
Maintenance information
209
Rear view camera
362
Surround View Monitor*
353
Navigation system*
Refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
Audio/telephone
Refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
EyeSight
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
EyeSight system.
. The language and units for both the
center information display and the
instrument cluster display can be
changed. For details, refer to “Displays” �P204.
. The images displayed in this Owner’s
Manual are sample images. The actual image may vary depending on the
region and vehicle specifications.
WELCOME SCREEN AND
GOOD-BYE SCREEN
s03bs02
Welcome screen and Good-bye screen
are motion graphics displayed on the
instrument cluster display and center
information display upon entering and
exiting the vehicle.
Welcome screen
s03bs0201
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed, the welcome screen will appear
for a short time.
NOTE
*: If equipped
The center information display can also
be used to set and initialize the center
information display itself.
NOTE
. When the vehicle is in motion, certain
functions and selections may not be
available.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is shown.
. For a certain period of time after the
welcome screen has once appeared,
it may not appear again even when the
driver’s door is opened and closed.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
Good-bye screen
s03bs0202
The good-bye screen will be displayed
under the following conditions.
. The driver’s door is opened after the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF”
position.
. 1 minute have passed after the ignition
switch is put in the “OFF” position with
the driver’s door closed.
. 1 minute have passed when the
hands-free phone is used after the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF”
position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(197,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. The battery voltage is low when the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF”
position.
195
Swipe
s03bs0403
TOUCH SCREEN OPERATIONS
s03bs04
The center information display has a
touch screen. Operations are performed
by touching the touch screen directly.
3
Touch
s03bs0401
S_308354-W
Quickly move the screen by swiping with
your finger.
NOTE
Swipe operations may not be performed
smoothly in high altitudes.
ON/OFF setting
s03bs0404
S_308352-W
Quickly touch and release once.
Drag
s03bs0402
S_308355-W
ON
OFF
S_308353-W
Touch the screen and move the screen to
the desired position.
Touch
ON.
/
to turn the function OFF or
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(198,1)
196
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Item selecting
s03bs0405
S_308356-W
Touch the preferred setting.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(199,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
197
3-8. CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY
s03bx
3
S_308374-W
Audio icon (Refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.)
Navigation icon*1 (Refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.)
HOME icon (Refer to “HOME Icon”
�P198.)
Information bar (Refer to “Information
Bar” �P198.)
Status bar (Refer to “Status Bar”
�P198 and the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual.)
Voice assistance icon (Refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.)
Main screen (Refer to “Shortcut Icons”
�P199.)
Driver profile icon (Refer to “Driver
Profile Icon” �P198.)
Setting icon (Refer to “Setting”
�P200.)
Phone icon (Refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.)
*1: if equipped
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(200,1)
198
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
HOME ICON
s03bx01
. Touch the clock on the screen to
display the clock setting screen. Refer
to “Clock” �P210.
INFORMATION BAR
s03bx03
S_308357-W
To display the main screen, touch
(HOME).
Swipe right/left on the main screen to
change the widget screen, apps screen,
and calm screen. For details, refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE AND
CLOCK
s03bx02
The outside temperature and clock are
displayed on the main screen or status
bar.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the
temperature may not be indicated
correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. You can set the temperature units to
be displayed in Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C). For details, refer to
“Displays” �P204.
S_308358-W
Information such as active features is
shown on the information bar. For some
functions, touching the display shows the
operation menu.
STATUS BAR
s03bw02
The outside temperature, clock and status icon are displayed on the status bar.
For details, refer to “Outside Temperature
and Clock” �P198 and the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
DRIVER PROFILE ICON
s03bx07
S_308375-W
Touch
to confirm the driver profile and
manage devices.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(201,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
199
SHORTCUT ICONS
Driver profile
s03bx05
s03bx0701
Touch the driver profile screen to register
user. For details, refer to “Distraction
Mitigation System” �P389.
Manage devices
s03bx0702
Touch the manage devices screen to pair
your vehicle’ system with a device that
uses Apple CarPlay or a similar application. For details, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
HOW TO CHANGE THE
SCREEN SETTINGS
S_308487-W
s03bx06
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the center information display.
Brightness/Contrast
1. Touch (Settings).
2. ? “Displays”
3. ? “Brightness/Contrast”
3
s03bx0601
This Owner’s Manual includes explanations of the vehicle settings.
To access the shortcut icons, touch
(HOME) and then swipe to select the
apps screen.
For details about the following menu,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
. Apple CarPlay
. Phone
. Add Shortcut
For details about the following menu,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for MySubaru Connected Services.
. MySubaru
Valet mode icon
s03bx0501
For details, refer to “Valet Mode” �P211.
S_308359-W
4. Adjust the brightness and contrast by
dragging or touching +/−.
NOTE
“Brightness Adjustment” can only be
adjusted when “Brightness Dial Control”
is off. Refer to “Displays” �P204.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(202,1)
200
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SETTING
Display Off icon
s03bx0502
Activation of the display off mode:
Touch “Display Off”.
s03bx08
This Owner’s Manual includes explanations of the vehicle settings.
To access the settings menu, touch
(Settings).
S_308360-W
Deactivation of the display off mode:
Press and hold the volume knob to turn
the screen back on.
S_308362-W
For details about the following menu,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
. Manage Devices
. Phone
. Voice Assistance
. Network Connection
. Software
Sound
s03bx0801
S_308361-W
Configure the sound settings of the audio/
navigation system and the warning alerts.
1. Touch (Settings).
2. ? “Sound”
3. Select the preferred menu.
S_308363-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(203,1)
201
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your
personal requirements.
Item
1st menu
2nd menu
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
3rd menu
Equalizer
—
Setting and adjustment of the equalizer
*1
Balance and Fade
—
Setting and adjustment of the Balance
and Fade
*1
Navigation Guidance Volume*3
—
Setting and adjustment of the navigation guidance volume
*1
System Notification
Volume*3
—
Setting and adjustment of the system
notification volume
*1
Touchscreen Beep
—
ON/OFF
*1
Touchscreen Beep
Volume
—
Setting and adjustment of the beep
sound volume
*1
Safety Warning Volume
—
High/Mid/Low
Ringtone Volume
—
Setting and adjustment of the ringtone
volume
*1
Caller Voice Volume
—
Setting and adjustment of the caller
voice volume
*1
In-Call Voice Volume
—
Setting and adjustment of the in-call
voice volume
*1
Voice Assistance
Volume
—
Setting and adjustment of the voice
assistance volume
*1
Harmonizer*3
—
—
Select to enable/
disable the function.
*1
Speed Volume
Control*3
—
—
High/Mid/Low/Off
*1
Volume Level Memory
—
—
ON/OFF
*1
Equalizer/Balance
and Fade
Volume Controls
3
372, 386 and *2
*1: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and
navigation system.
*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
*3: if equipped
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(204,1)
202
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Profiles
s03bx0802
Register, edit and switch driver profiles.
For details, refer to “Using the Distraction
Mitigation System” �P398.
EyeSight/Driving Assistance
s03bx0803
Perform the EyeSight system setting and
driving assistance function setting.
1. Touch (Settings).
2. ? “EyeSight/Driving Assistance”
3. Select the preferred menu.
S_308364-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(205,1)
203
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your
personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
1st menu
Proactive Driver
Assist
3rd menu
Acceleration Override Assist
—
ON/OFF
*1
Brake and Warning
ON/OFF
*1
Warning Timing
Far/Normal/Near
*1
Warning
ON/OFF
*1
Pre-Collision Braking
Proximity Warning
Collision Avoidance Detection
Lane Departure
Cruise Management
Camera
Other Safety/Assistance Controls
Left/Right Driving
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
2nd menu
Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)/Rear Cross
Traffic Warning
(RCTW)
—
ON/OFF
374
Emergency Lane
Keeping Assist
—
ON/OFF
*1
Lane Departure
Prevention
—
ON/OFF
*1
Lane Departure
Warning
—
ON/OFF
*1
Warning Timing
—
Normal/Delayed
*1
Driving Mode
Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic
*1
Forward Vehicle
Alert
ON/OFF
*1
Pre-curve Speed
Control*2
ON/OFF
*1
Steering Angle
Guides
—
ON/OFF
365 and 356
Camera Off Delay
—
ON/OFF
363 and 354
Forward Vehicle
Movement
—
ON/OFF
*1
EyeSight Assist
Monitor
—
ON/OFF
*1
Rest Suggestions*2
—
ON/OFF
*1
—
—
Right Side/Left Side
*1
Cruise Control
*1: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
*2: if equipped
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(206,1)
204
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Displays
s03bx0804
Configure the center information display
setting and instrument cluster setting.
1. Touch (Settings).
2. ? “Displays”
3. Select the preferred menu.
S_308365-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(207,1)
205
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your
personal requirements.
Item
1st menu
Display Off
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
—
Turn the screen off.
200
—
ON/OFF
—
Set and adjust the
brightness of the
display.
Contrast Adjustment
—
Set and adjust the
contrast of the display.
Home Screen Settings
—
Edit the shortcut
icon on the home
screen.
*1
Header options
—
Outside Temperature/Clock, Compass/Clock*2, None
189
Display Mode
—
Classic/Map*2/
EyeSight/Calm
188
Route Guidance
Alerts
—
ON/OFF
*1
Measurement
—
mi, mph, Gallons/
km, km/h, Liters
Temperature
—
°C/°F
198
Tire Pressure*2
—
PSI/kPa
191
—
English/Français/
Español
2nd menu
3rd menu
—
Brightness Dial
Control
Brightness AdjustBrightness/Contrast ment
Center Screen
Instrument Cluster
Units
Language
—
3
161 and 199
158 and 185
185 and 194
*1: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and
navigation system.
*2: if equipped
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(208,1)
206
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Vehicle
s03bx0805
Configure the vehicle setting.
1. Touch (Settings).
2. ? “Vehicle”
3. Select the preferred menu.
S_308366-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(209,1)
207
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your
personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
1st menu
2nd menu
3rd menu
Automatic Vehicle
Shut Down
—
—
ON/OFF
Distraction Mitigation System
—
ON/OFF
User Recognition
—
ON/OFF
Auto Retract Driver
Seat*1
—
ON/OFF
Seat and Mirror Position*1
—
Reregister the driver’s position.
Interior Light Timing
—
30 seconds/20 seconds/10 seconds/
Off
Approach Duration
90 seconds/60 seconds/30 seconds/
Off
Departure Duration
90 seconds/60 seconds/30 seconds/
Off
Daylight Sensitivity
High/Medium/Low/
Minimal
213
Distraction Mitigation System
3
389
276
214
Welcome Lighting
Lighting
312
Auto Headlights
Wiper Sync
ON/OFF
213
Steering Responsive Headlights
(SRH)
—
ON/OFF
219
Alert Sound
—
ON/OFF
128 and 131
Hazard Flashers
—
ON/OFF
128 and 131
Door Unlock
—
Driver Door Only/All
122
Rear Gate/Trunk
Unlock
—
Rear Gate/Trunk
Only, All
122
Rear Window Defogger
—
—
Continuous/15 minutes
226
One-Touch Lane
Change
—
—
ON/OFF
221
Lock Behavior
—
Shift from Park/Vehicle Speed/Off
—
Driver Door Open/
Ignition Off/Shift into
Park/Off
134
Unlock Behavior
—
ON/OFF
67
Keyless Entry
Auto Door Locks
Rear Seat Reminder
—
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(210,1)
208
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Item
Available settings
1st menu
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
2nd menu
3rd menu
Automatic Folding*1
—
ON/OFF
247
Reverse Tilt*1
—
ON/OFF
246
—
ON/OFF
146
Side Mirrors*1
Power Rear Gate
Height Memory
—
*1: if equipped
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(211,1)
209
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3. ?
Time/date
or
s03bx0806
Set and adjust the time and date. For
details, refer to “Clock” �P210.
Maintenance
s03bx0807
You can set maintenance reminders.
1. Touch (Settings).
2. ? “Maintenance”
3. Select the preferred menu.
3
S_308368-W
4. ? “Set”
Setting the Interval Distance for the
maintenance reminder:
1. Touch “Oil Change” or “Tire Rotation”
on the 2nd menu in the “Maintenance”.
2. ? “Interval Distance”
3. ? Enter the interval distance.
S_308367-W
Maintenance Reminders ON/OFF
setting:
Touch the changing menu and select OFF
or ON
.
When “Maintenance Reminders” is illuminated, the maintenance items can be
set.
Setting the Next Service Date for a
maintenance reminder:
1. Touch “Oil Change” or “Tire Rotation”
on the 2nd menu in the “Maintenance”.
2. ? “Next Service Date”
S_308369-W
4. ? “Set”
NOTE
Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.
Valet mode
s03bx0808
For details, refer to “Valet Mode” �P211.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(212,1)
210
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-9. CLOCK
s03af
For models with a genuine SUBARU
navigation and/or audio system, the clock
can be adjusted using either auto mode or
manual mode.
SETTING THE CLOCK MANUALLY
s03af03
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (Settings).
3. ?
“Time/Date”
S_308402-W
5. ?
or
6. ? “Apply”
NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be
displayed by touching the clock on the
status bar.
SETTING THE CLOCK AUTOMATICALLY
s03af02
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (Settings).
3. ?
“Time/Date”
4. Models with navigation system:
? Select “Set Automatically” to ON
.
Models with MySubaru Connected
Services without navigation system:
? Select “Set Automatically” to ON
.
Models without MySubaru Connected
Services or navigation system:
? Select “Sync with Phone” to ON
.
4. Models with navigation system:
? Select “Set Automatically” to OFF
.
Models with MySubaru Connected
Services without navigation system:
? Select “Set Automatically” to OFF
.
Models without MySubaru Connected
Services or navigation system:
? Select “Sync with Phone” to OFF
.
S_308404-W
Models with navigation system:
The clock will be set automatically where
a GPS signal is available.
S_308403-W
Models with MySubaru Connected
Services without navigation system:
The clock will be set automatically where
a DCM (Data Communication Module in
vehicle cellular connection) signal is
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(213,1)
211
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
available.
3-10. VALET MODE
Models without MySubaru Connected
Services or navigation system:
The clock will be set and adjusted
automatically when a smartphone is
connected via Bluetooth®.
Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
When leaving your vehicle with a valet
service, such as at a hotel or restaurant,
you can set the valet mode, which
disables the navigation, audio, and vehicle setting functions.
s03bt
ACTIVATION OF VALET MODE
s03bt01
1. Touch “Valet Mode”.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smartphone,
the settings of the connected smartphone
may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or
other models, notification settings may
need to be activated.) For details, check
the instructions on connecting smartphones.
SETTING 12-HOUR DISPLAY/
24-HOUR DISPLAY
S_308405-W
s03af08
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (Settings).
3. ?
“Time/Date”
4. ? Select “24-Hour Clock” to 24-hour
display
or 12-hour display
.
2. ? “Activate Valet Mode”
3. Enter the passcode.
S_308406-W
4. Touch “Activate”.
When the valet mode is activated, “Valet
Mode Active” is indicated on the information bar.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(214,1)
212
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
DEACTIVATION OF VALET
MODE
s03bt02
1. Touch the information bar.
3-11. LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
s03ah
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
S_308407-W
2. Enter the passcode.
3. Touch “Deactivate”.
4. ? “Continue”
CHANGE THE PASSCODE
1. Touch “Valet Mode”.
2. ? “Change Passcode”
3. Enter the current passcode.
4. Touch “Change”.
5. Enter the new passcode.
6. Touch “Set”.
s03bt03
NOTE
If you enter the passcode incorrectly
three times in a row when setting or
canceling valet mode, a message
prompting you to contact a SUBARU
dealer will be displayed, but it is still
possible to enter the passcode even after
the fourth attempt.
If you have forgotten your passcode,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch is
turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a long
time with the light control switch set
to a position other than the off
position, even though the lights will
turn off after 10 minutes, the
battery may be discharged.
The light control switch operates when
the push-button ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
NOTE
The light control switch can be operated
(except auto on/off headlights) even
when the push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform the
driver that the lights are illuminated.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(215,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
HEADLIGHTS
s03ah01
213
“AUTO” position:
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side
marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail
lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the
level of the ambient light.
NOTE
S_307636-W
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the light control switch.
“OFF” position (except for Canadaspec. models):
The headlights are all off.
Only when the following conditions are
fulfilled, instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail
lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level
of the ambient light.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
“OFF” position (Canada-spec. models):
The headlights are all off.*1*2
*1: When the light switch is switched to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,
the lights turn off. Then the light switch will
automatically return to the “AUTO” position.
*2: The headlights will automatically change to
the AUTO mode when the following conditions are met:
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The select lever is in a position other than
. If the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights do
not turn on when it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the “ ”
position. If this happens, have your
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. The light sensitivity of the auto on/off
headlights can be changed by operating the center information display.
For details, refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
Also, the setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
“ ” position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights,
rear side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are on.
Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
s03ah0106
While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will
automatically turn on when the windshield wipers operate several times. The
headlights will automatically turn off approximately 1 minute after the wiper
stops.
the “P” position.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(216,1)
214
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The ON/OFF setting of this function can
be changed by operating the center
information display. Refer to “Vehicle”
�P206.
Also, the setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
Welcome lighting function
s03ah0103
The welcome lighting function turns on
the low beam headlight for smooth
approaching to or exiting from the vehicle
at night or in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position.
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights.
NOTE
If the engine is turned off after turning off
the light switch, the welcome lighting
function may not operate (for Canada
models).
When approaching:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
automatically illuminate when unlocking
the doors by using the remote keyless
entry system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam headlights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
When exiting:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when either of
the following operation is done.
. The push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
The low beam headlights will turn off
under any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by
the welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the
door is opened and closed.*1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which
the low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can
change the setting by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
Battery drainage reduction
function
s03ah0107
When the headlights are illuminated and
the push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position, the battery drainage
reduction function will be active.
When the battery drainage reduction
function is active, the following system
operations help reduce the risk of battery
discharge.
. The headlights turn off automatically
after 10 minutes.
. When you open or close the door or
operate the light control switch, the
headlights will turn off automatically
10 minutes later.
NOTE
. When you leave the vehicle, put the
light control switch in the “OFF” position to prevent battery discharge.
. When you open or close the door or
operate the light control switch after
the headlights turn off automatically,
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(217,1)
215
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the headlights will turn on again.
Sensor for the auto on/off
headlights
s03ah0101
lever rearward and releasing it will switch
the headlights to low beam.
When the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, pushing the lever forward turns the High Beam Assist is on.
Refer to “High Beam Assist Function”
�P215.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
instrument cluster also illuminates.
HEADLIGHT FLASHER
s03ah03
S_308370-W
The location of the sensor is shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect the
level of the ambient light correctly and
the auto on/off headlights may not
operate properly.
S_307639-MW
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
HIGH/LOW BEAM CHANGE
(Dimmer)
s03ah02
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the off
position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
instrument cluster also illuminates.
S_307638-MW
While the light control switch is in the “ ”
or “AUTO” position in a dark place, the
headlights will turn on.
Pushing the lever forward and releasing it
will activate the high beam. Pulling the
HIGH BEAM ASSIST FUNCTION
s03ah07
The high beam assist function automatically changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(218,1)
216
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
When all of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to high
beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to
or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is
dark.
. The road does not have a sharp curve.
When any of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to low
beam.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle
is bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle.
. When the EyeSight system is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped.
How to use the high beam assist
function
NOTE
When the high beam assist function is
activated, the high beam assist indicator
on the instrument cluster will illuminate.
. Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility to
understand the surrounding situation,
to drive safely, and to change the
headlight mode manually if necessary.
. The high beam assist function utilizes
the stereo camera installed at the
position of the front map lights.
. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
. The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as “operational”.
This setting can be changed to OFF
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
s03ah0701
The high beam assist function will be
activated when all the following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam
headlights are on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
S_308072-W
NOTE
If the high beam assist function is
malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped,
the headlight will be fixed at low beam.
How to temporarily lower the
sensitivity of the high beam
assist function
s03ah0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by using the
following operations.
1. After turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control
switch to the “AUTO” position and
push the signal lever forward (high
beam position).
2. After the high beam assist indicator on
the instrument cluster illuminates, turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(219,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15
seconds, press the “ / ” (following
distance setting) switch more than 10
times consecutively.
217
tail lights and license plate lights will
turn on.
Tips for the high beam assist
system
s03ah0703
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam
assist indicator “
” on the instrument
cluster display will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function cannot be lowered in the
following conditions.
– Cruise control indicator is illuminated.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow) is illuminated.
. The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function returns to normal level the
next time the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position and the engine is
restarted.
How to change the headlight
mode manually
s03ah0702
Change to the low beam:
. Set the light control switch to “ ”.
. Pull the lever while the high beam is
turning on and release it.
Change to the high beam:
Push the lever forward and release it.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
. After manually changing the headlight
mode to the high beam, if you turn on
the high beam assist function, push
the lever forward and release it.
. When manually changing the headlight mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “
”
position, the parking lights, front side
marker lights, rear side marker lights,
. The high beam assist function recognizes the condition surrounding the
vehicle based on the brightness of
illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc.
Therefore, the headlight mode may
switch in some situations that do not
match to the driver’s sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
. Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination
may not be detected correctly and the
high beam assist function may not
work properly. As a result, the glare of
the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also,
the low beam mode may continue
although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such
cases, change the headlight mode
manually.
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– When the windshield glass is dirty
or fogged.
– When the windshield is cracked or
damaged.
– If there are lights similar to the
headlights or the tail lights in the
surrounding area.
– When an oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is driven without its
headlights and tail lights on.
– If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if
the light beams are not aimed
correctly.
– When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving.
– When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(220,1)
218
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
– When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly.
– When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty.
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or
is being towed.
– When the stereo camera is deformed or the stereo camera
lenses are dirty.
– Immediately after the engine has
started.
. In the following conditions, the headlight mode will not be automatically
changed from the high beam to the
low beam.
– When your vehicle passes an
oncoming vehicle suddenly in a
blind curve.
– When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle.
– When an oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead comes in and out of
view because of continuous
curves, median strips, roadside
trees, etc.
. If the stereo camera detects the light
of the front fog lights of an oncoming
vehicle, the headlight mode may
change from the high beam to the low
beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the
low beam mode may continue, when
affected by a street light, traffic signal,
illumination of an advertisement
board, or a reflective object such as a
road sign and signboard.
. The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
– Color or brightness of the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the
tail lights of a vehicle ahead.
– The headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of the
vehicle ahead are covered with
mud, snow, etc.
– Movement and direction of an
oncoming vehicle or a vehicle
ahead.
– When the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a
vehicle ahead illuminate on only
one side.
– When the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
road surface, etc.).
– Number of passengers and weight
of loaded cargo.
– Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT
SYSTEM
s03ah04
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are
illuminated, the tail lights do not
illuminate. When it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the “ ”
position to illuminate the headlights
and tail lights. This will improve visibility and allow other drivers to see your
vehicle more easily.
The daytime running lights will automatically illuminate when the following conditions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,
“
” or “OFF”.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(221,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “
”
position, the instrument panel illumination, front side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are also illuminated.
219
3-12. STEERING RESPONSIVE HEADLIGHT (SRH)
s03bl
3
S_307918-MW
The target area of illumination when
SRH is activated
The target area of illumination when
SRH is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically
moves the headlight beam to the left or
right in accordance with the steering
angle and vehicle speed. This function
helps to improve the visibility at night by
illuminating the road ahead at corners
and intersections.
You can turn the SRH function on or off.
The settings can be changed by using the
center information display. Refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
S_308077-W
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF
indicator light
The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF
indicator light on the instrument cluster
display turns off when SRH is turned on.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(222,1)
220
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF
indicator light on the instrument cluster
display illuminates when SRH is turned
off.
S_308078-W
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light
If SRH is malfunctioning, the Steering
Responsive Headlight warning light on
the instrument cluster display illuminates
and a message appears on the warning
screen when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. It indicates that SRH has
been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
. The SRH function operative/non-operative status is kept when the engine
is turned off, even if the engine is
restarted.
. When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light
will illuminate and turn off after several
seconds.
. SRH only activates when the vehicle is
traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more.
3-13. FRONT FOG LIGHT
SWITCH
s03ba
S_307921-W
Headlight switch
Fog light switch
To turn on the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch to the “ ”
position while the headlights are in either
of the following conditions.
. The headlight switch is in the “ ”
position with the low beam mode
selected.
. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights
turn on automatically.
To turn off the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch back down to the
“OFF” position.
S_308079-W
The front fog light indicator light located
on the instrument cluster will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(223,1)
221
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-14. TURN SIGNAL LEVER
3-15. WIPER AND WASHER
s03ai
s03am
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the windshield
is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze
on the windshield, blocking your view.
CAUTION
S_307922-MW
Right turn
Lane change right signal
Lane change left signal
Left turn
If the lever does not return after cornering,
return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.
ONE-TOUCH LANE CHANGER
s03ai01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational setting
of the one-touch lane changer can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
The setting can also be changed by
operating the center information display.
Refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
. Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid tank
is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry. This may scratch
the glass, damage the blade rubbers and might cause the wiper
motor to fail. Before operating the
wiper on a dry windshield, always
use the windshield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blade rubbers frozen to the
window glass could cause not only
the blade rubbers to be damaged
but also might cause the wiper
motor to fail. If the blade rubbers
are frozen to the window glass, be
sure to operate the defroster,
windshield wiper deicer or rear
window defogger before turning on
the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during operation
because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to fail
even if the wiper switch is turned
off. If this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe location, turn the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(224,1)
222
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ignition switch to the “OFF” position
and clean the window glass to
allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield Washer Fluid”
�P495.
.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper
blades.
.
. Do not clean the wiper blades with
gasoline or a solvent, such as paint
thinner or benzine. This will cause
deterioration of the wiper blades.
. When the wiper switch is in the
“AUTO” position, do not touch the
windshield near the rain sensor
and do not place a wet cloth on the
windshield near the rain sensor.
Doing so may result in unexpected
wiper operation and cause injury.
. When washing the vehicle, make
sure that the wiper is turned off.
Otherwise, the wipers may operate
unexpectedly and cause injury.
. When having your vehicle washed
in an automatic car wash, make
sure that the wiper is turned off.
Otherwise, the wipers may be
damaged because they may operate unexpectedly and car wash
brushes could become tangled
around them.
.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy
load, the circuit breaker may trip to
stop the motor temporarily. If this
happens, park your vehicle in a safe
location, turn off the wiper switch, and
.
wait for approximately 10 minutes.
The circuit breaker will reset itself, and
the wipers will again operate normally.
Clean your blade rubbers and window
glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the
wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield and
rear window using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mildabrasive cleaner. Do not, however,
use detergent to clean the blade
rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft
cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild
abrasive cleaner) when you clean the
blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber
of the blade strongly, the black coating
component will peel off, which will
cause the wiper to judder. Also, after
wiping it off, check that the rubber has
not come loose. After cleaning the
window glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean
water. Rinse the window until the
water does not form beads on the
glass. This indicates that the glass is
clean.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades (or blade
rubbers) with new ones. For replacement instructions, refer to “Replacement of Wiper Blades” �P496.
When the wiper switch is turned to the
“AUTO” position while the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position, the
wipers will operate once. This indicates that the wiper switch is in the
“AUTO” position.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(225,1)
223
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. When the wiper switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the following situations may occur.
– The wipers may operate if the rain
sensor or the windshield is vibrated
or objects such as insects, dirt,
mud, etc. are covering them. Turn
off the wiper unless it is raining or
snowing.
– The wipers do not operate if the
rain sensor does not detect rain or
snow. If necessary, push the wiper
control lever down to the low speed
position or high speed position.
– The wipers may not operate properly if the rain sensor does not
detect the amount of raindrops
because a water-repellent coating,
dirt, or ice is on the upper half of the
windshield.
– The rain sensor may be malfunctioning if the wiper intermittent
operation does not vary depending
on the amount of rainfall. If necessary, turn the wiper switch to any
position except the “AUTO” position. We recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer and
have the system inspected as soon
as possible.
– The wipers stop operation if the
ambient temperature decreases to
5°F (−15°C) or lower. The wipers
resume operation when the ambient temperature increases to 14°F
(−10°C) or higher. If you need to
operate the wipers under 5°F
(−15°C), push the wiper control
lever down to the low speed position or high speed position.
– The wipers may not operate if the
temperature around the rain sensor is more than 176°F (80°C)
because the system cannot detect
the amount of raindrops under
these temperatures.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCHES
s03am01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
Windshield wipers
s03am0101
3
S_307701-W
:
OFF
:
/AUTO :
Mist (for a single wipe)
Off
Intermittent/Automatic operation
:
Low speed
:
High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
NOTE
. The automatic adjusting mode of the
wiper timing can be changed from the
rain-sensing mode to the vehicle
speed interlocking mode. The setting
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. While the intermittent wiper is in
operation, if the vehicle is started, the
wiper will operate once.
. If the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the wipers do not operate
when it rains, or the wiper switch is in
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 7/ 24
(226,1)
224
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the “Low speed” position and the
wipers do not operate, turn the wiper
switch to the “High speed” position. In
this case, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Wiper intermittent time control
(models without automatic rain
sensing windshield wipers)
s03am0103
S_308489-W
The rain sensor is on the windshield
glass.
S_307649-W
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the
operating interval of the wiper. The
operating interval can be adjusted in
several steps from the shortest interval to
the longest.
Automatic operation (models
with automatic rain sensing
windshield wipers)
S_307795-W
Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of the
rain sensor for wiper control. Turn the dial
downward to increase the sensitivity.
Turn the dial upward to decrease the
sensitivity.
s03am0107
With the wiper switch in the “AUTO”
position, the wipers operate automatically
when the rain sensor detects falling rain.
The wiper timing is automatically adjusted
depending on the amount of rain.
NOTE
When the wiper control lever is in the
“AUTO” position, if you turn the dial
downward, the wipers will operate once to
inform you that the sensor sensitivity has
been increased.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 7/ 24
(227,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
225
Windshield washer
s03am0104
3
S_307652-W
S_307650-W
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
NOTE
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
OFF: Off
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
Rear wiper
s03am0201
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the “OFF” position.
S_308080-W
The windshield washer fluid warning light
appears when the washer fluid level in the
tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the
warning light appears, refill the tank with
fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to
“Windshield Washer Fluid” �P495.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
s03am02
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
With the switch turned to the “
”
position, the rear wiper will operate
intermittently at intervals corresponding
to the vehicle speed. In this position,
when you move the select lever to the “R”
position, the rear wiper will switch to
continuous operation. When you move
the select lever from the “R” (reverse)
position to another position, the rear
wiper will return to intermittent operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the
“OFF” position, if the front windshield
wiper is operating continuously, the rear
wiper will operate intermittently when you
move the select lever to the “R” (reverse)
position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
. Except for Canada and Mexico: Nonoperation
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(228,1)
226
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. For Canada and Mexico: Operation
This setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
3-16. DEFOGGER AND DEICER
s03bi
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
gate. Doing so may damage the rear
wiper when it operates.
Washer
s03am0202
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the “ ” position. The
washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.
The rear view camera washer also
operates while the rear window washer is
operating.
NOTE
S_308478-W
Rear window defogger and rear wiper
deicer
Outside mirror defogger
Windshield wiper deicer
The defogger and deicer system is
activated only when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
S_308080-W
The windshield washer fluid warning light
appears when the washer fluid level in the
tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the
warning light appears, refill the tank with
fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to
“Windshield Washer Fluid” �P495.
S_308371-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(229,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the defogger button. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are
activated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the defogger button illuminates
while the defogger and deicer system is
activated.
To turn them off, press the defogger
button again. They also turn off when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and
outside mirrors have been cleared and
the windshield wiper blade rubbers have
been deiced completely before that time,
press the defogger button to turn them off.
If defrosting, defogging or deicing is not
complete, you have to press the defogger
button to turn them on again.
227
remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effectively.
. While the defogger and deicer system
is in the continuous operation mode:
– If the vehicle speed remains at 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer system automatically stops
operating. However, the rear window defogger system and outside
mirror defogger system maintain
continuous operation in this condition.
– If the vehicle battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger
system and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating.
. When the vehicle battery power is low,
the defogger will stop. Start the engine
to use the defogger.
It is possible to set the defogger and
deicer system for the continuous operation mode by operating the center information display. For details, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on
the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with snow,
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(230,1)
228
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-17. MIRRORS
s03ap
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
INSIDE MIRROR (without AutoDimming Function) (If
Equipped)
s03ap08
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare
from vehicle headlights behind you and
automatically dims to eliminate the glare
and preserve your vision.
To Operate the Auto-Dimming
Feature
s03ap1201
Press the “ ” switch to turn the autodimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch’s
green LED indicator is on. The autodimming feature will default to on with
each ignition cycle.
To Operate the Compass Feature
s03ap1202
S_307925-W
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the antiglare position.
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 3 seconds or until the
display turns on/off. The compass
feature will default to on with each
ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive
the vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
Compass calibration zones
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR/
COMPASS (If Equipped)
s03ap12
S_307659-W
S_307926-W
Compass
Switch
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a
zone number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “ ” switch
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(231,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
again until your current location
zone number appears. After you
stop pressing the switch, your
new zone number will be saved.
Within a few seconds, the display
will show a compass direction.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass.
Press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 9 seconds or until a “C”
appears in the display. Once a “C”
appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
229
each ignition cycle.
To Operate the Compass Feature (if equipped)
s03ap0706
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 3 seconds or until the
display turns on/off. The compass
feature will default to on with each
ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive
the vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
Compass calibration zones (U.S.)
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR/
COMPASS WITH HOMELINK® (If
Equipped)
s03ap07
S_307661-W
Compass calibration zones (South America)
S_307927-W
Compass
HomeLink® buttons
Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare
from vehicle headlights behind you and
automatically dims to eliminate the glare
and help preserve your vision.
To Operate the Auto-Dimming
Feature
s03ap0705
Press the “ ” switch to turn the autodimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch’s
green LED indicator is on. The autodimming feature will default to on with
S_307662-W
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a
zone number appears in the display.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(232,1)
230
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “ ” switch
again until your current location
zone number appears. After you
stop pressing the switch, your
new zone number will be saved.
Within a few seconds, the display
will show a compass direction.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass.
Press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 9 seconds or until a “C”
appears in the display. Once a “C”
appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System
s03ap0704
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up
to three hand-held radio frequency remotes used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers,
entry door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. The below steps are
generic programming instructions; for
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink®
website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.
HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink® to
a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object signaling the door to stop
and reverse does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held
remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and
more accurate training.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
or “ACC” position before programming and/or operating HomeLink®.
. Keep the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink® programming.
. For security reasons, when transferring ownership of your vehicle, it
is recommended to delete the
programmed HomeLink® buttons.
Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® buttons” �P233.
Programming a New
HomeLink® button
s03ap0707
1. Press and release the HomeLink®
button that you would like to program.
The HomeLink® indicator light will
flash orange slowly (if not, refer to
“Erasing HomeLink® buttons”
�P233).
. When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink® with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(233,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
231
3
S_307928-W
Indicator Light
HomeLink® buttons
S_307665-W
NOTE
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches
(2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button that you would like to program.
Some devices may require you to replace
this “Programming a New HomeLink®
button” step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. Refer to “Gate Operator/
Canadian Programming” �P233.
4. Press the HomeLink® button that you
would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
S_307929-W
Garage door opener remote
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train better
at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30
cm). Keep this in mind if you have
difficulty with the programming process.
3. While the HomeLink® indicator light is
flashing orange, press and hold the
hand-held remote button. Continue
pressing the hand-held remote button
until the HomeLink® indicator light
changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote button.
S_307930-W
Indicator Light
. If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should
operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed. At this point, if your
device operates, programming is
complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the
HomeLink® button up to three times
to complete the programming process. At this point if your device
operates, programming is com– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(234,1)
232
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
plete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of
the programming instructions.
5. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit (see the device’s
manual to identify this button). The
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the
HomeLink® button up to three times. At
this point programming is complete
and your device should operate when
the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
S_307668-W
8. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
“Garage Door Two-Way Communication” �P233.
S_307931-W
“Learn” button
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete
step 7.
S_307932-W
Status Indicators
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink® information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
For Genie and Sommer garage door
openers please go directly to the
HomeLink® website.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(235,1)
233
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
s03ap0708
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
or garage door opener by using the
programming procedures, replace “Programming a New HomeLink® button” step
3 with the following:
While the HomeLink® indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cycle”) your device’s hand-held remote
every two seconds until the HomeLink®
indicator light changes from orange to
green. You may now release the handheld remote button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink® button” step 4 to complete.
Using HomeLink®
s03ap0709
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
Erasing HomeLink® buttons
s03ap0710
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink® is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with
“Programming a New HomeLink® button”
- step 1.
Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® button
s03ap0711
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink® button can be released at
this point. Proceed with “Programming
a New HomeLink® button” - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it
will revert to the previously stored
programming.
Garage Door Two-Way Communication
s03ap0712
HomeLink® has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink® can receive and display
“closing” or “opening” status messages
from compatible garage door opener
systems. At any time, HomeLink® can
also recall and display the last recorded
status communicated by the garage door
opener to indicate your garage door being
“closed” or “opened”.
HomeLink® has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(236,1)
234
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Range may be reduced by obstacles
such as houses or trees. You may have to
slow your vehicle speed to successfully
receive the garage door opener communication.
Using Two-Way Communication
s03ap0714
Programming Two-Way Communication
s03ap0713
S_307934-W
Status Indicator
S_307933-W
Status Indicators
Within 5 seconds after programming a
new HomeLink® button, both of HomeLink’s garage door status indicators will
flash rapidly green indicating that the
garage door two-way communication has
been enabled. If your garage door status
indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink® by simultaneously pressing HomeLink® buttons 1
and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink® will
display the last recorded status for 3
seconds.
If two-way communication programming
is successful, HomeLink® will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators (see below).
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink® information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
S_307935-W
Garage Door Opener CLOSING
(Blinking Orange)
Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
Garage Door Opener OPENING
(Blinking Orange)
Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(237,1)
235
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SMART REARVIEW MIRROR/
COMPASS WITH HOMELINK® (If
Equipped)
s03ap11
Safety precautions
s03ap1101
WARNING
. Never rely exclusively on the Smart
Rearview Mirror. The Smart Rearview Mirror has blind spots that
must be checked prior to operating
the vehicle. Please exercise caution when using this system.
NOTE
When the moonroof is opened (if
equipped):
If the sunlight is too bright to see the
display of the Smart Rearview Mirror,
close the moonroof (sunshade), or select
the mirror mode.
3
Smart Rearview Mirror
switches
s03ap1102
. Do not disassemble or modify the
main unit, camera or wiring of the
Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is a
strange odor or smoke, stop using
it immediately and we recommend
that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
. Never operate the Smart Rearview
Mirror while driving. Doing so could
result in an accident that causes
serious injury or death.
CAUTION
. Do not put the main unit, camera or
wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror
close to fire. Doing so could result
in a malfunction and fire.
. When the Smart Rearview Mirror
malfunctions, change to the mirror
mode immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU
dealer.
. Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror
for extended period of time may
result in car sickness.
. The display could become hard to
see because of lights (e.g. sunlight
or the headlights of approaching
vehicles) from outside of the vehicle. In this case, change to the
mirror mode if necessary.
S_308176-W
Mode lever
Left button
Center button
Right button
HomeLink buttons
How to use the Smart Rearview
Mirror
s03ap1103
CAUTION
Adjust the rearview mirror before
driving.
1) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror
to the mirror mode.
2) Sit with the correct posture in the
driver’s seat and adjust the mirror
position to see behind.
3) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror
to the display mode.
If you start driving without adjusting
the mirror, light may reflect on the
mirror while selecting the display
mode and it may make it hard to see
the screen.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(238,1)
236
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To adjust the display:
To change the mode:
S_308178-W
S_308177-W
To select the display mode, first adjust
the rearview mirror, then pull the mode
lever towards you.
To select the mirror mode, push the
mode lever away from you.
Select the display mode to show the
image from the camera that is installed on
the rear gate.
Select the mirror mode to use as a normal
mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the
image from the camera is not shown on
the mirror.
NOTE
. It is not possible to use the Smart
Rearview Mirror in the display mode
when the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
or “ACC” position.
. When using the display mode, parts of
the vehicle interior may reflect light on
the display. Adjust the angle of the
Smart Rearview Mirror to avoid unwanted reflection.
Left button
Center button
Right button
Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to display the main menu.
NOTE
. The main menu cannot be displayed
on the display while the select lever is
in a position other than the “P” position.
. If you do not press the adjustment
buttons that are at the bottom of the
Smart Rearview Mirror for 5 seconds,
the adjustment menu will disappear.
Brightness adjustment:
S_308179-W
Setting button: Press the setting button
to set the brightness.
Press this button to decrease the
brightness.
Press this button to increase the
brightness.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(239,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
After pressing the setting button, the
mode will change to the up/down adjustment mode.
Up/down adjustment:
237
Rotation adjustment:
3
S_308182-W
S_308180-W
Setting button: Press the setting button
to set the angle.
Press this button to lower the angle.
Press this button to raise the angle.
After pressing the setting button, the
mode will change to the left/right adjustment mode.
Left/right adjustment:
Setting button: Press the setting button
to set the angle.
Press this button to turn the angle
counterclockwise.
Press this button to turn the angle
clockwise.
After you press the setting button, the
mode will return to the brightness adjustment mode.
Dimming setting:
The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dimming mirror mode. When the mirror mode
is selected with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position, auto dimming will activate.
This mode decreases glare automatically
depending on the brightness level from
behind.
S_308181-W
Setting button: Press the setting button
to set the angle.
Press this button to turn the angle left.
Press this button to turn the angle right.
After pressing the setting button, the
mode will change to the rotation adjustment mode.
S_308178-W
Left button
Center button
Right button
When selecting the mirror mode, press
any of the buttons to display the auto
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(240,1)
238
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
dimming menu. Press the center or right
buttons to turn the dimming mirror mode
ON/OFF.
When the display mode malfunctions
s03ap1106
Dimming mirror mode ON indicator
S_308183-W
S_307712-W
Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator
S_307713-W
When turning the dimming mirror mode
ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/
OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds.
When there is a vehicle communication
error, the warning indicators will appear
as shown in the illustration.
When the warning indicators appear,
operate the mode lever to select the
mirror mode. In such a case, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for repair.
If the mode does not change to the mirror
mode even when operating the mode
lever, the mode lever may have malfunctioned. In such a case, press and hold one
of the left, center, or right buttons for 10
seconds. Then the mode will change to
the mirror mode.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position, auto dimming will
not activate.
. When the display mode is selected,
auto dimming will not activate.
S_308184-W
When there is a camera calibration error,
the warning indicators will appear as
shown in the illustration.
When the warning indicators appear,
operate the mode lever to select the
mirror mode. In such a case, we recom-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(241,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
mend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for repair.
Maintenance
s03ap1104
S_308372-W
Camera
. Make sure to clean the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the
camera regularly. If these parts are not
clean, the screen cannot be seen
clearly.
. Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror
and the area around the camera by
using a dry soft cloth. If the foreign
matter cannot be removed, first wipe
the area off using a wet soft cloth, and
then wipe using a dry cloth.
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
for cleaning. Doing so could result in
discoloration, deterioration, or malfunction.
. Make sure to clean the rear camera
lens regularly. When you clean the
rear camera lens, first soak a soft cloth
with diluted mild detergent to wipe it
off, and wipe using a dry cloth.
. When installing a roof box or a similar
accessory, do not block the area in
front of the camera lens to avoid
interfering with the camera image on
the mirror.
. When the Smart Rearview Mirror’s
visibility is poor because there is dirt or
other foreign material adhering to the
camera, switch to the original rearview
mirror.
239
Tips
s03ap1105
. Do not use the display mode for a long
time while the engine is not running.
Doing so could result in the battery
discharge.
. Do not install radio antennas around
the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio
waves may disturb the Smart Rearview Mirror screen.
. Observe the following instructions.
Not doing so could result in malfunction or the main mirror unit falling off.
– Do not push the button too strongly
or move the lever too forcibly.
– Do not turn the main mirror unit
more than 90 degrees.
– Do not impact the main mirror unit.
– Do not impact the camera or
antenna.
. If the screen is hard to see because of
light, select the mirror mode.
. If LED lights or scattered reflections
are caught in the camera, the screen
may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. If something moves rapidly near the
camera, the display may not be able to
catch the item. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. If the display mode is used, the view of
the rear will be different from the
normal use of the inner mirror or the
mirror mode. Do not rely solely on the
Smart Rearview Mirror; check the rear
visually if necessary. Pay attention to
traffic conditions for safe driving.
. Adjust the brightness of the screen
appropriately. If the screen is too
bright, the driver’s eyes may get tired
while driving.
. The Smart Rearview Mirror sometimes becomes hot. However, this is
not a malfunction.
. In the following cases, the color may
not be clear. However, this is not a
malfunction.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(242,1)
240
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
– The shown items are a very far
distance away.
– The environmental conditions are
very dark.
Compass calibration:
If the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass.
To operate the compass feature
s03ap1107
S_308186-W
S_308178-W
Left button
Center button
Right button
1. Select “CALIBRATE” using the right
button.
2. To start the compass calibration, press
the center button.
3. Select “Continue” using the center
button.
Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to display the main menu. Select
compass mode using the left button.
NOTE
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
To turn the compass feature on/off:
S_308187-W
4. Select your current location in the
display using the left button.
5. Select “Continue” using the center
button.
6. Once “C” appears in the display,
slowly drive the vehicle in circles until
compass is calibrated.
S_308185-W
Compass
Select “ON” or “OFF” using the center
button.
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System
s03ap1108
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up
to three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(243,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
gate operators, garage door openers,
entry door locks, security systems, and
even home lighting. The below steps are
generic programming instructions; for
Genie and Sommer garage door openers, please go directly to the HomeLink
website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
241
sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink buttons”.
HomeLink set up:
3
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink to
a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features,
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object signaling the door to stop
and reverse does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
S_308188-W
HomeLink buttons
Left button
Center button
Right button
Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to display the main menu. Select
HomeLink menu using the left button or
press any of the HomeLink buttons.
NOTE
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held
remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and
more accurate training.
. Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
“ON” or “ACC” position for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink.
. Keep the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink programming. It
is also suggested that upon the
S_308189-W
1. Select “SET UP” using the right
button.
2. Select “Continue” using the HomeLink
left button.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(244,1)
242
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3. Press any of the HomeLink buttons.
4. Be sure to read the displayed instructions.
Select “Continue” using the HomeLink
left button.
5. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 2 in (5 cm)
away from the mirror.
S_308191-W
9. “Program Success”:
If the programmed HomeLink button
works, select “Yes” and programming
is completed.
If the programmed HomeLink button
does not work, select “No” and proceed to step 10.
S_308190-W
Garage door opener remote
6. While the HomeLink programming
instructions are displayed, press and
hold the hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train better
at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm).
Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with
the programming process.
S_308192-W
7. Be sure your garage door is not
moving, then press OK.
8. Firmly press the HomeLink left button
3 times.
At this point, your device should
operate when the HomeLink button is
pressed and released.
S_307931-W
“Learn” button
10.At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.
This can usually be found where the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(245,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit (see the device’s
manual to identify this button). The
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
11. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete
step 12.
12.Return to the vehicle and press the
HomeLink left button.
13.Firmly press the HomeLink left button
3 times.
At this point, your device should
operate when the HomeLink button is
pressed and released.
14.“Program Success”:
If the programmed HomeLink button
works, select “Yes” and programming
is completed.
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
For Genie and Sommer garage door
openers, please go directly to the
HomeLink website.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming:
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough
for HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.
243
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
or garage door opener by using the
programming procedures, replace “Programming a New HomeLink Button” step
3 with the following:
While the HomeLink indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cycle”) your device’s hand-held remote
every two seconds until the HomeLink
indicator light changes from orange to
green. You may now release the handheld remote button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
Using HomeLink:
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons:
1. Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to select the main menu.
Select HomeLink menu using the left
button.
2. Select “SET UP” using the right
button.
3. Select “Continue” using the HomeLink
left button.
4. Select the “Trash can icon” using the
HomeLink left button.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(246,1)
244
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Programming Two-Way Communication:
S_308194-W
5. To erase the program for the
HomeLink button, select “Clear” using
the HomeLink center button.
HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with
“Programming a new HomeLink button” step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button:
To program a previously programmed
HomeLink button, refer to “HomeLink set
up”.
Garage Door Two-Way Communication:
HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink can receive and display “closing” or “opening” status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink can also recall and
display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to
indicate your garage door being “closed”
or “opened”.
HomeLink has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Range may be reduced by obstacles
such as houses or trees. You may have to
slow your vehicle speed to successfully
receive the garage door opener communication.
S_308195-W
Status Indicators
Within five seconds after programming a
new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s garage door status indicators will
flash rapidly green indicating that the
garage door two-way communication has
been enabled. If your garage door status
indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru
and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
Using Two-Way Communication:
S_308196-W
Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to display the main menu. Select
HomeLink menu using the left button.
Select “STATUS” using the center button.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(247,1)
245
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Language
NOTE
s03ap1109
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
3
S_308198-W
S_308195-W
Status Indicators
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink. HomeLink
will display the last recorded status for 5
seconds.
Changes the language displayed in the
Smart Rearview Mirror.
1. Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to display the main menu.
Select “LANGUAGE” using the left
button.
2. Select the language using the right
button and press the center button.
NOTE
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
s03ap03
Convex mirror (passenger side)
s03ap0301
WARNING
S_307935-W
Garage Door Opener CLOSING
(Blinking Orange)
Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
Garage Door Opener OPENING
(Blinking Orange)
Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
convex mirror to judge the distance of
vehicles behind you when changing
lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance
backwards) to determine the actual
size and distance of objects that you
view in convex mirror.
If two-way communication programming
is successful, HomeLink will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(248,1)
246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAUTION
Make sure to adjust the mirrors before
driving.
Remote control mirror switch
s03ap0302
“Driver’s Seat Memory Function”
�P41.
. The outside mirror angle can also be
retrieved with the Distraction Mitigation System user information. To do
so, perform user registration in the
Distraction Mitigation System settings. Refer to “Using the Distraction
Mitigation System” �P398.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if
equipped)
s03ap0306
S_307944-MW
Select side to adjust
Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left
mirror, “R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional operation.
NOTE
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
For models with memory function:
. The outside mirror can be adjusted for
approximately 45 seconds after the
following conditions are met.
– The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
– The door is unlocked using the
access key fob.
. The outside mirror angle can be
registered with button “1”, “2” or each
of the key fobs. For details, refer to
When backing the vehicle up, the right
and/or left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear
visibility.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Move the select lever to the R (Reverse) position.
3. The outside mirror angle moves
downward.
The outside mirror angle will return to its
original position when the following condition are met.
. Approximately 9 seconds after the
select lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
. The vehicle is running.
NOTE
. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can
be registered with button “1”, “2” or
each of the key fobs. For details, refer
to “Driver’s Seat Memory Function”
�P41.
. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can
also be retrieved with the Distraction
Mitigation System user information. To
do so, perform user registration in the
Distraction Mitigation System settings. Refer to “Using the Distraction
Mitigation System” �P398.
. The operational/non-operational
setting can be changed by operating
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(249,1)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the center information display. Refer
to “Vehicle” �P206.
. The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as the front passenger’s side mirror. The setting of
driver’s side mirror operation can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal during the
reverse tilt-down mirror angle adjustment.
247
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as “non-operational”. This setting can be changed to
“operational” at SUBARU dealers. For
more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. If the hold last position function setting
is “non-operation”, the reverse tiltdown will move to the factory default
position.
Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
s03ap0304
To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror
angle, adjust the outside mirror using the
remote control mirror switch while the
reverse tilt-down operates. For details
about how to adjust the outside mirror
angle, refer to “Remote control mirror
switch” �P246.
Memory function:
The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror
can be registered. Register the position
with button “1”, “2” or each of the access
key fobs and retrieve the position.
For details about registration or retrieval
of a position, refer to “Driver’s Seat
Memory Function” �P41.
NOTE
If the seat is moved forward or backward
1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the reverse tiltdown will move to the factory default
position or the last position hold.
Hold last position function:
The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror
can be set to the latest adjusted angle.
The hold last position function operates
when the following condition are met.
. The memory function is not used.
. The seat is moved forward or backward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more.
S_308421-W
The power folding mirror switch operates
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
To fold the outside mirrors, press the
power folding mirror switch. To unfold the
mirrors, press the switch again.
NOTE
. If the outside mirrors have been
operated (folded or unfolded) manually, when you turn the ignition switch
from the “OFF” position to the “ACC”
or “ON” position, the outside mirrors
may be adjusted automatically depending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch.
. If the outside mirrors have been
manually folded slightly forward of the
regularly unfolded position, when you
turn the ignition switch from the “OFF”
position to the “ACC” or “ON” position,
the outside mirrors may automatically
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
3
(250,1)
248
.
.
.
.
.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
fold further forward depending on the
status of the power folding mirror
switch. When this happens, press the
power folding mirror switch. By doing
so, the outside mirrors which have
been folded to the furthest forward
position will extend to the regularly
unfolded position and then fold rearward in the usual way. In order to
unfold the outside mirrors, press the
switch again.
When you fold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may not unfold
when the switch is pressed, even
though the motor operating sound is
heard. When this happens, operate
the power folding mirror switch again.
When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by operating the switch. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by operating the switch again.
When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during operation. Push the switch again. When
the outside mirrors do not work by
operating the switch, move the outside
mirrors several times manually. This
makes it possible to operate them by
switch operation.
When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may not
work. This is not a malfunction. Operate after waiting for a short period of
time.
The outside mirrors can be operated
(folded or unfolded) manually for
approximately 45 seconds after the
following conditions are met.
– The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
– The door is unlocked using the
access key fob.
Power folding door mirror with the
automatic function (if equipped):
The mirrors automatically fold when the
power folding mirror switch is in the mirror
unfolding position, the ignition switch is
turned OFF, and the doors are locked.
The mirrors automatically unfold when
the power folding mirror switch is in the
mirror unfolding position and the doors
are unlocked.
NOTE
. The power folding door mirror with the
automatic function does not operate
automatically when the power folding
mirror switch is in the mirror folding
position.
. The automatic setting of the power
folding door mirrors can be changed
by operating the center information
display. For details, refer to “Vehicle”
�P206. Also, the setting can be
changed by your SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(251,1)
249
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3-18. TILT/TELESCOPIC
STEERING WHEEL
s03bf
3-19. HEATED STEERING
WHEEL SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
s03bm
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle
control and result in personal
injury.
The Heated Steering Wheel system
warms the steering wheel at a constant
temperature.
3
. If the lever cannot be raised to the
fixed position, adjust the steering
wheel again. It is dangerous to
drive without locking the steering
wheel. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in personal injury.
S_307946-W
Heated Steering Wheel switch
Indicator light
Heated area
S_308373-W
Tilt adjustment
Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
“Front Seats” �P37.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and
down, and forward and backward.
To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel
switch when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering
wheel will be warmed and the indicator
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn
off the Heated Steering Wheel system,
pull the switch again. Then the indicator
light will turn off.
CAUTION
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
system with the engine running.
Otherwise, the battery voltage may
drop below the permissible level
and it may not be possible to start
the engine.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer slight
burns even at low temperatures if
they use the Heated Steering
Wheel for a long period of time.
When using the Heated Steering
Wheel, always be sure to warn the
persons concerned.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(252,1)
250
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
. Do not cover the Heated Steering
Wheel with an object such as a
steering wheel cover. Doing so
may cause the Heated Steering
Wheel to overheat.
3-20. HORN
s03ar
. Do not spill liquid on the steering
wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately and dry it before using
the Heated Steering Wheel system.
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
104°F (40°C) when the switch is
turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. Then, the indicator
light will continue to illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approximately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
. The temperature of the Heated
Steering Wheel system cannot be
adjusted.
S_307679-W
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(253,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(254,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(255,1)
CLIMATE CONTROL
4-1.
Ventilator Control........................................................................254
s04
Center Ventilators ....................................................................... 254
Side Ventilators........................................................................... 254
Rear Ventilators .......................................................................... 254
4-2.
4-3.
Climate Control Panel.................................................................255
Automatic Climate Control Operation .......................................257
4-4.
Manual Climate Control ..............................................................259
Sensors ...................................................................................... 258
Airflow Mode Selection ............................................................... 259
Dynamic Ventilation .................................................................... 260
Temperature Control ................................................................... 261
Fan Speed Control ...................................................................... 262
Air Conditioner Control ............................................................... 262
Air Inlet Selection ....................................................................... 262
To Turn Off the Climate Control System....................................... 262
4-5.
4-6.
Defrosting ....................................................................................263
Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner ........................264
Cleaning Ventilator Grille............................................................. 264
Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct Sunlight ......................... 264
Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant Circuit.................... 264
Checking Air Conditioning System before Summer Season ......... 264
Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity and Low
Temperature Weather Condition ................................................ 264
Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When Engine Is Heavily
Loaded ..................................................................................... 264
Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ............................... 265
4-7.
Air Filtration System...................................................................265
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................................................... 265
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
4
(256,1)
254
CLIMATE CONTROL
4-1. VENTILATOR CONTROL
REAR VENTILATORS
s04af04
s04af
CENTER VENTILATORS
s04af01
S_403883-W
S_404018-W
To adjust the airflow direction, move the
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab
towards the center of the vehicle.
Open
Close
To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
SIDE VENTILATORS
s04af02
S_404019-W
To adjust the airflow direction, move the
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab
towards the outside of the vehicle.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(257,1)
CLIMATE CONTROL
255
4-2. CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
s04ag
WARNING
. The cooling function operates only
when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should not be left alone either.
On hot, sunny days, temperatures
in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
4
NOTE
When the vehicle battery power is low, the
climate control system will stop. Start the
engine to use the climate control system.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(258,1)
256
CLIMATE CONTROL
S_404020-W
AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic
Climate Control Operation” �P257.)
Driver’s side temperature control dial
(Refer to “Temperature Control”
�P261.)
ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
Climate Control Operation” �P257.)
Driver’s side set temperature indicator
(Refer to “Temperature Control”
�P261.)
Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow Mode Selection” �P259.)
Airflow mode indicator (Refer to “Airflow Mode Selection” �P259.)
Fan speed indicator (Refer to “Fan
Speed Control” �P262.)
Air conditioner ON indicator (Refer to
“Air Conditioner Control” �P262.)
MAX A/C indicator (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” �P261.)
Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
Conditioner Control” �P262.)
Dynamic Ventilation indicator (Refer to
“Dynamic Ventilation” �P260.)
Passenger’s side set temperature indicator (Refer to “Temperature Control”
�P261.)
SYNC indicator (Refer to “SYNC mode”
�P261.)
Dynamic Ventilation button (Refer to
“Dynamic Ventilation” �P260.)
Passenger’s side temperature control
dial (Refer to “Temperature Control”
�P261.)
SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode”
�P261.)
Front passenger’s seat ventilation button*1 (Refer to “Front Seat Ventilation”
�P54.)
Front passenger’s seat heater and seat
ventilation*1 indicator (Refer to “Seat
Heater and Front Seat Ventilation”
�P53.)
Front passenger’s seat heater button
(Refer to “Front Seat Heater” �P53.)
MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” �P261.)
Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
Inlet Selection” �P262.)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(259,1)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger
and Deicer” �P226.)
Fan speed control button (Refer to “Fan
Speed Control” �P262.)
Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
�P263.)
Driver’s seat heater button (Refer to
“Front Seat Heater” �P53.)
Driver’s seat heater and seat ventilation*1 indicator (Refer to “Seat Heater
and Front Seat Ventilation” �P53.)
Driver’s seat ventilation button*1 (Refer
to “Front Seat Ventilation” �P54.)
*1: if equipped
257
4-3. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL OPERATION
s04ai
When the auto mode is selected, the
following functions are automatically
controlled.
. Airflow mode
. Air inlet selection
. Air conditioner operation
. Fan speed
To activate this mode, perform the
following.
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator
light on the AUTO button illuminates.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate control
system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner will automatically
turn on if the temperature is set much
lower than the current outlet air temperature. Even in this case, the air
conditioner ON indicator on the climate control panel illuminates.
. The air conditioner may not operate in
the following cases:
– When the cabin temperature is low
– When the ambient temperature
decreases close to 32°F (0°C)
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. When the indicator light on the AUTO
button is illuminated, if you operate the
fan speed control or the airflow mode,
press the defroster button, or turn on
MAX A/C mode, the indicator light on
the AUTO button will turn off. You can
then manually control the system as
desired using the climate control
panel. To change the system back to
auto mode, press the AUTO mode
button.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
4
(260,1)
258
CLIMATE CONTROL
To turn off the climate control system,
press the ON/OFF button.
At this time, the air inlet selection mode
will differ depending on the auto mode
and manual mode.
. When the air inlet selection is set to
auto mode: Outside air circulation
. When the air inlet selection is set to
manual mode: No change
When the ignition switch is changed to the
“OFF” or “ACC” position from “ON”, the air
inlet mode will automatically change to
the outside air mode regardless of
whether it is the auto mode or manual
mode.
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precautions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
SENSORS
s04ai03
S_404021-W
Rain*/solar radiation and humidity
sensor
Interior air temperature sensor
*: If a rain sensor is equipped.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(261,1)
CLIMATE CONTROL
259
Bi-level:
4-4. MANUAL CLIMATE
CONTROL
s04aj
AIRFLOW MODE SELECTION
s04aj01
Select the airflow mode using the airflow
mode selection button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation:
4
S_404024-W
Instrument panel outlets and the foot
outlets
Heat:
S_404022-W
Instrument panel outlets
Ventilation 2:
S_404025-W
Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
S_404023-W
Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(262,1)
260
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heat-def:
directs the airflow only to the driver. To
cancel the airflow “DRIVER” mode, press
the “ ” button, and “ALL” will be illuminated on the climate control panel instead
of “DRIVER”, and airflow will be directed
to all the seats.
“FRONT” mode (driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seat are occupied):
S_404026-W
Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets
and both side outlets of the instrument
panel
DYNAMIC VENTILATION
s04aj11
S_404028-W
Dynamic Ventilation is a system that uses
sensors and other technology to judge
that someone is sitting in the front
passenger seat or rear seat and prioritizes the climate control for these seats
when they are occupied.
When the push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the climate
control system automatically selects the
Dynamic Ventilation mode according to
where the vehicle occupants are sitting.
“DRIVER” mode (driver’s seat is only
occupied):
When the climate control system judges
that the driver’s and passenger’s seats
are occupied, “FRONT” is illuminated on
the climate control panel and the system
directs the airflow to the driver and front
passenger. To cancel the airflow
“FRONT” mode, press the “ ” button,
and “ALL” will be illuminated on the
climate control panel instead of “FRONT”,
and airflow will be directed to all the seats.
“ALL” mode (rear seats are occupied
by passengers):
S_404027-W
S_404029-W
When the climate control system judges
that the driver is the only vehicle occupant, “DRIVER” is illuminated on the
climate control panel and the system
When the climate control system judges
that there are passengers occupying the
rear seats, “ALL” is illuminated on the
climate control panel and the system
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(263,1)
261
CLIMATE CONTROL
directs the airflow to all vehicle occupants. To cancel the airflow “ALL” mode,
press the “ ” button, and “DRIVER” or
“FRONT” will be illuminated on the
climate control panel depending on which
passenger’s seats are occupied, and
airflow will be directed to the seats
depending on the airflow mode.
NOTE
. Depending on the settings of the
climate control system or other factors
affecting the temperature inside the
vehicle, the operation of the Dynamic
Ventilation mode for occupants may
differ from the operation indicated on
the climate control panel.
. The climate control system judges that
the front passenger’s seat is occupied
by detecting such things as the fastening of the seatbelt, opening or
closing of the door, and operation of
the passenger’s side temperature
setting controls.
. If “FRONT” is illuminated on the
climate control panel when the front
passenger’s door is opened and then
closed and the climate control system
subsequently judges that the front
passenger’s seat is not occupied, the
climate control panel will illuminate
“DRIVER” when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 13 mph (20
km/h).
. The climate control system judges that
there are passengers occupying the
rear seats according to the opening
and closing of the rear doors. However, pressing “ ” button will turn off
the function that judges whether the
rear doors are open or closed. To turn
the function on again, turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position for approximately one hour.
. The system may not be able to judge
the presence of passengers accurately, in which case this function may
not operate properly.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
s04aj02
Turn the temperature control dial to set
the preferred interior temperature.
MAX A/C mode
s04aj0208
For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C
button.
Press the MAX A/C button to turn on the
MAX A/C mode. The MAX A/C indicator
will illuminate on the climate control
panel. Press the MAX A/C button again to
turn off the MAX A/C mode and return to
the previous setting. The MAX A/C
indicator will not illuminate on the climate
control panel. When the MAX A/C mode
is off, the MAX A/C indicator will no longer
be illuminated.
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the
following settings will be changed automatically.
. The air conditioner will turn on.
. The temperature will be set on the
lowest.
. The fan speed will be set on the
maximum speed.
. The air inlet will be set to the recirculation mode.
. The airflow mode setting will be set to
the ventilation mode.
NOTE
MAX A/C mode will be canceled if the
Distraction Mitigation System completes
user recognition again while MAX A/C
mode is in use.
SYNC mode
s04aj0207
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
the driver’s and passenger’s side temperatures are synchronized using the
driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to turn on the
SYNC mode. The SYNC indicator will
illuminate on the climate control panel.
Press the SYNC button again or turn the
passenger’s side temperature control dial
to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
4
(264,1)
262
CLIMATE CONTROL
indicator will not illuminate on the climate
control panel. When the SYNC mode is
off, the SYNC indicator will no longer be
illuminated. In this case, temperature
control on the driver’s side and passenger’s side will be separated. The temperature will be controlled individually
using the driver’s and passenger’s temperature control dials.
FAN SPEED CONTROL
s04aj03
Select the preferred fan speed by pressing the fan speed control buttons.
NOTE
When the vehicle battery power is low, the
fan will stop. Start the engine to use the
climate control.
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
s04aj04
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the air conditioner ON indicator
illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying
in cold weather, turn on the air conditioner. However, if the ambient temperature decreases to approximately 32°F
(0°C), the air conditioner and dehumidification system may not work properly.
– When driving on a dusty road
– When you want cooling performance
to increase (for example, in particularly hot weather)
Outside air circulation mode:
When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button does not illuminate, outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment. Press the air inlet selection
button to the OFF position in the following
cases.
. When the road is no longer dusty
. When the interior has cooled to a
comfortable temperature
WARNING
Continued operation in the recirculation mode may fog up the windows.
Switch to the outside air circulation
mode as soon as the outside dusty
condition clears.
NOTE
When outside air circulation is selected,
the system may automatically adjust the
air inlet setting depending on such factors
as the temperature setting, the temperature inside the vehicle, or conditions
outside the vehicle.
TO TURN OFF THE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
s04aj07
To turn off the climate control system,
press the ON/OFF button.
AIR INLET SELECTION
s04aj05
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
Recirculation mode:
When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button illuminates, interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON
position in the following cases.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(265,1)
CLIMATE CONTROL
4-5. DEFROSTING
s04ah
263
. After defrosting the windshield by
pressing the defroster button “ ”,
pressing the button again returns the
system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was
activated.
4
S_404030-W
S_404072-W
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows, perform the
following procedures.
. To select the “ ” mode, press the
defroster button.
. To select the “ ” mode, press the
airflow mode selection button on the
climate control panel.
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner operates
automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to
defrost the windshield more quickly.
However, the air conditioner ON indicator on the climate control panel
may not illuminate. At the same time,
the air inlet selection is automatically
set to the outside air circulation mode.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(266,1)
264
CLIMATE CONTROL
4-6. OPERATING TIPS FOR
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
s04ad
CLEANING VENTILATOR
GRILLE
s04ad01
LUBRICATION OIL CIRCULATION IN THE REFRIGERANT
CIRCUIT
s04ad03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
CHECKING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM BEFORE SUMMER SEASON
s04ad04
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air
conditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
S_404031-W
Front ventilator inlet grille
Condenser
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept
clean because cooling performance is
impaired by any accumulation of insects
and leaves on the condenser.
EFFICIENT COOLING AFTER
PARKING IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT
s04ad02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFYING IN HIGH HUMIDITY AND
LOW TEMPERATURE WEATHER CONDITION
s04ad05
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.)
a small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR SHUT-OFF WHEN ENGINE
IS HEAVILY LOADED
s04ad06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air
conditioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as
during rapid acceleration or when driving
on a steep upgrade.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(267,1)
265
CLIMATE CONTROL
REFRIGERANT FOR YOUR
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
s04ad07
S_404032-W
4-7. AIR FILTRATION SYSTEM
s04ae
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the cabin air filter according to
the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
This schedule should be followed to
maintain the filter’s dust collection ability.
Under extremely dusty conditions, the
filter should be replaced more frequently.
Have your filter checked or replaced by
your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,
use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).
Before adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant, check the air conditioner label
in the location shown in the illustration to
confirm which type of refrigerant is used
in your vehicle.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if
not properly maintained.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
1. Open the glove box.
s04ae01
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
4
(268,1)
266
CLIMATE CONTROL
2. Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
5. Pinch both tabs and remove the filter
cover.
S_404033-W
S_403831-W
3. Push both sides of the glove box
inward to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
6. Gently tilt down the end of the filter and
slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm). Slowly
pull out the rest of the filter.
7. Replace the cabin air filter with a new
one and then reinstall the cover.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must point
UP.
8. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
9. Close the glove box.
S_404034-W
Stoppers
4. Pull out the glove box horizontally and
remove the hinge portion. When doing
this, be careful not to damage the
hinge.
NOTE
When removing the cabin air filter, do not
allow any adhering foreign material to fall
into the housing.
S_403830-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(269,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(270,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(271,1)
AUDIO
5-1.
Antenna .......................................................................................270
s05
Roof Antenna.............................................................................. 270
5-2.
Audio Set .....................................................................................270
5
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(272,1)
270
AUDIO
5-1. ANTENNA
5-2. AUDIO SET
s05aa
ROOF ANTENNA
s05aa03
s05ac
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.
S_502343-W
The satellite radio antenna is installed in
the center of the roof at the rear.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(273,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(274,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(275,1)
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-1.
Interior Light................................................................................274
s06
Map Lights.................................................................................. 274
Dome Light ................................................................................. 274
Cargo Area Light ........................................................................ 275
Rear Gate Light (If Equipped) ...................................................... 275
OFF Delay Timer ......................................................................... 276
6-2.
Sun Visors ...................................................................................276
Sun Visor Extension Plate........................................................... 276
Vanity Mirror with Light............................................................... 277
6-3.
6-4.
Overhead Console ......................................................................278
Storage Compartment ................................................................278
Glove Box................................................................................... 278
Center Tray ................................................................................. 279
Center Console ........................................................................... 279
Center Console Tray ................................................................... 279
Front Passenger’s Tray ............................................................... 280
6-5.
Cup Holder ..................................................................................280
Front Passenger’s Cup Holder .................................................... 280
Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder ..................................................... 281
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
Bottle Holders .............................................................................281
Accessory Power Outlets...........................................................282
USB Power Supply .....................................................................283
6-9.
Wireless Charger (If Equipped)..................................................284
How to Use the USB Power Supply ............................................. 283
How to Use the Wireless Charger ................................................ 285
Mobile Device Holder .................................................................. 289
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
Ashtray (Dealer Option)..............................................................290
Assist Grip...................................................................................291
Coat Hook....................................................................................292
Floor Mat .....................................................................................293
Shopping Bag Hook....................................................................294
Multi-Use Cargo Cover ...............................................................294
Using the Multi-Use Cargo Cover ................................................ 294
6-16. Cargo Tie-Down Hooks ..............................................................297
6-17. Adjustable Storage Net ..............................................................298
6-18. Under-Floor Storage Compartment ...........................................298
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(276,1)
274
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-1. INTERIOR LIGHT
s06aa
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make sure
the lights are turned off to avoid
battery discharge.
MAP LIGHTS
s06aa06
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function. Refer to
“Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless
Access” Entry Function” �P120.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry System”
�P130.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “OFF” position.
After all the doors (other than the rear
gate) are closed, the map lights gradually
turn off. For details, refer to “OFF Delay
Timer” �P276.
DOME LIGHT
s06aa01
Dome light switches
s06aa0104
S_602888-W
Door interlock switch
Lens
To turn on the map light, press the lens.
To turn it off, press the lens again.
CAUTION
Do not keep watching the light source
because they use LEDs. Doing so
could damage your eyes.
The door interlock switch has the following positions.
OFF:
The map lights do not illuminate in
conjunction with a door opening. However, the lights can be turned on manually
by pressing the map light lens.
DOOR:
The map light illuminates in the following
cases.
. Any of the doors (other than the rear
gate) is opened.
S_602889-W
To turn on the dome light, press the
switch.
To turn it off, press the switch again.
CAUTION
Do not keep watching the light source
because they use LEDs. Doing so
could damage your eyes.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(277,1)
275
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CARGO AREA LIGHT
Door interlock switch
s06aa02
s06aa0107
S_602761-W
S_602890-W
DOOR
OFF
The door interlock switch has the following positions.
OFF: The dome lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. However, the lights can be
turned on manually by pressing the
switch.
DOOR: The dome lights illuminate automatically when any of the doors (including
the rear gate) is opened even while the
dome light is off. Several seconds after all
the doors (including the rear gate) are
closed, the dome lights gradually turn off.
For details, refer to “OFF Delay Timer”
�P276.
6
OFF
DOOR
ON
OFF:
The light remains off.
DOOR:
The light illuminates when the rear gate is
opened. The light remains illuminated
and gradually turns off after the rear gate
is closed.
ON:
The light remains on continuously.
REAR GATE LIGHT (If
Equipped)
s06aa04
S_602922-W
OFF
DOOR
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(278,1)
276
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OFF:
The light remains off.
DOOR:
The rear gate light will illuminate when the
rear gate is opened.
6-2. SUN VISORS
s06ac
OFF DELAY TIMER
s06aa07
This function will automatically illuminate
the following lights for a certain period of
time.
. Dome light
. Map lights
. Cargo area light
. Rear gate light (If equipped)
When the door interlock switch is set to
the “DOOR” position, the light will turn on
and off depending on the locking and
unlocking of the doors, the opening and
closing of the doors, as well as the
position of the ignition switch.
S_602639-W
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
SUN VISOR EXTENSION PLATE
s06ac01
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer)
can be changed by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
Also, the setting of the lights remain on
(OFF delay timer) can be changed by
your SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
S_602640-W
With the sun visor positioned over the
side window, you can use the sun visor
extension plate to prevent glare through
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(279,1)
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
277
NOTE
CAUTION
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
S_602891-W
Do not pull out the extension plate with
the sun visor positioned over the
windshield. The extension plate would
obstruct your view of the inside mirror.
6
VANITY MIRROR WITH LIGHT
s06ac02
S_602642-W
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror
cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(280,1)
278
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-3. OVERHEAD CONSOLE
s06bc
6-4. STORAGE COMPARTMENT
s06ad
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stops or an accident.
. Do not store the following items in
the storage compartment. Otherwise, it may cause a fire or
accident.
S_602892-W
To open the console, push on the lid
lightly and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
. Before driving, ensure that the
overhead console is closed.
. When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
the overhead console heats up.
Avoid storing plastic or other heatvulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
– Spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items.
– Plastic or other heat-vulnerable
or flammable articles such as a
lighter.
GLOVE BOX
s06ad01
S_602893-W
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the emergency key and turn it clockwise. To unlock
the glove box, insert the emergency key
and turn it counterclockwise.
An emergency key is attached to the
access key fob.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(281,1)
279
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
NOTE
NOTE
. When the instrument panel illumination is on, the light that illuminates the
glove box is on. Refer to “Headlights”
�P213.
. The emergency key is directional. If
the key cannot be inserted, change
the direction that the grooved side is
facing and insert it again.
When the instrument panel illumination is
on, the light that illuminates the center
tray is on. Refer to “Headlights” �P213.
CENTER CONSOLE
s06ad02
The center console box provides a
storage space.
CENTER TRAY
s06ad13
6
S_602895-W
S_602894-W
The center tray is located below the
center of the instrument panel.
To open the lid, pull up the lock release
lever.
CENTER CONSOLE TRAY
s06ad18
WARNING
For models with the wireless charger:
When the wireless charger is turned
on, do not place coins, keys, clips, or
other metal objects on the center tray.
For details, refer to “Wireless Charger”
�P284.
CAUTION
Do not use the center tray to hold
objects that could roll out of the tray.
You may get injured if objects are
thrown out of the tray while the vehicle
is in motion.
S_602896-W
The center console tray is located on the
front side of the center console.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(282,1)
280
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FRONT PASSENGER’S TRAY
s06ad12
6-5. CUP HOLDER
s06ae
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if
hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
S_602913-W
FRONT PASSENGER’S CUP
HOLDER
s06ae01
The front passenger’s tray is located on
the upper side of the glove box.
CAUTION
Do not store the following items in the
front passenger’s tray. Otherwise, it
may cause a injury or accident.
. Items with pointed tips, such as a
screwdriver
. Objects weighing over 8.8 oz (250
g)
. Items extending from the front
passenger’s tray
S_602897-W
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
. Take care not to spill a beverage on
the select lever or any switch(es) in
the adjacent area. If the beverage
is spilled, it may cause a malfunction of the select lever and/or
switch(es).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(283,1)
281
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
REAR PASSENGER’S CUP
HOLDER
6-6. BOTTLE HOLDERS
s06av
s06ae02
S_602659-MW
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
S_602898-W
The bottle holder equipped on each door
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage is
in the cup holder, do not fold down or
recline any seat. Otherwise, the beverage could spill while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn you
and/or your passengers.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as this
may distract you and lead to an
accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if the
beverage is hot, it could burn you
and/or your passengers.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(284,1)
282
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-7. ACCESSORY POWER
OUTLETS
the cap on the accessory power
outlet when it is not in use.
s06af
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12 V DC.
. The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected is
120 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
S_602899-W
. When using appliances connected
to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed
by them must not exceed 120 W.
Overloading the accessory power
outlet can cause a short circuit. Do
not use double adapters or more
than one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight
for the accessory power outlet, this
can result in a poor contact or
cause the plug to get stuck. Only
use plugs that fit properly.
S_602964-W
An accessory power outlet is provided as
shown in the illustration.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
Electrical power (12 V DC) from the
battery is available at any of the outlets
when the ignition switch is in either the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator and
brake pedals. If they do, do not use
the electrical appliance while driving.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That could
cause a short circuit. Always put
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(285,1)
283
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-8. USB POWER SUPPLY
s06ay
CAUTION
. The specification of a USB port that
can be used is the Type-A and
Type-C. If a different specification
of device is connected, power
supply or charging may not be
possible, or the device may malfunction.
. There is a risk that a connected
device may malfunction or data
may be damaged. The connection
of a device shall be performed at
your responsibility.
. To avoid an electric shock or a
malfunction, observe the following
precautions.
– Do not connect a USB hub.
– Do not insert any metal or other
foreign object into the USB
port.
– Do not spill water or other liquid
on the USB port.
. Be careful not to pull the connected
cable. Doing so could break the
USB port and the connected device.
connecting a device, be sure to read
the instruction manual of the device
and check whether or not this specification of the output is supported by
the device. If a device that requires
power exceeding the maximum rating
is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. Even if
charging could be completed, the time
required for charging may be longer
than when the genuine charger for that
device is used.
. Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special
cable is used. In this case, be sure to
connect the device using the special
cable.
. When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible.
. When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after
charging is completed.
HOW TO USE THE USB POWER
SUPPLY
s06ay01
Front seat USB port:
. If a device is connected for a long
time when the engine is not running, doing so may cause the risk
of a discharged battery. Even when
the engine is running, we recommend that you do not connect a
device for an unnecessarily long
time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning
device. Doing so may cause the
risk of smoke and fire.
S_602908-W
USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A
USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A
NOTE
. The rated voltage of each USB port is
5 V. For details about the maximum
rated power, refer to “How to Use the
USB Power Supply” �P283. Before
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(286,1)
284
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Console USB port:
6-9. WIRELESS CHARGER
(If Equipped)
s06bh
S_602764-W
USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A
USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A
S_602901-W
Before using the USB port to use or
charge an electronic device, turn the
ignition switch to the “ACC” or “ON”
position. The combined maximum output
of the two USB ports is 5.4 A.
To charge a cell phone, smartphone or a
similar mobile device compatible with the
Qi wireless charging standard, place the
device in the charging area located below
the center information display.
The “Qi” logo is a trademark of the
Wireless Power Consortium.
S_602914-W
NOTE
Use a cable clip when connecting a
mobile device placed on the front passenger’s tray to the front seat USB port.
S_602765-W
Indicator light
Power switch
Charging area
NOTE
Mobile devices and wireless chargers
contain coils for charging. These coils
allow the wireless charging system to
charge a mobile device with a high level of
charging efficiency. When your device is
in the charging area, the wireless charger
detects it and aligns an integrated moving
coil with the coil in your device for
charging. If vehicle vibration causes the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(287,1)
285
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
two coils to become misaligned while the
vehicle is in motion, the moving coil of the
wireless charger automatically repositions itself and resumes charging.
However, if the mobile device moves out
of the charging area, charging will automatically stop.
HOW TO USE THE WIRELESS
CHARGER
s06bh01
1. The wireless charger operate when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
2. Press the power switch once to turn on
the wireless charger. When the wireless charger is ON, the indicator light
illuminates in green.
S_602903-W
4. The indicator light illuminates in green
when charging is complete.
NOTE
. If the indicator light does not illuminate
in orange and device charging does
not occur, move the device to the
center of the charging area. Depending on the mobile device, the charging
coil may not be in the center of the
device. In such cases, place the
mobile device so that its charging coil
is in the center of the charging area.
. The power status of the wireless
charger is stored even when the
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position.
S_602902-W
3. Place the mobile device so that the
screen or keypad is facing up (the
charging surface is facing downward).
The center of the device must also be
aligned with the center of the charging
area. The indicator light illuminates in
orange during charging.
How to use the quick charge
s06bh0101
The following types of mobile devices
support quick charging as opposed to
normal charging (5 W).
. Mobile devices compliant with WPC*
Ver. 1.2.4 and compatible with fast
chargers can be charged up to 10 W.
. iPhone 8 (or later) with an iOS version
compliant with WPC* Ver. 1.2.4 and
compatible with 7.5 W charging.
* WPC: Wireless Power Consortium
1. Press the power switch three times to
change to the quick-charging mode
while your mobile device is charging in
normal mode. The indicator light will
change from orange to alternating
green and orange when the wireless
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(288,1)
286
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
charger switches to the quick-charging mode.
2. When charging is complete, the indicator light will turn green, and the
quick charging mode will end. To
restart quick-charging, switch to the
quick-charging mode again.
To turn off the wireless charger
s06bh0104
Press the power switch once. When the
wireless charger is OFF, the wireless
charger indicator light turns off.
NOTE
When using the center tray as a storage
compartment, ensure that the indicator
light is off. Refer to “Center Tray” �P279.
Indicator light patterns
s06bh0102
Indicator light
Off
Green (illuminated)
Orange (illuminated)
Interpretation
The wireless charger is turned
off
Standby (ready for charging)*1
Charging is complete*2
A mobile device is in the charging area (a mobile device is
being detected)
Charging
Green and orange illuminate
alternately
Quick charging is in progress
*1: No power is output for charging when the wireless
charger is in standby mode. Even if metal objects
are placed on the charging tray in this state, they
will not overheat.
*2: For some mobile devices, the indicator light
remains orange even after charging is complete.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(289,1)
287
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
List of warnings
s06bh0103
Indicator light
Possible causes
Solution
Flashes orange
once per second
A communication error occurred between
the wireless charger and the access key
fob.
If the engine is running, stop the engine
and restart it.
If the ignition switch is in “ACC”, start the
engine once.
Metallic foreign object detected.
A foreign object is detected between the
mobile device and the charging area.
Remove any foreign objects between the
mobile device and the charging area.
Repeatedly flashes
orange three times The wireless charger detected insufficient
charging performance because the charging coils of the mobile device and wireless
charging coils are far apart.
Remove the mobile device from the charging area, check that the activation indicator light is illuminating in green again,
and place the device in the center of the
charging area. If there is a case or cover on
your mobile device, be sure to remove it.
Repeatedly flashes The temperature inside the wireless charorange four times
ger has increased.
Remove the mobile device from the charging area temporarily to stop charging.
When the temperature of the mobile device
cools down, start charging the device
again.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(290,1)
288
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
WARNING
. Do not apply hair spray or insecticide to the wireless charger or wipe
it using flammable substances
such as oils, alcohol, benzine, or
paint thinner. Doing so may cause
a vehicle fire.
. For safety reasons, drivers must
not operate a charging mobile
device while driving.
. Do not charge small devices such
as cordless headphones or lightweight cell phones while driving.
Due to their light weight, these
devices may be thrown from the
charging tray resulting in an accident.
. The wireless power receiver can
affect some implanted or other
electrical medical devices. If you
use a cardiac pacemaker, ventricular pacing pulse generator, cardioverter-defibrillator, or a similar
device, consult with your physician
before using the wireless charger.
CAUTION
. Before charging your device, make
sure that there is no metal between
the charging area and the mobile
device. Metal objects may generate heat and cause burns when
placed in the charging area.
. Do not apply strong force or impact
to the charging area.
. Do not affix aluminum stickers to or
place other metal objects in the
charging area. Also, do not charge
a mobile device that has aluminum
stickers or other metal objects
attached to it that may come in
contact with the charging area.
Metal objects may generate heat
and cause burns when placed in
the charging area.
. Do not disassemble, modify, or
remove the wireless charger.
. Do not place magnetized objects in
or near the charging area.
. During charging, do not cover your
device with a cloth, etc.
. Do not charge your device in dusty
conditions.
. Make sure that no foreign objects
or liquids are placed or spilled in
the wireless charger.
. Do not place the access key fob
near the wireless charger.
. When your device is charging,
keep any magnetic cards such as
credit cards and precision devices
such as watches away from the
charging area. They may be damaged.
. Do not leave objects in the trays
unattended for a long period of
time. The paint on the trays may
deteriorate depending on the type
of device case or accessory.
. When the OS version of a mobile
device is updated, the charging
specifications may change significantly. Also, if the OS versions
compatible with WPC change, the
quick charging function may become unavailable. For details,
check the website of your mobile
device manufacturer.
. To prevent discharging the vehicle
battery, do not use the wireless
charger for long periods of time
when the engine is stopped.
NOTE
. This function is not available for
devices larger than the charger tray.
. The wireless charger and mobile
device will emit heat during charging,
but this is not a malfunction.
. When your mobile device emits heat
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(291,1)
289
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
.
.
.
.
.
.
during charging, the mobile device’s
protective function may cancel charging.
The fan may activate when the temperature rises, but this is not a
malfunction.
Qi standard wireless charger can be
used on compatible devices.
However, not all Qi standard devices
and compatibility are guaranteed.
If you hear noise on the AM radio while
your device is charging, you may be
able to reduce the noise by changing
the charging frequency. To change the
charging frequency, press and hold
the power switch to turn on the
system. After a certain amount of time,
the indicator light will flash orange
twice to indicate when the frequency
changes.
If the access key fob cannot be
detected in the cabin, the battery
cannot be charged. In addition, charging may be temporarily suspended
when the remote keyless entry system
is in operation, such as when opening
and closing doors.
In the following cases, the wireless
charger will not operate normally:
– You are in an area near a facility
where electronic equipment is
emitting strong radio waves, such
as a power plant, broadcast station, or TV tower, or an electronic
remote controller is being used
nearby.
– The ambient temperature around
the charging tray is high due to hot
weather.
If charging stops after a certain period
of time, and the wireless charger does
not operate normally, it may be due to
any of the following reasons:
– The mobile device is protruding
from the charging area.
– The mobile device is equipped with
a large protruding camera.
– A thick object such as a case,
cover, or accessory is between the
charging surface of the portable
device and the charging area.
– Two or more mobile devices are
placed on the charging tray at the
same time.
MOBILE DEVICE HOLDER
s06bh03
6
S_602959-W
The mobile device holder is an accessory
designed to securely hold smartphones
and other devices placed on the wireless
charger.
Attach the mobile device holder to the
wireless charger by following these steps.
1. Install the mobile device holder on the
wireless charger so that the wider side
of the holder faces toward the front of
the vehicle.
2. Lift the front part of the mobile device
holder slightly and insert the tabs into
the notches of the wireless charger.
S_602958-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(292,1)
290
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
3. Place the mobile device holder onto
the wireless charger.
To remove the mobile device holder,
perform the installation steps in reverse order.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the mobile
device holder, pay attention to the
following precautions when handling
it.
. Do not try to force the tabs of the
mobile device holder into the
notches of the wireless charger.
. When installing or removing the
mobile device holder, be careful
not to hit any of the surrounding
components.
6-10. ASHTRAY (Dealer Option)
s06ag
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them into
the ashtray, and then close the
ashtray securely. If you keep the
ashtray open, the fire of the cigarette may spread to another cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts
in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtray’s
inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.
S_602646-MW
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
Holder” �P280. For the locations of the
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle Holders”
�P281.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(293,1)
291
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
When using the ashtray, open the lid of
the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using
the ashtray to help reduce residual
smoke.
6-11. ASSIST GRIP
s06bd
S_602766-MW
Assist grip
The assist grip is to be held to support the
body of the passengers when they are in
the seat and the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
Do not hold the assist grip when
getting up from the seat. Holding and
pulling the assist grip in the wrong way
could break the grip and possibly
cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not attach heavy objects to the
assist grip. Doing so could break it and
damage the object.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(294,1)
292
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-12. COAT HOOK
s06ah
S_602906-W
S_602905-W
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s assist grip.
WARNING
Obey the following instructions.
. Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. Hang clothing directly on
the coat hooks without using
hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are no
pointed objects in the pockets.
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden stops
or in a collision.
. Serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin.
. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag deployment.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat hook
that might obstruct the driver’s view or
that could cause injury in sudden
stops or in a collision. And do not hang
items on the coat hook that weigh 11
lbs (5 kg) or more.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(295,1)
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-13. FLOOR MAT
s06aj
293
2. Turn the upper knob of each retaining
hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in
place.
CAUTION
S_602767-W
S_602650-MW
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine SUBARU
floor mat designed with grommets
in the correct locations.
Align the triangle marks (
installing the floor mats.
) when
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
1. Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.
S_602651-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
6
(296,1)
294
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-14. SHOPPING BAG HOOK
s06ai
6-15. MULTI-USE CARGO
COVER
s06bk
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
Adjusting the installation position and
direction of the hooks on the cover and of
the hook holders on the vehicle will allow
you to change how you use the multi-use
cargo cover.
NOTE
If the multi-use cargo cover gets dirty,
wipe it off using a wet cloth.
USING THE MULTI-USE CARGO
COVER
s06bk01
Multi-use cargo cover
S_602904-W
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
S_602916-W
Rubber hook
Hook
Hook
Magnet
Zipper
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(297,1)
295
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Cover installation positions
Multi-use cargo cover
s06bk0101
S_602917-W
The multi-use cargo cover is provided to
cover the cargo area and protect its
contents from direct sunlight.
1. Hang the rubber hook
of the cover
from the hook holder .
2. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
3. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
4. Attach the magnet
of the cover to
the vehicle side magnet .
Hook holder
Hook holder
Hook holder
Hook holder
Magnet
Cargo hook
6
S_602918-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(298,1)
296
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Usage as partition
Usage as hammock
s06bk0102
s06bk0103
The multi-use cargo cover can be used as
a partition to prevent the cargo loaded in
the cargo area from collapsing.
1. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
2. Hang the hook of the cover from the
cargo hook .
The multi-use cargo cover can be used as
a hammock to load luggage in the
following cases.
. When the cargo area is dirty, but you
need to put some items in the cargo
area.
. To make luggage storage from the
back seat easier.
Installation on front hooks:
1. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
2. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
Installation on rear hooks:
1. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
2. Hang the hook of the cover from the
hook holder .
S_602919-W
CAUTION
When using the multi-use cargo cover
as a partition, do not apply a load of
more than 13 lbs (6 kg).
S_602920-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(299,1)
297
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
. Before driving the vehicle with
items stored in the multi-use cargo
cover, close the zipper. If not, the
luggage may fly out and could
cause an accident or injury.
6-16. CARGO TIE-DOWN
HOOKS
s06am
. Do not place a load of more than
2.76 lbs (1.25 kg) on the multi-use
cargo cover.
Usage as step cover
s06bk0104
When working in the cargo area or
loading cargo into the cargo area, you can
use the multi-use cargo cover as step
cover to prevent damaging or soiling the
cargo area or rear bumper.
1. Close the zipper.
2. Hang the hook of the cover from the
cargo hook .
6
S_602675-W
The cargo area is equipped with four tiedown hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that exceeds
the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg)
per hook.
S_602921-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(300,1)
298
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6-17. ADJUSTABLE STORAGE NET
6-18. UNDER-FLOOR STORAGE COMPARTMENT
s06be
s06an
For Outback models
S_602907-W
There is an adjustable storage net in the
cargo area. Push the net downward to
expand the cargo area.
S_602909-W
For Subaru Outback Wilderness models
S_602962-W
The under-floor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the cargo area
and can be used to store small items. To
open the lid, pull the handle up.
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(301,1)
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
299
S_602970-W
If it is difficult to hang the cargo floor lid
from the hook, use a dry cloth to wipe off
any material adhering to the opening of
the rear gate where you would like to
attach the hook.
6
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor
storage in the cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the underfloor storage compartment closed
while driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of sudden stop or
an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the under-floor storage
compartment.
. Before closing the under-floor storage compartment lid, ensure that
the hook is returned to its original
position. If the hook gets caught in
the rear gate, it may become
damaged.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(302,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(303,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-1.
Fuel ..............................................................................................304
s07
Fuel Requirements ...................................................................... 304
Fuel Filler Lid and Cap ................................................................ 305
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.
State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ...........................................308
Preparing to Drive.......................................................................309
Starting and Stopping Engine....................................................310
General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine................... 310
Safety Precautions for “Keyless Access with Push-Button
Start System” ........................................................................... 310
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System ........................... 310
Starting Engine ........................................................................... 310
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down Function ....................................... 312
Stopping Engine ......................................................................... 312
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ...................... 313
Steering Lock ............................................................................. 313
7-5.
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) ..........................314
Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) .................................... 315
Alternate Operation Method for Models with “Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” ................................................ 318
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start ........... 318
Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine Start Shutdown ... 319
Heating or Cooling the Interior of the Vehicle .............................. 319
Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver) .............................................................................. 319
System Maintenance ................................................................... 319
7-6.
Continuously Variable Transmission.........................................321
Continuously Variable Transmission Features ............................. 321
Select Lever................................................................................ 322
Shift Lock Function..................................................................... 323
Selection of Manual Mode ........................................................... 325
Driving Tips ................................................................................ 326
7-7.
7-8.
Power Steering............................................................................327
Braking ........................................................................................328
Braking Tips ............................................................................... 328
Brake System ............................................................................. 328
Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators..................................... 329
7-9.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)..................................................330
ABS Self-Check .......................................................................... 330
ABS Warning Light ..................................................................... 330
7-10. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System .................331
EBD System Malfunctions ........................................................... 331
7-11. Vehicle Dynamics Control System ............................................332
Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor .................................. 333
To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System.................. 333
7-12. X-MODE .......................................................................................335
To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE ................................................... 336
Hill Descent Control Function...................................................... 337
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(304,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-13. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (Except for
Canada-Spec. Models)................................................................338
TPMS Screen .............................................................................. 339
7-14. Parking Your Vehicle ..................................................................339
Electronic Parking Brake............................................................. 339
Parking Tips ............................................................................... 342
Auto Vehicle Hold Function ......................................................... 343
Emergency Brake........................................................................ 346
7-15. Hill Start Assist System .............................................................346
7-16. Auto Start Stop System..............................................................348
System Operation ....................................................................... 348
Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status ............................. 352
System Warning.......................................................................... 352
7-17. Surround View Monitor (If Equipped)........................................353
How to Change the Display of Surround View Monitor ................. 353
How to Cancel Surround View Monitor ........................................ 356
How to View the Camera Images ................................................. 356
Range of Surround View Monitor................................................. 359
Using the Camera ....................................................................... 359
Front Cross Traffic Information (If Equipped) ............................... 360
Rear Cross Traffic Warning (RCTW)............................................. 362
How to Get the Source Code that Uses Open Source Software .... 362
7-18. Rear View Camera (If Equipped)................................................362
How to Use the Rear View Camera .............................................. 363
Viewing Range on the Screen...................................................... 364
Help Lines .................................................................................. 365
7-19. BSW/RCTW..................................................................................367
System Features ......................................................................... 367
Operating Conditions .................................................................. 369
BSW/RCTW Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer ................. 370
BSW/RCTW OFF Indicator ........................................................... 373
BSW/RCTW Warning Indicator..................................................... 373
To Turn On/Off the BSW/RCTW.................................................... 374
Handling of Rear Radar Sensors ................................................. 374
7-20. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ..............................375
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview ................... 377
Operating Conditions .................................................................. 378
Proximity Warning Detection Function......................................... 381
Automatic Braking Function Operation........................................ 384
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Operation.................................................................................. 386
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/OFF Setting.......... 386
RAB Warning Indicator................................................................ 387
Handling of the Sonar Sensors.................................................... 387
How to Get the Source Code That Uses Open Source Software ... 388
7-21. Distraction Mitigation System....................................................389
User Recognition Function.......................................................... 394
Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning............................................. 396
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(305,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
Distraction Mitigation System Indicator/Warning .......................... 398
Using the Distraction Mitigation System ...................................... 398
Distraction Mitigation System ON/OFF Settings ........................... 402
How to Get the Source Code That Uses Open Source Software ... 403
7
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(306,1)
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-1. FUEL
Unleaded gasoline
s07aa
CAUTION
. Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropriate fuel
additive may cause damage to the
engine and/or fuel system.
. Some gas stations, particularly
those in high altitude areas, offer
fuels posted as regular octane
gasoline with an octane rating
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of
those fuels are not recommended.
s07aa0104
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
Reformulated gasoline
s07aa0128
SUBARU supports the use of reformulated gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn
more cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.
MMT
s07aa0106
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
s07aa01
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
NOTE
When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model
to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends
using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher to
reduce the risk of engine overheat.
Fuel octane rating
s07aa0103
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact
your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with
the specified octane rating and your
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
RON:
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
AKI:
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
If you use such fuels, your emission
control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light may turn
on. If this happens, return to your
authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If
it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline for cleaner air
s07aa0107
Your use of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of
these fuels can also help keep the air
cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as
ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be
used in your vehicle, but should contain
no more than 15% ethanol for the proper
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(307,1)
305
STARTING AND OPERATING
operation of your SUBARU.
TOP TIERTM fuel
s07aa0131
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 15% ethanol, including from
any pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which
are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle
emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that
specified in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your
vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5%
of the fuel mixture AND if it is
accompanied by sufficient quantities
of the proper cosolvents and corrosion
inhibitors required to prevent damage
to the fuel system. Do not use fuel
containing methanol EXCEPT under
these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems
are experienced and you suspect they
may be fuel related, try a different
brand of gasoline before seeking
service at your SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
S_703585-W
SUBARU recommends the use of TOP
TIERTM approved gasoline. For more
information on TOP TIERTM approved
gasoline and a list of marketers, refer to
the official website: www.toptiergas.com
FUEL FILLER LID AND CAP
s07aa02
Locations of the fuel filler lid
s07aa0202
S_703472-W
The fuel filler lid is located at the rear right
side of the vehicle.
Refueling
s07aa0201
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Before refueling, stop the vehicle, then
turn off the ignition switch to turn off all
the electrical components. At this
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(308,1)
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
time, the fuel filler lid also unlocks.
NOTE
When you lock the door, the fuel filler lid
also locks. To unlock the fuel filler lid,
perform one of the operations below.
– Press the “ ” button on the key fob.
– Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.
3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.
Open it further by hand.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap, first
touch the vehicle body or a metal
portion of the fuel pump or similar
object to discharge any static electricity that may be present on your body.
If your body is carrying an electrostatic
charge, there is a possibility that an
electric spark could ignite the fuel,
which could burn you. To avoid
acquiring a new static electric charge,
do not get back into the vehicle while
refueling is in progress.
turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position first and then close all
vehicle doors and windows. Make
sure that there are no lighted
cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly
wipe up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you are
removing the cap, wait for the
sound to stop and then slowly open
the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.
5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
S_703455-W
WARNING
S_703454-W
Open
Close
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function,
causing fuel to overflow the tank
and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the automatic
stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle
activates. If you continue to add
fuel, temperature changes or other
conditions may cause fuel to over-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(309,1)
307
STARTING AND OPERATING
flow from the tank and create a fire
hazard.
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add
any more fuel.
7. Put the cap back on and turn it
clockwise until you hear a clicking
noise. Be certain not to catch the
tether under the cap while tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
may damage the paint, be sure to wipe
off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint
damage caused by spilled fuel is not
covered under the SUBARU Limited
Warranty.
NOTE
. You will see the “
” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
lid is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until
it clicks or if the tether is caught under
the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light may
illuminate. Refer to “CHECK ENGINE
Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator
Light” �P166.
. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one of
the operations below. However if
these operations are performed when
the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid
will not lock when it is subsequently
closed.
– Press the “ ” button on the key fob.
– Press the lock side of the power
door locking switch.
. When the doors are locked or unlocked using the automatic door lock
system, the fuel filler lid will be locked
or unlocked at the same time.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause damage
to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that it is
fully tightened. If the cap is not
securely tightened, fuel may leak
out while the vehicle is being driven
or fuel spillage could occur in the
event of an accident, creating a fire
hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be sure
to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled
fuel is not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong
cap, it may not fit or have proper
venting and your fuel tank and
emission control system may be
damaged. It could also lead to fuel
spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine. Continuing
to operate your vehicle at an
extremely low fuel level may result
in a reduction of engine performance.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(310,1)
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-2. STATE EMISSION TESTING (U.S. Only)
s07ab
WARNING
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
when testing an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) model.
Testing of an AWD model must
NEVER be performed on a single twowheel dynamometer. Attempting to do
so will result in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remember
to tell your inspection or service
station in advance not to place your
SUBARU AWD vehicle on a twowheel dynamometer. Otherwise,
serious transmission damage will
result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the
state inspection program or its
contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs
to inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle
emissions to exceed allowable limits.
OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model
year and newer passenger cars and
trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of
Columbia have implemented emission
inspection of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check
of the “CHECK ENGINE” warning
light/malfunction indicator light (MIL)
and an examination of the OBDII
system with an electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is
observed, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII
readiness monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is
not properly operating (light is illuminated or is not working due to faulty
LED (Light Emitting Diode)) or there is
one or more diagnostic trouble codes
stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the
number of OBDII system readiness
monitors “NOT READY” is greater
than one. If the vehicle’s battery has
been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection
may indicate that the vehicle is not
ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a
few days to reset the readiness
monitors and return for an emission
re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer
for service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains
in one place. Prior to your vehicle being
put on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector not to place your SUBARU
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(311,1)
309
STARTING AND OPERATING
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using twowheel dynamometers in their emission
testing program have EXEMPTED
SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion
of the testing program that involves a twowheel dynamometer. There are some
states that use four-wheel dynamometers
in their testing program. When properly
used, this equipment should not damage
a SUBARU AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected in
an attempt to bypass AWD for state
emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
be tested using an AWD dynamometer
with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
7-3. PREPARING TO DRIVE
s07ac
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are
fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10.Check the gauges, indicator and
warning lights after starting the engine.
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cooling
fan and drive belt may result in a
malfunction. Check that no small
animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before
starting the engine.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
Hitch (Dealer Option)” �P424.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(312,1)
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-4. STARTING AND STOPPING ENGINE
s07be
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
WHEN STARTING/STOPPING
ENGINE
s07be08
WARNING
. Never start the engine from outside
the vehicle (except when using the
remote engine start system). It may
result in an accident.
. Do not leave the engine running in
locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors. The
exhaust gas may enter the vehicle
or indoors, and it may result in
carbon monoxide poisoning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable
substances. The exhaust pipe and
exhaust emissions can create a fire
hazard at high temperatures.
case, it is recommended to switch to a
different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knocking
may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR
“KEYLESS ACCESS WITH
PUSH-BUTTON START SYSTEM”
s07be06
Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P117.
OPERATING RANGE FOR
PUSH-BUTTON START SYSTEM
s07be01
Refer to “Operating Range for PushButton Start System” �P156.
STARTING ENGINE
s07be03
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may overheat
and burn.
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine start
system).
NOTE
. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration
immediately after the engine has
started.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult to
start the engine depending on the fuel
used and the driving condition (repeated short trips when the engine is
not warmed up sufficiently). In such a
WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General Precautions
When Starting/Stopping Engine”
�P310.
. If the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch flashes in green
after the engine has started, never
drive the vehicle. The steering is
still locked, and it may result in an
accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be a
malfunction with the vehicle. Con-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(313,1)
311
STARTING AND OPERATING
tact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch is flashing in green
after the engine has started, it
means that the steering is still
locked. While moving the steering
wheel right and left, depress the
brake pedal, and press the pushbutton ignition switch.
. Do not continue pressing the pushbutton ignition switch for more than
10 seconds. Doing so could cause
a malfunction. If the engine does
not start, stop pressing the pushbutton ignition switch. Instead,
press the push-button ignition
switch without depressing the
brake pedal to switch the power
status to “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds,
and then press the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the
steering cannot be unlocked. Charge
the battery.
. It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position for
approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
engine starter is cranking.
NOTE
. When pressing the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake
pedal:
– The engine starter operates for a
maximum of 10 seconds and after
starting the engine, the engine
starter stops automatically.
– The engine can be started regardless of the power status.
. If the engine does not start, check the
security indicator light. Then press the
push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to “OFF”.
– If the light had illuminated, try to
start the engine again.
– If the light had been off, press the
push-button ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal more
forcefully.
. The engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such
a case, refer to “Starting Engine”
�P452.
S_703473-W
Operation indicator
Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine will start. The starting
procedure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position. The engine can also start
when the select lever is in the “N”
position, however, for safety reasons,
start in the “P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When
starting with the select lever in the “N”
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(314,1)
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
position, the indicator does not turn
green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
While pressing the select lever button in,
the indicator on the push-button ignition
switch will not turn green even when the
select lever is in the “P” position.
AUTOMATIC VEHICLE SHUT
DOWN FUNCTION
s07be10
WARNING
. The cooling function operates only
when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should not be left alone either.
On hot, sunny days, temperatures
in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
This vehicle has a function to automatically stop the engine if it is left in the
following state for about 30 minutes while
the engine is running.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. The vehicle is stopped.
If the engine stops automatically, the
ignition switch turns to the “OFF” position.
How to reset the timer of the
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down
function
s07be1001
If you want to continue running the
engine, you can reset the timer of the
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function by
doing any of the following operations.
S_703593-W
. Touch “Delay” according to the message displayed in the center information display before the engine is
automatically stopped.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Shift the select lever into a position
other than the “P” position.
If you reset the Automatic Vehicle Shut
Down function, it will reactivate after
approximately 30 minutes have passed.
How to deactivate the Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function
s07be1002
The Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function can be temporarily disabled using the
center information display settings. For
details, refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
If you disable the Automatic Vehicle Shut
Down function, it will not work and the
engine will continue to run.
The Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function will be enabled the next time you turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
and restart the engine.
STOPPING ENGINE
s07be04
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power
will be switched off.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(315,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING
313
NOTE
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows, the
engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
The electric power steering system
will not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer, and it
may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped in
a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power will
be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is left in
this condition, the battery may be
discharged.
S_703344-W
. If you press the push-button ignition
switch while driving, the emergency
engine stop interrupt screen alerts the
driver by messages on the instrument
cluster display and beeps.
. Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
WHEN ACCESS KEY FOB
DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
s07be05
Refer to “If Access Key Fob Does Not
Operate Properly” �P451.
STEERING LOCK
s07be07
After stopping the engine and any door is
opened, the steering wheel will be locked
due to the steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(316,1)
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the steering lock cannot
be released
s07be0701
7-5. REMOTE ENGINE
START SYSTEM (Dealer Option)
s07az
WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General Precautions
When Starting/Stopping Engine”
�P310.
S_703473-W
Operation indicator
Push-button ignition switch
When you cannot restart the engine due
to the steering lock, check the status of
operation indicator and perform the following steps.
Operation indicator flashing in green:
1. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left
and right.
Operation indicator flashing in orange:
There may be a malfunction in the
steering lock function. Immediately contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an
enclosed environment (e.g. closed
garage). Prolonged operation of a
motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful
build-up of carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is harmful to your
health. Exposure to high levels of
carbon monoxide can cause
headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness
and/or death.
The remote engine start system allows
you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
start system can activate the heater or air
conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. The length of time for which it is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
. When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you
inform the service personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with a remote
engine start system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(317,1)
315
STARTING AND OPERATING
REMOTE ENGINE STARTER
TRANSCEIVER (Fob)
s07az21
S_703262-MW
Fob button
Starting the engine
s07az2101
NOTE
All vehicle doors and the engine hood
must be closed prior to activating the
remote engine start system. Any open
entry point will prevent starting or cause
the engine to stop.
The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
operating range of the system and the
start request is received, the following will
occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
The system will check certain safety
preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the engine will start
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote
engine start system, the following will
occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine
start system will power off and then
attempt to start the engine 3 additional
times. The system will not attempt to
restart the engine if it determines a
vehicle malfunction is preventing starting.
If the engine does not start after 3
additional attempts, the remote engine
start request will be aborted.
Stopping the engine
s07az2102
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is
not received (for example, if the user is
too far away from the vehicle), the fob will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
Remote start safety features
s07az2103
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the engine if running) and
sound the horn twice if any of the
following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in a
position other than “OFF”.
. The engine hood is open.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
rpm.
. The security alarm is triggered.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(318,1)
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
. The select lever is not in the “P”
position.
If the system detects any door open
during operation, it will prevent starting or
stop the engine, and sound the horn and
flash side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights 6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the
instrument cluster is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at the
time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the
instrument cluster is not flashing), the
alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
Remote start operation - fob
confirmation
s07az2104
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate the status of the
system using the following the flash and
beep sequences, provided the fob is
within operational range of the system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(319,1)
317
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fob Indication
Precondition
Fob start button is being pressed
User attempts to start engine by
pressing fob button twice within 3
sec
Meaning
Flash
Beep
Continuous while
button is held down
—
1 flash
1 beep
Engine start request received
2 flashes
2 beeps
Engine started successfully
1 flash every 3 sec
3 flashes
—
3 beeps
1 flash every 3 sec
Engine idling by remote engine
start operation
The fob is transmitting an RF signal
3 flashes
—
3 beeps
3 flashes
User attempts to stop engine by
pressing and holding fob button for
1 flash every 3 sec
at least 2 sec
3 beeps
—
Engine idling
Vehicle is in range but engine not
started
Engine idling
Engine stopped by system time-out
or for safety reasons (see sections
above)
Engine stopped by user request
Stop request not received. Engine
still idling.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(320,1)
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
ALTERNATE OPERATION
METHOD FOR MODELS WITH
“KEYLESS ACCESS WITH
PUSH-BUTTON START SYSTEM”
s07az22
again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard
warning flashers then flash three
times, and the horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine
will then start successfully.
Stopping the engine
s07az2203
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
Remote start safety features
s07az2204
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
start safety features” �P315.
S_703263-W
Lock button
An access key fob can be used as the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate
the lock button to start or stop the engine
as follows.
Before starting the engine
s07az2201
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors are closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in
the “OFF” position.
Starting the engine
s07az2202
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash
once and the buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock
button briefly again. The hazard
warning flashers then flash once
again, and the buzzer chirps once
ENTERING THE VEHICLE
WHILE IT IS RUNNING VIA REMOTE START
s07az24
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function and remote
keyless entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
system is armed prior to activating the
remote engine start system) and the
engine will turn off. Perform either of the
following procedures to disarm the alarm
system. Refer to “Alarm System” �P136.
– Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
– Press any button on the access key
fob.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will
remain running provided the access
key fob is present and detected by the
vehicle.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
once while depressing the brake pedal
before driving your vehicle. The remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
will flash and beep 3 times to indicate
that the remote start system has been
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(321,1)
319
STARTING AND OPERATING
shut down.
ENTERING THE VEHICLE FOLLOWING REMOTE ENGINE
START SHUTDOWN
s07az10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle
is opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immediately following remote engine start
shutdown.
HEATING OR COOLING THE
INTERIOR OF THE VEHICLE
s07az04
After the system starts the engine, the
heater or air conditioning will activate and
heat or cool the interior to a factory default
temperature setting, with automatic selected for all other settings.
5. Press and release the “ ” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that
the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming,
the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up
to eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“OFF” position, the door is closed or
after 2 minutes.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
s07az09
NOTE
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAM (Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver)
s07az13
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain open throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“OFF”, back to “ON” then “OFF”, back
to “ON” then “OFF”, then back to “ON”
again and leave the ignition “ON”
throughout the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating
that the system has entered the
transmitter learn mode.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected, it
will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key prior
to activating the remote engine start
system. This is required to allow the
vehicle electronic systems to resynchronize.
Changing the battery
s07az0901
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the remote
engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any removed
parts; children could swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if an
incorrect replacement battery is
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(322,1)
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
used. Replace only with the same
or equivalent type of battery.
. Battery should not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob”
�P507.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR2450) supplied in your remote engine
start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage.
When the battery begins to weaken, you
will notice a decrease in range (distance
from the vehicle that your remote control
operates). Follow the instructions below
to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.
1. Remove the small phillips screw located on the back side lower left
corner of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small
flat-head screwdriver.
S_703127-MW
S_703128-MW
S_703126-MW
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove
the battery and replace with new one.
Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the
old battery before removing it to
ensure that the new battery is inserted
properly (battery “+” should be pointed
away from the transmitter circuit board
on battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw
and test the remote engine start
system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(323,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-6. CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION
s07bg
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position
into the “D” or “R” position while
depressing the accelerator pedal. This
may cause the vehicle to lurch forward
or backward.
321
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION FEATURES
s07bg06
CAUTION
. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause damage to the
transmission.
– Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle has completely stopped.
– Do not shift from the “D” position into the “R” position or vice
versa until the vehicle has
completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position when
the brake is applied or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the transmission
fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set in
a forward driving position or move
the vehicle forward by inertia with
the select lever set in the “R”
position. Doing so may result in an
unexpected accident or malfunction.
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant temperature
is still low, the transmission will shift at
higher engine speeds than when the
coolant temperature is sufficiently
high in order to shorten the warm-up
time and improve driveability. The
gearshift timing will automatically shift
to the normal timing after the engine
has warmed up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid is
replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of
data which the on-board computer has
collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving under continuous heavy
load conditions such as climbing a
long, steep hill, the engine speed,
vehicle speed and air conditioning
system cooling performance may
automatically be reduced. This is not a
malfunction. This phenomenon results from the engine control function
maintaining the cooling performance
of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle
speed will return to a normal speed
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(324,1)
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
when the engine is able to maintain
the optimum cooling performance
after the heavy load decreases. Driving under a heavy load must be
performed with extreme care.
. The continuously variable transmission is a chain type system that
provides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At
times, depending on varying driving
conditions, a chain operating noise
may be heard that is characteristic of
this type of system.
. Place the shift boot to the original
position after it is lifted. If the select
lever is operated with the shift boot in
the rolled up position, the shift boot
may have tension and it may disturb
the select lever operation.
SELECT LEVER
s07bg01
S_703345-W
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button in
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has an “M” gate.
NOTE
. For some models, to protect the
engine while the select lever is in the
“P” or “N” position, the engine is
controlled so that the engine speed
may not become too high even if the
accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
. When you change the select lever
position, make sure to move the select
lever firmly to the selected position.
S_703474-W
Select lever button
P (Park)
s07bg0101
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(325,1)
323
STARTING AND OPERATING
R (Reverse)
s07bg0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “ACC” position, the movement of
the select lever from the “N” to “R”
position is only possible by depressing
the brake pedal. For details, refer to “Shift
Lock Function” �P323.
N (Neutral)
s07bg0103
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission
is neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the select
lever in the “N” (neutral) position.
Engine braking has no effect in this
condition and the risk of an accident is
consequently increased.
The transmission will automatically
downshift. In this case, the transmission
will operate like a conventional automatic
transmission. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the
original gear position.
If one of the shift paddles behind the
steering wheel is operated while driving in
the “D” position, the transmission will
temporarily switch to the manual mode. In
this mode, you can shift to any gear
position using the shift paddles. For
details about the manual mode, refer to
“Selection of Manual Mode” �P325.
Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the
transmission will switch from the manual
mode back to the “D” position for normal
driving.
While climbing a grade:
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift
is prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and
downshifting resulting in a smoother
operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, depending on the way the accelerator pedal
is depressed to accelerate the vehicle
again.
SHIFT LOCK FUNCTION
D (Drive)
s07bg04
s07bg0104
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and
continuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up
and down a hill, the transmission assists
and controls the driving performance and
engine braking while corresponding to
the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position.
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and the brake pedal
is depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved
from the “P” position to any other
position before the brake pedal is
depressed. Depress the brake pedal
first, and then operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the push-button ignition switch to the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(326,1)
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
“OFF” position.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” position while the select lever is
in the “N” position, the select lever
may not be moved to the “P” position
without depressing the brake pedal
and pressing the select lever button.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver
into the two slits and then lift upward.
Shift lock release
s07bg0401
If the select lever cannot be operated,
turn the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position, then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, check
and confirm the following and release the
shift lock accordingly.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion” �P324.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:
Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever still does not move, refer
to “Shift lock release using the shift lock
release portion” �P324.
If the shift lock cannot be released without
using the shift lock release button in the
above cases, there may be a malfunction
in the shift lock system or the vehicle
control system.
S_703475-W
Slit
3. Remove the center tray or wireless
charger (if equipped).
S_703476-W
4. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the shift lock release portion,
and then move the select lever.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion
s07bg0402
Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
S_703587-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(327,1)
325
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
SELECTION OF MANUAL
MODE
s07bg02
When the upshift indicator “ ” is on,
upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is
possible. When both indicators are on,
upshifting and downshifting are both
possible. When the vehicle stops (for
example, at traffic signals), the downshift
indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
7
S_703477-W
With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
S_703136-W
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “−”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the
“M” position. While driving with the select
lever in the “D” position, if you change
gears by operating the shift paddle, the
gear position indicator illuminates and
shows the current gear condition.
S_308068-W
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the
instrument cluster illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear
range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gearshift is possible.
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on the
shift paddles. Doing so may result in
accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully
and bear them in mind when using the
manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(328,1)
326
.
.
.
.
STARTING AND OPERATING
downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps
will be emitted to warn you that the
downshift is not possible.
If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.
You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succession.
The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
If the temperature of the transmission
fluid becomes too high, the AT OIL
TEMP warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
DRIVING TIPS
s07bg05
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull
away from a standstill safely and
easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of
the manual mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”
or “R” position.
. Make sure to apply the parking brake
when parking your vehicle. Do not
hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using
the “D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a
standstill. This phenomenon does not
indicate a malfunction.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(329,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-7. POWER STEERING
s07aj
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system.
327
. The steering wheel remains in the fully
turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resistance
when steering. However, this is not a
malfunction. Normal steering force will be
restored after the steering wheel is not
operated for a while and the power
steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power
steering is operated in a non-standard
way which causes power assist limitation
to occur too frequently, this may result in a
malfunction of the power steering control
system.
S_703346-W
7
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the power steering warning
light on the instrument cluster illuminates
to inform the driver that the warning
system is functioning properly. Then, if
the engine started, the warning light turns
off to inform the driver that the steering
power assist is operational.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning light
is illuminated, there may be more
resistance when the steering wheel is
operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering control
system may temporarily limit the power
assist in order to prevent the system
components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely
low speeds, such as while frequently
turning the steering wheel during
parallel parking.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(330,1)
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-8. BRAKING
s07ak
BRAKING TIPS
s07ak01
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
Electronic brake booster
WARNING
s07ak0207
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the brakes
and needless wear on the brake pads.
When the brakes get wet
s07ak0101
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the
vehicle at a safe speed while lightly
depressing the brake pedal to heat up the
brakes.
Use of engine braking
s07ak0102
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When
descending a grade, if only the foot brake
is used, the brakes may start working
improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake
pads. To help prevent this, shift into a
lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
Braking when a tire is punctured
s07ak0103
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
BRAKE SYSTEM
s07ak02
Two separate circuits
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic
brake booster to provide additional braking force. Do not turn off the ignition
switch while driving because that will turn
off the brake booster, resulting in poor
braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, you will have
to depress the pedal much harder than
during normal braking, and the braking
distance will increase.
NOTE
When the following operations are performed, an operating sound from the
electronic brake boost control module
may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
. The brake pedal was operated.
. The driver’s door was opened.
. The EyeSight function was activated.
. Several minutes have passed after the
engine stopped.
Supplemental booster function when
pressure fails:
If there is a malfunction in the brake
system, the power for the braking will be
stored by controlling the hydraulic pressure of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system.
When the brake pedal is depressed while
the supplemental booster function is
operating, an operation sound and brake
pedal vibration may be generated.
Brake assist system
s07ak0203
s07ak0201
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capability.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(331,1)
329
STARTING AND OPERATING
Always use the utmost care when
driving regarding vehicle speed and
safe distance.
DISC BRAKE PAD WEAR
WARNING INDICATORS
s07ak03
WARNING
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the brake
assist.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle
when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are
exceeded. Doing so could result in an
accident.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the
driver cannot depress the brake pedal
strongly and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
7
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though
these occur, they do not indicate any
malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal is
applied by lighter force and generates
a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compartment.
S_703142-MW
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise,
have the brake pads checked and replaced by your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible. Brake disc damage may
result if the pads are not replaced when
needed.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(332,1)
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS SELF-CHECK
7-9. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)
s07al01
s07al
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving
– overconfidence because you are
driving with an ABS equipped vehicle
could easily lead to a serious accident.
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating noise of the
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate
any abnormal condition.
ABS WARNING LIGHT
s07al02
CAUTION
Refer to “ABS Warning Light” �P170.
. The ABS does not always decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over newly fallen snow, stopping
distances may be longer for a
vehicle with the ABS than one
without. When driving under these
conditions, therefore, reduce your
speed and leave ample distance
from other vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not pump
the brake pedal since doing so may
defeat the operation of the ABS.
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking
or braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when
the ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
mph (10 km/h).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(333,1)
331
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-10. ELECTRONIC BRAKE
FORCE DISTRIBUTION
(EBD) SYSTEM
s07am
The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a
slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is
normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
If all of the warning lights remain on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately
and contact a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous. This
indicates your brake system may
not be working properly. If the light
remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
EBD SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS
s07am01
S_703349-W
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD
system, the system stops working and the
following warning lights illuminate simultaneously.
. Brake system warning light
. ABS warning light
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(334,1)
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-11. VEHICLE DYNAMICS
CONTROL SYSTEM
s07an
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving
– overconfidence because you are
driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehicle could
easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be used
when driving on snow-covered or
icy roads; in addition, vehicle
speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system does not
guarantee that the vehicle will be
able to avoid accidents in any
situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is an indication that
the road being traveled on has a
slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation should
be seen as a sign that the speed of
the vehicle should be reduced
considerably.
. Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an
axle are removed from a vehicle
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, have an
inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure that
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly.
with tires of the same size,
type, and brand. Furthermore,
the amount of wear should be
the same for all four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
tire inflation pressure label attached to the driver’s side door
pillar.
– When replacing a flat tire, use
only the specified temporary
spare tire. However, even with
the specified temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be reduced.
. If non-matching tires are used, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may not operate correctly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed
to prevent spinning of the driving wheels
on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional
control. Activation of this function is
indicated by flashing of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator
light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels’ tendency
to slide sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is indicated by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation indicator light.
– All four wheels should be fitted
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(335,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake pedal
is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating noise from the engine
compartment is heard briefly when
starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt when
driving off after starting the engine.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate
a system malfunction.
– On gravel-covered or rutted roads
– On unfinished roads
– When the vehicle is towing a trailer
– When the vehicle is fitted with snow
tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce speed
when approaching a corner, even if
the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle
Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL SYSTEM MONITOR
s07an01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control
Warning Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control
Operation Indicator Light” �P175 and
“Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator
Light” �P176.
333
TO TURN ON/OFF THE VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL
SYSTEM
s07an07
Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
7
S_703504-W
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
Creating an adequate driving wheel slip
by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system temporarily may help to
escape from the following situations. Turn
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system off
when necessary.
. A standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. Extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system during engine operation,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(336,1)
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
dicator light on the instrument cluster
illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When the
switch is pressed again to reactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light turns off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system
may still activate. When the brake
control system is activated, the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light flashes.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system
helps prevent unstable vehicle motion
such as skidding using control of the
brakes and engine power. Do not turn
off the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, drive very
carefully based on the road surface
condition.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” position
and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is pressed and held for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is activated, and the
system ignores any further pressing of
the switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position and restart the engine.
. When the switch has been pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the vehicle’s running
performance is comparable with that
of a vehicle that does not have a
Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do
not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system except when absolutely necessary.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(337,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-12. X-MODE
s07bi
WARNING
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with
X-MODE could easily lead to a
serious accident.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with hill
descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be
especially careful, and depress the
brake pedal if necessary when
driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads.
Failure to control the vehicle’s
speed may cause a loss of control
and result in a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snowcovered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having
X-MODE does not guarantee that
the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activate X-MODE when you encounter a very slippery surface at
low speed. However, having
X-MODE is no guarantee that full
vehicle control will be maintained
at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-MODE,
the speed of the vehicle should be
reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an
axle are removed from a vehicle,
have the system inspected by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
335
. Observe the following precautions
in order to ensure that X-MODE is
operating properly:
– All four wheels should be fitted
with tires of the same size,
type, and brand. Furthermore,
the amount of wear should be
the same for all four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s
door pillar.
– Use only the special temporary
spare tire to replace a flat tire.
With a normal temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of
X-MODE is reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
. If the hill descent control function
has operated continuously for a
long time, the temperature of the
brake disc may increase and the
hill descent control function may be
temporarily disabled. In this case,
the hill descent control indicator
light will disappear. When the hill
descent control indicator light disappears, the hill descent control
function is disabled.
X-MODE is the integrated control system
of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving
with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE,
you can drive more comfortably even in
slippery road conditions including uphill
and downhill.
X-MODE has the following functions.
Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function,
you can keep the vehicle at a consistent
speed driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is likely to increase, the brake
control system will be activated to adjust
the vehicle speed.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(338,1)
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing
ability and driving ability as well as
enabling smooth application of torque for
easier control of the steering wheel.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
X-MODE
s07bi01
S_703478-W
Models with 1 mode
Models with 2 modes (DEEP SNOW/
MUD, SNOW/DIRT)
X-MODE switch
Models with 1 mode:
To activate or deactivate X-MODE, press
the X-MODE switch on the steering
wheel.
Models with 2 modes (DEEP SNOW/
MUD, SNOW/DIRT):
Each time the X-MODE switch on the
steering wheel is pressed, the mode
changes in the order of SNOW/DIRT,
DEEP SNOW/MUD and off.
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate X-MODE
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20
km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be
activated. At this time, a buzzer will
sound twice.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is
activated, a buzzer will sound once
and X-MODE will be deactivated.
X-MODE will automatically reactivate
when the vehicle speed drops below
22 mph (35 km/h).
– When you use the cruise control
after X-MODE is automatically deactivated, X-MODE will not be
automatically reactivated when the
vehicle speed drops below 22 mph
(35 km/h).
. While the engine is running, if any of
the following conditions is met,
X-MODE will be deactivated. In this
case, it is not possible to activate
X-MODE.
– The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator light illuminates.
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light
flashes.
– The ABS warning light illuminates.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light illuminates.
. The Auto Start Stop system will be
stopped while X-MODE is activated.
. If there is a possibility that the engine
could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it is not possible to activate
X-MODE. Even while X-MODE is
activated, X-MODE will be deactivated when the engine coolant temperature increases.
Models with 2 modes:
. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving on
a snow-covered road where the points
of contact between the tires and road
surface are visible, or for driving on an
unpaved road.
. DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for
driving on a road covered with deep
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(339,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
snow where the points of contact
between the tires and road surface are
not visible, or for driving on a muddy
road.
337
pedal is depressed during hill
descent control function operation.
Hill descent control indicator
light
s07bi0301
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
FUNCTION
s07bi03
The hill descent control function will be in
standby mode when X-MODE is activated
and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
The function will operate when the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 12
mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal
is depressed.
CAUTION
The braking power of the hill descent
control function may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is needed
(e.g., when towing a trailer).
S_703350-W
This indicator appears while the hill
descent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is
operating. It will disappear when the
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
the vehicle speed reaches more than
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed using the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the stop lights will
illuminate.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road.
. The hill descent control function may
be considered normal when the following conditions occur.
– An operating sound is heard briefly
from the engine compartment
while the hill descent control function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder
than usual etc.) when the brake
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(340,1)
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-13. TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) (Except for CanadaSpec. Models)
s07ao
The tire pressure monitoring system
provides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor
that is installed in each wheel when tire
pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
WARNING
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
cool thoroughly before adjusting
their pressures to the standard
values shown on the tire inflation
pressure label. Refer to “Tires and
Wheels” �P486. The tire pressure
monitoring system does not function when the vehicle is stationary.
After adjusting the tire pressures,
increase the vehicle speed to at
least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the
TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If
you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat
Tires” �P439.
S_703351-W
. If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly. Instead, perform
the following procedure. Otherwise
an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure to
the COLD tire pressure shown
on the tire inflation pressure
label on the door pillar on the
. When a replacement tire is
mounted or a wheel rim is replaced
without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred,
the low tire pressure warning light
will illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute. This
indicates the TPMS is unable to
monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible for tire and sensor
replacement and/or system resetting.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(341,1)
339
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This may
cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not function properly.
TPMS SCREEN
s07ao05
7-14. PARKING YOUR VEHICLE
s07ap
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children or
pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or
sunny days, the temperature in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe
or possibly fatal injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as they
may burn easily if they come near
hot engine or exhaust system
parts.
S_703352-W
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic Screens” �P191.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passenger
compartment, occupants in the
vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
ELECTRONIC PARKING
BRAKE
s07ap03
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic parking brake. You can apply/release
the parking brake by operating the electronic parking brake switch.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(342,1)
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake may
be released and an accident may
occur.
S_703479-W
Electronic parking brake switch
Indicator light
Release the electronic parking brake
Apply the electronic parking brake
To apply:
Depress the brake pedal and pull up the
electronic parking brake switch.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle
in a safe location, use tire stops
under the tires to prevent the
vehicle from moving and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
. If the electronic parking brake is
operated under the following conditions, the electronic parking
brake indicator light may flash.
– The brake is overheated.
– The vehicle is on a steep slope.
In such cases, the vehicle may
start to move which may lead to an
accident. Always use the tire
stops.
CAUTION
S_703353-W
When the parking brake is applied, the
following indicator lights illuminate.
. The electronic parking brake indicator
light on the instrument cluster (for
details, refer to “Electronic Parking
Brake Indicator Light” �P172.)
. The indicator light on the electronic
parking brake switch
To release:
Press the electronic parking brake switch
firmly while the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. When the electronic parking brake
cannot be applied due to a malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your
vehicle in such conditions, perform
the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position. When the select lever
cannot be shifted into the “P”
position, you must release shift
lock. Refer to “Shift Lock
Function” �P323.
– Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(343,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
. Never drive with the parking brake
applied. Doing so will cause unnecessary brake pad wear. Before
driving off, always make sure that
the parking brake has been released and the brake system
warning light has turned off.
. The braking power of the parking
brake may not be sufficient when
stronger braking power is needed
(e.g., when parking on a steep
slope while towing a trailer).
NOTE
. The parking brake will not be released
under the following conditions even if
the electronic parking brake switch is
pressed.
– The ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “OFF” position.
– The brake pedal is not depressed.
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking
brake. Therefore, operating sounds
from the motors will be heard when
applying or releasing the parking
brake. Make sure that the motor
sounds are heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the
electronic parking brake operation is
prohibited temporarily, if the electronic
parking brake switch is operated, a
chirp sound is heard and the electronic
parking brake indicator light flashes.
. When you cannot release the parking
brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer
release the parking brake.
. If the operation of the electronic
parking brake switch is stopped midway or performed extremely slowly,
the system may detect an error and
turn on the brake system warning light.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction if the warning light turns
off after operating the switch.
341
. When the electronic parking brake has
not been used for a long period of
time, the electronic parking brake may
operate automatically after the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
This occurs due to checking the
proper operation of the electronic
parking brake and does not indicate a
malfunction.
. If the electronic parking brake switch is
malfunctioning and the electronic
parking brake cannot be released,
refer to the instructions described in
“Automatic release function by accelerator pedal” �P342.
. After activating the electronic parking
brake, you may hear a short sound
several minutes after the electronic
parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the electronic parking
brake switch illuminate as the system
confirms proper engagement. This
sound is different from the apply and
release sound.
This can occur:
– If the brakes are extremely hot.
– If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
– If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound
under any of these conditions.
. The Auto Start Stop system is deactivated while the electronic parking
brake is applied.
. If you operate the electronic parking
brake switch while the Auto Start Stop
system is activated, the Auto Start
Stop system will be deactivated. The
electronic parking brake will activate
after the engine is restarted. After the
electronic parking brake indicator light
is illuminated, release your foot from
the brake pedal.
. When starting the engine or restarting
the engine using the Auto Start Stop
system, if you operate the electronic
parking brake switch, the electronic
parking brake indicator light may flash
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(344,1)
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
temporarily. However, this is not a
malfunction if the light turns off after
the electronic parking brake is deactivated.
Automatic release function by
accelerator pedal
s07ap0301
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The parking brake will be automatically released
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
However, the automatic release function
does not operate under the following
conditions.
. Any door (other than the rear gate) is
open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the electronic parking brake switch turn
off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake, the parking brake will be automatically released when the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
PARKING TIPS
s07ap02
When parking your vehicle, always perform the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. Place the select lever in the “P” (Park)
position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
S_703152-MW
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
Electronic parking brake system warning
s07ap0304
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light turns
on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in the nearest
safe location and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
S_703153-MW
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic parking brake system warning”
�P172.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(345,1)
343
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a bumper under
guard (optional), pay attention to
blocks and other obstructions on the
ground when parking. The underspoiler could be damaged by contact with
them.
AUTO VEHICLE HOLD FUNCTION
s07ap04
The Auto Vehicle Hold function will automatically keep the vehicle stopped even
after releasing the brake pedal when the
vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at
traffic signals.
WARNING
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function on a steep hill or slippery
road. The vehicle may move even
when using the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, causing serious injury or
accidents.
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function to park the vehicle. The
vehicle may move unexpectedly,
causing serious injury or accidents.
Make sure to shift the select lever
to the “P” position and apply the
electronic parking brake in the
following cases.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move
unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.
– When washing your vehicle in
an automatic car wash
– When being towed
CAUTION
. When stopping on a steep slope
with the Auto Vehicle Hold function
turned on, the electronic parking
brake may be automatically applied. Then the electronic parking
brake indicator light will flash. In
such a case, depress and hold the
brake pedal while stopping. Otherwise, the vehicle may move.
. When being towed, turn off the
Auto Vehicle Hold function.
NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto
Vehicle Hold function when stopping on
an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold
function is turned off, the vehicle may roll
backward when driving off.
– When you are going to park
your vehicle.
– When passengers are getting
in or out of the vehicle.
– When you are loading or unloading.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, do not release the brake
pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold
indicator illuminates. The vehicle
may move unexpectedly, causing
serious injury or accidents.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function in the following cases.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(346,1)
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle
Hold function
s07ap0401
. Every time when starting the engine,
the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be
set to “OFF”.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is
pressed and held for more than 30
seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn off, and the
system will ignore any further pressing
of the switch. To activate the function
again, restart the engine.
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function
is deactivated while the Auto Vehicle
Hold function has a malfunction, if you
press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch, a
chirp will sound.
To operate the Auto Vehicle
Hold function
s07ap0402
S_703520-W
Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal when all of the following conditions
are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
function will operate.
. Driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
Auto Vehicle Hold switch
To turn on:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when
the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light is
OFF. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will illuminate.
To turn off:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when
the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
illuminates. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
indicator light will turn off.
NOTE
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the
Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned
on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle
Hold indicator light will turn off and the
brake system warning light will turn on.
S_703354-W
While the vehicle is kept stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto
Vehicle Hold indicator light will flash.
To release the Auto Vehicle
Hold function
s07ap0403
Perform any of the following operations to
release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.
. Depress the accelerator pedal.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(347,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
. Depress the brake pedal again.
. Apply the electronic parking brake.
. Shift the select lever to the “P” position
with the brake pedal pressed.
. Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch
with the brake pedal pressed (The
Auto Vehicle Hold function turns off).
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator
light will change from flashing to illuminated.
Under any of the following conditions, the
Auto Vehicle Hold function will be automatically released and the electronic
parking brake will be automatically applied.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has
been in operation for 10 minutes.
. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
. The vehicle is stopped on a steep
slope.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is
malfunctioning.
In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold
indicator light will turn off and the electronic parking brake indicator light will
illuminate.
Tips
s07ap0404
. When the electronic parking brake is
automatically applied with the vehicle
kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, release the electronic parking brake by either of the following
operations before starting off. Then
make sure that the electronic parking
brake indicator light is off.
– Depress the accelerator pedal with
the driver’s seatbelt fastened and
with the doors closed.
– Press the electronic parking brake
switch with the brake pedal depressed.
345
. Under certain conditions, including a
malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a
warning buzzer will sound and a
warning message will appear on the
instrument cluster display. All warning
messages should be strictly observed.
. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot
be kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle
Hold function. In such a case, depress
and hold the brake pedal.
. When stopping on a steep slope with
the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the electronic parking brake
may be automatically applied after
stopping, then the electronic parking
brake indicator light may flash. In such
a case, depress and hold the brake
pedal while stopped. Otherwise, the
vehicle may move. When getting out
of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat
surface, then apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
does not illuminates even after pressing the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with
the operating conditions met, the
function may have a malfunction.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
. You may hear a sound while the Auto
Vehicle Hold function is keeping your
vehicle stopped. This is normal, and
does not represent a malfunction.
. When you depress the brake pedal to
release the Auto Vehicle Hold function, an operation sound or vibration
may be generated, or the brake pedal
may return slowly. This is not a
malfunction.
. While the vehicle is kept stopped by
the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. However,
this is not a malfunction.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, depress the brake pedal
firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle
Hold may not operate.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(348,1)
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is
pressed and held for more than 30
seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn off and further
operation of the switch will be ignored.
To make the switch usable again, turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and then turn it to the “ON”
position.
7-15. HILL START ASSIST
SYSTEM
s07au
The Hill start assist system temporarily
holds the vehicle so that it does not roll
downhill even if the brake pedal is
released when starting on a slope. This
makes it easier to start on a slope.
EMERGENCY BRAKE
s07ap05
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pulling the
electronic parking brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
and the indicator light on the electronic
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in case
of an emergency. If the emergency
brake is excessively used, the brake
parts will wear down faster or the
brake may not work sufficiently due to
brake overheating.
NOTE
. While using the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
and the indicator light on the electronic
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
. While using the emergency brake, a
sound may be heard from the engine
compartment. This is the operating
sound of the brake that is activated by
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
and does not indicate a malfunction.
S_703270-W
Starting forward facing uphill
Starting backward facing downhill
Brake pedal
The Hill start assist system operates
when the vehicle has stopped with the
brake pedal depressed.
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the accelerator
pedal.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(349,1)
347
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake
pedal is released, apply more braking
power by depressing the brake pedal
again.
CAUTION
. The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver to
START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake,
make sure that the vehicle remains
stationary when the brake pedal is
released.
7
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position while the Hill
start assist system is operating.
The Hill start assist system will
deactivate, causing an accident.
S_703155-W
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in
the following cases.
When starting backward facing uphill
When starting forward facing downhill
While the parking brake is applied
While the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “OFF” position
. While the Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light is illuminated. Refer to
“Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning
Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator Light” �P175.
. While the Auto Start Stop warning light
is illuminated. Refer to “Auto Start
Stop Warning Light (Yellow)” �P181.
.
.
.
.
CAUTION
The braking power of the Hill start
assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is needed
(e.g., when towing a trailer).
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(350,1)
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE
. A slight jolt may be felt when the
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
. When using the Hill start assist system, a braking effect may be felt even
after the brake pedal has been released.
. The Hill start assist system will deactivate when the Auto Vehicle Hold
function is activated.
7-16. AUTO START STOP
SYSTEM
s07bh
The Auto Start Stop system is designed to
automatically stop and restart the engine
when the vehicle is stationary for a short
period of time (while waiting for a traffic
light or in a traffic jam) after the engine
has warmed up. The system operates in
order to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and undesired idling
noise.
SYSTEM OPERATION
s07bh01
WARNING
Turn off the Auto Start Stop system
before towing the vehicle.
CAUTION
The Auto Start Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine for a short period of
time during idling. Do not use the
system when parking the vehicle
normally.
So that it can be used safely and
comfortably, in addition to driver operations, the Auto Start Stop system is
designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment
inside and outside the vehicle, in order to
control stopping and restarting of the
engine.
After the vehicle has been completely
stopped by depressing the brake pedal
with the select lever in the “D” position,
the engine will be automatically stopped.
If you release the brake pedal with the
select lever kept in the “D” position, the
engine will be automatically restarted.
However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold
indicator light illuminates, the engine will
not restart.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(351,1)
349
STARTING AND OPERATING
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)
S_703459-W
If the engine is temporarily stopped by the
system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light
on the instrument cluster will illuminate in
green. This indicator light will turn off
when the system restarts the engine.
NOTE
. After starting the engine, if the vehicle
is left idling without being driven, the
Auto Start Stop system will not operate.
. Your vehicle is equipped with a special
high-performance battery. When replacing the vehicle battery, be sure to
replace it with a genuine SUBARU
battery (or equivalent) designed specifically for use in a vehicle equipped
with the Auto Start Stop system. For
details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Operational conditions
s07bh0105
The engine can be automatically stopped
by the Auto Start Stop system when all of
the following conditions are met.
. The engine is sufficiently warmed up.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is off.*1
. The airflow mode selection is set to a
mode other than “ ” mode.
. The rear window defogger is not in
use.
. X-MODE has been turned off.
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine
will be automatically stopped when the
following conditions are met.
. The steering wheel is in the straight
ahead position.
. The steering wheel is not being
operated.
*1: Even if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is illuminated,
the Auto Start Stop system may operate
when the system recovers from the malfunction.
NOTE
. After the vehicle is stopped, the
engine may not automatically stop
under the following conditions.
– The vehicle is stopped on a road
with a steep slope.
– The vehicle is stopped by hard
braking.
. After the vehicle is stopped, the
engine may not automatically stop if
the brake pedal is not fully depressed.
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
firmly when stopping the vehicle.
. In the following cases, it may take
some time for the Auto Start Stop
system to operate.
– When the battery is discharged
because the vehicle has not been
used for a long period of time, etc.
– The coolant temperature is low.
– When the battery terminals have
been reconnected after replacing
the battery, etc.
Non-operational conditions
s07bh0106
In any of the following cases, the Auto
Start Stop system will not operate.
. When the Auto Start Stop warning
light/Auto Start Stop OFF indicator
light is illuminating.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(352,1)
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
. When the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light is illuminating.*1
. The electronic parking brake is applied.
. When the engine hood is opened.
. When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently
warmed up.
. When the temperature of the CVT fluid
is abnormally high.
. When the vehicle battery is not in good
condition.
. When using the climate control system, the temperature difference between the setting temperature and the
temperature inside the vehicle is significant.
. When using the climate control system, the amount of air flow is significant.
*1: Even if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is illuminated,
the Auto Start Stop system may operate
when the system recovers from the malfunction.
. When depressing the accelerator
pedal.
. When you move the select lever to the
“R” position.
. When turning the steering wheel.
. When operating the electronic parking
brake switch.
. When activating X-MODE.
. When the airflow mode selection set to
“ ” mode.
. When the climate control system can
no longer maintain the set temperature.
. When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt.
. When opening the driver’s door.
. When activating the rear window
defogger.
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function
is released, refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold
Function” �P343.
Engine restart non-operational
conditions
s07bh0108
WARNING
NOTE
The Auto Start Stop system may not
operate in the following cases:
. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light or other
warning lights on the instrument cluster are illuminated or flashing.
. You are driving the vehicle in a highelevation area.
Engine restart operational conditions
s07bh0107
In any one of the following cases, the
engine will be automatically restarted
even if the brake pedal is kept depressed.
. When slightly releasing the brake
pedal on road with a steep slope and
the vehicle begins rolling.
. When further depressing the brake
pedal.
Do not open the engine hood when the
Auto Start Stop system is in operation.
It may cause the vehicle to move while
on a slope, the steering wheel operation may become heavy, or the brakes
may not work well, which can create
dangerous conditions.
To ensure safety, the engine will not be
automatically restarted if the engine hood
is opened when the Auto Start Stop
system is in operation, even if the brake
pedal is released. In this case, check the
surrounding area and restart the engine
by normal operation.
Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light is illuminated, the
engine will not restart.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(353,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE
. When the Auto Start Stop system is in
operation, the brake pedal may feel
stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
. When the battery is discharged, the
engine will be automatically restarted
even if you keep the brake pedal
depressed.
. In the following cases, the length of
time that the engine is temporarily
stopped by the Auto Start Stop system
may be shorter.
– When the climate control system is
in operation.
– When the outside temperature is
high, or when it is low (because the
climate control system can no
longer maintain the set temperature).
– When consumption of electricity by
electrical components is high.
. When the engine is automatically
restarted by the Auto Start Stop
system, the power provided via the
accessory power outlet will be reduced. Depending on the connected
appliance, the power of the appliance
may temporarily turn off.
351
malfunction in the Auto Start Stop
system. When starting the engine
again after the Auto Start Stop warning light illuminates, if it is still illuminating, we recommend that you have
your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
The Auto Start Stop warning light will
illuminate in yellow if you open the engine
hood when the engine has been temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop
system.
In this case, to ensure safety, the engine
will not be automatically restarted, even if
you release the brake pedal. Use normal
operation to restart the engine.
To turn on/off the Auto Start
Stop system
s07bh0111
Auto Start Stop warning light
(yellow)
s07bh0109
S_703459-W
CAUTION
S_703501-W
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light
Auto Start Stop OFF switch
If the Auto Start Stop warning light is
illuminated in yellow, there may be a
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(354,1)
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Auto Start Stop OFF switch is
pressed, operation of the Auto Start Stop
system will be disabled. The Auto Start
Stop OFF indicator light on the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. If the switch
is pressed once more, the Auto Start Stop
system will turn on again. The Auto Start
Stop OFF indicator light will then turn off.
While the engine is temporarily stopped
by the system, if the Auto Start Stop
system turns off, the engine will be
restarted even if you do not release the
brake pedal.
NOTE
. If the engine is restarted when the
Auto Start Stop system is not operational and the ignition switch has been
turned to the “OFF” position, the Auto
Start Stop system will turn on again.
. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position when leaving the
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
the battery discharging.
Auto Start Stop No Activity
Detected indicator light
s07bh0110
DISPLAYING THE AUTO START
STOP SYSTEM STATUS
s07bh02
Approximate indications of the time that
the engine has been stopped by the Auto
Start Stop system and/or the amount of
fuel saved can be displayed on the
instrument cluster display. For details,
refer to “Basic Screens” �P191.
SYSTEM WARNING
s07bh03
So that it can be used safely and
comfortably, the Auto Start Stop system is
designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment
inside and outside the vehicle in addition
to driver operations, and to provide
various warnings to the driver via the
warning light and/or indicator light illuminating and a buzzer sounding. For details
about the warning light and indicator light,
refer to “Auto Start Stop Warning Light
(Yellow)” �P181.
Warning buzzer
s07bh0301
The buzzer will sound when the engine
hood is opened while the engine is
stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
When this occurs, the buzzer will stop
sounding when the following operations
are performed.
. The engine is restarted by normal
operation. (Refer to “Preparing to
Drive” �P309.)
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
Display of warning messages
s07bh0302
S_703461-W
If the operational conditions are not met
when the vehicle is stopped, the engine
will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No
Activity Detected indicator light will illuminate. It will turn off when the vehicle
begins to drive.
If a warning message is displayed on the
instrument cluster display while driving, a
malfunction may have occurred in the
Auto Start Stop system. In this case, the
Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate. Have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(355,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-17. SURROUND VIEW
MONITOR (If Equipped)
353
NOTE
s07bu
Surround View Monitor is a feature that
displays camera images on the center
information display to allow the driver to
check the blind spots of the vehicle. You
can use it to check the area in the front of
the vehicle, when starting the vehicle or
while driving, and the area to the rear of
the vehicle, when backing up. You can
also use it to check your surroundings
when parking the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never rely on only the Surround
View Monitor when driving the
vehicle. The image on the monitor
screen may appear different from
the vehicle’s actual surroundings.
If you drive the vehicle by viewing
only the monitor image, a collision
or an accident may occur. When
driving the vehicle, always remain
alert and the check the surrounding
traffic directly and by using the
mirrors.
If any of the following malfunctions occur
in the Surround View Monitor system,
refer to “Malfunctions of the Center
Information Display” �P454.
. The screen becomes blue or black.
. The screen does not switch to the
image of the Surround View Monitor.
. The camera status indicator is not
displayed on the screen.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY OF SURROUND VIEW
MONITOR
s07bu01
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, you can operate the select lever
and the view monitor switch to display the
image on the Surround View Monitor.
. Do not use the Surround View
Monitor in the following situations.
– You are driving on a dirt road or
a road covered in snow.
– The camera malfunctions (e.g.
the lens or bracket is broken).
– The outside mirrors are retracted.
– The front door is not fully
closed.
. If the outside temperature is low,
the monitor screen may become
dark or the image may become
dim. In particular, the image of a
moving object may appear distorted or disappear from the
screen. Always remain alert and
check the surrounding traffic directly when driving.
S_703506-W
View monitor switch
View icon
Top view screen
View screen
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(356,1)
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
The top view screen of the Surround View
Monitor is always displayed when it is
active. The view screen can be changed
to Side/Front/Rear/3D by pressing the
view monitor switch or the view icon.
When the select lever is in the
“R” position
s07bu0105
When the select lever is in the
“P” position
s07bu0104
S_703508-W
S_703507-W
Front wide view icon
Front view icon
Side view icon
3D view icon
Rear wide view icon
Rear view icon
AUTO mode icon
Side view icon
Rear wide view icon
Rear view icon
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system ON/OFF icon
When the select lever is moved to “R”, the
image in the rearward direction is displayed. Pressing the view monitor switch
or touching the view icon while the image
of the rear camera is displayed will switch
the screen view.
When the view monitor switch is pressed
while the select lever is in the “P” position,
the surround view monitor is displayed.
Pressing the view monitor switch or
touching the view icon while the image of
the camera is displayed will switch the
screen view.
NOTE
Touch the AUTO mode icon to turn on the
AUTO mode. The AUTO mode indicator
will illuminate. In AUTO mode, the Surround View Monitor automatically turns
on when the vehicle speed decreases to 9
mph (15 km/h) or less and displays the
previously shown view screen. To turn off
AUTO mode, touch the AUTO mode icon
again. The AUTO mode indicator will turn
off.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(357,1)
355
STARTING AND OPERATING
“EyeSight/Driving Assistance”
�P202.
When the select lever is in the
“N” or “D” position
s07bu0106
7
S_703510-W
Front wide view icon
Front view icon
Side view icon
3D view icon
AUTO mode icon
S_703509-W
Original screen
Side view screen
Rear wide view screen
Rear view screen
: Shift the select lever
: Press the view monitor switch
NOTE
. If you turn off the Surround View
Monitor or use it to operate another
function, the next time the image is
displayed, the previously displayed
screen will be shown. However, if the
side view screen is displayed when
you turn off the Surround View Monitor, the next time the monitor image is
displayed, the rear view screen or the
rear wide view screen will be shown.
. When “Camera Off Delay” is on, the
rear-view image will be displayed on
the center information display for a
certain period after the select lever is
shifted from the “R” position to another
position (other than the “P” position).
To turn the function on and off, refer to
When the view monitor switch is pressed
while the select lever is in the “N” or “D”
position, the surround view monitor is
displayed.
Pressing the view monitor switch or
touching the view icon while the image of
the camera is displayed will switch the
screen view.
NOTE
. If you turn off the Surround View
Monitor or use it to operate another
function, the next time the image is
displayed, the previously displayed
screen will be shown.
. Touch the AUTO mode icon to turn on
the AUTO mode. The AUTO mode
indicator will illuminate. In AUTO
mode, the Surround View Monitor
automatically turns on when the vehicle speed decreases to 9 mph (15
km/h) or less and displays the previously shown view screen. To turn off
AUTO mode, touch the AUTO mode
icon again. The AUTO mode indicator
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(358,1)
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
will turn off.
HOW TO CANCEL SURROUND
VIEW MONITOR
HOW TO VIEW THE CAMERA
IMAGES
s07bu03
s07bu02
There are several ways to cancel Surround View Monitor.
Manual cancellation
s07bu0201
The Surround View Monitor will be canceled by either of the following operations.
. Press the view monitor switch until the
original screen is displayed (when the
select lever is other than the “R”
position).
. Move the select lever to a position
other than the “R” position (when the
select lever is in the “R” position).
. Touch .
S_703481-W
Cameras
The camera image displays guiding lines
that provide information on the distance
and direction of travel of your vehicle, as
well as information on any vehicles you
are approaching.
Automatic cancellation
s07bu0202
If any of the following conditions are met,
the Surround View Monitor is canceled
automatically.
. When the select lever is other than in
the “R” position
– About 3 minutes have elapsed
since you pressed the view monitor
switch to access the Surround
View Monitor.
. When the select lever is not in the “R”
or “P” position
– The vehicle accelerates to 13 mph
(20 km/h) or more.
– You depress the brake pedal and
pull up the electronic parking brake
switch to apply the parking brake.
. When the select lever is in the “D” or
“R” position
– The select lever is shifted to the “P”
position.
CAUTION
. When you drive the vehicle, do not
rely only on the guiding lines. Make
sure that you check your surroundings directly.
. The position and other information
provided by the guiding lines may
differ from the actual distance of
objects from the vehicle if it is tilting
at an angle relative to the road
surface due to the number of
passengers or the distribution of
cargo on board the vehicle.
NOTE
. Top view and rear view only: The
display of the predicted course line
linked to the steering angle can be
turned on/off by operating “Steering
Angle Guides” in the center information display. To turn the function on
and off, refer to “EyeSight/Driving
Assistance” �P202.
. The camera image may be hard to see
in the following situations. This is not a
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(359,1)
357
STARTING AND OPERATING
.
.
.
.
malfunction.
– Vehicle surroundings are dark
(such as at night).
– Ambient temperature outside the
vehicle is high or low.
– There is water or humidity on the
lens (such as in rainy weather).
– There is foreign material (such as
mud) on or near the camera.
– Sunlight or a headlight beam
shines directly shines toward the
camera lens.
Under an artificial light such as a
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp
or mercury lamp, the lighted portion
may appear to flicker (flicker phenomenon).
When the display is cold, the image
may leave traces or become darker
than usual, causing a difficulty in
viewing the screen. When driving your
vehicle, make sure that you check
your surroundings directly for traffic.
The following conditions may affect
the appearance of the screen, but any
resulting image distortion on the
screen does not indicate a malfunction.
– When humidity is high on a rainy
day, the camera lens becomes
foggy.
– When driving at night, the light from
a vehicle or building located ahead
shines in the direction of the
camera.
– When the vehicle is in a dark place
or when driving at night, the camera image may be adjusted to
make image noise less visible.
Therefore, the image may look like a
monochromatic image or the image
colors may differ from the actual
colors. The image sharpness in the
center and in the four corners of the
screen may differ. This is not a
malfunction.
The image of the surround view
monitor may appear to be slightly
different from the actual color of the
objects.
3D view
s07bu0301
S_703480-W
Vehicle icon
3D view icon
7
The 3D view displays the area around the
vehicle.
Top view
s07bu0302
S_703275-W
Vehicle icon
Predicted course line*
*: When the select lever is in the “R” position.
The top view displays an image of the
vehicle’s surroundings from above the
vehicle. This view is useful for checking
the vehicle’s surroundings when you are
driving.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(360,1)
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
Front view/front wide view
Rear view/rear wide view
s07bu0303
S_703482-W
Front wide view icon
Front view icon
Guiding lines
The guiding lines that indicate the width
and the front end of your vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
Side view
s07bu0304
s07bu0305
S_703484-W
Rear wide view icon
Rear view icon
Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
Vehicle centerline
Dynamic guidelines
Approaching vehicle icon (Rear Cross
Traffic Warning (RCTW))
The help lines are a guide to help you
judge distances based on the screen
image.
S_703483-W
Side view icon
Front-of-vehicle guiding line
Side-of-vehicle guiding line
Center-of-front-tire guiding line
The guiding lines that indicate the width
and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(361,1)
359
STARTING AND OPERATING
RANGE OF SURROUND VIEW
MONITOR
s07bu04
USING THE CAMERA
s07bu05
CAUTION
Obey the following instructions to
prevent a system malfunction.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the camera such as by hitting it with
an object. Striking the camera can
change the mounting angle.
S_703279-W
Camera to be used
Range of displayed image
Front camera
Side camera (right-hand side)
Rear camera
Side camera (left-hand side)
Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the vehicle
Vehicle overall length
Approx. 8 ft (2.5 m) from the vehicle
Vehicle overall width
WARNING
The range that can be viewed with the
camera is limited. Always make sure
that you check your surroundings
directly when the vehicle is in motion
and proceed slowly. If you do not, it
may cause an accident or injury.
NOTE
. The range of the displayed image may
differ depending on the status of your
vehicle or of the road surface.
. Because the Surround View Monitor
system uses a specially designed
lens, the sense of distance in the
displayed image is different from the
actual distance.
. The camera unit is a waterproof
structure. Do not attempt to remove, disassemble or modify the
unit.
. Do not vigorously rub the camera
lens or polish it using a hard brush
or abrasive compounds. The lens
may be scratched, which can affect
the camera image.
. The camera lens is made of glass
or plastic. Do not allow any organic
solvent, body wax, oil film remover
or glass coating agent to become
attached on the lens surface. If any
becomes attached, remove it immediately.
. Do not expose the camera lens to
any sudden temperature change
such as spraying hot water on it in
cold weather.
. Do not apply the water jet of a high
pressure washer to the camera or
the surrounding area when cleaning the vehicle. The force of the
water pressure can dislodge the
camera. Also, water may enter
inside the camera and cause a
malfunction.
. If the camera is exposed to any
impact, it can lead to a malfunction.
Have the camera inspected by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
. Do not use a steam cleaner under
any circumstances. Some types of
steam cleaners inject hot steam.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(362,1)
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
. The camera surface may be damaged by a flying stone.
e.g., when the front view screen is displayed
NOTE
If the camera lens is covered in dirt, the
system will not be able to produce a sharp
image. If there is foreign material on the
camera, such as water drops, snow or
mud, clean it with water and wipe away
any moisture with a soft cloth. If the
camera is heavily soiled, wash it using a
neutral detergent.
S_703514-W
FRONT CROSS TRAFFIC INFORMATION (If Equipped)
s07bu06
While the Surround View Monitor is being
displayed, the presence of vehicles approaching from the left and right is
indicated by icons. If the select lever is set
to the “D” position or the “M” position and
the system detects an approaching vehicle while the vehicle is stopped, the icon
will illuminate.
If the system detects an approaching
vehicle (including motorcycle) while the
vehicle is traveling at a speed of approximately 13 mph (20 km/h) or less, the
icon will flash and alert the driver using a
warning message, an alarm sound, and
the EyeSight Assist Monitor display.
For details about the EyeSight Assist
Monitor, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
When there is a vehicle approaching
from the left
When there is a vehicle approaching
from the right
WARNING
. The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Before you start driving,
check the vehicle surroundings
with the brake depressed.
. Depending on the vehicle condition
or the surrounding environment,
the radar sensors ability to detect
objects may become unstable.
. The system is not activated when
the speed of an approaching
vehicle is less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
or more than 37 mph (60 km/h).
NOTE
When the AUTO mode icon is activated
on the Surround View Monitor and the
system detects a vehicle, only the approaching vehicle icon will blink.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(363,1)
361
STARTING AND OPERATING
To turn On/Off the Front Cross
Traffic Information
Areas of the vehicle that cannot be repaired
s07bu0601
To turn the Front Cross Traffic Information
on and off, operating “Brake and Warning” in the center information display.
Refer to “EyeSight/Driving Assistance”
�P202.
S_703517-W
CAUTION
S_703515-W
When the Front Cross Traffic Information
function is turned OFF, the Front Cross
Traffic Braking OFF indicator on the
instrument cluster display will illuminate.
Handling of front radar sensors
s07bu0602
Front radar sensors
To ensure correct operation of the
Front Cross Traffic Information, obey
the following precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the radar sensors. We recommend
that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
S_703516-W
There are two radar sensors mounted
inside the front bumper, one on each side
of the vehicle.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
radar sensors to strong impacts. If
a sensor becomes misaligned, a
system malfunction may occur that
affects the functions that detect
vehicles in the detection areas. If
any strong impact is applied to the
bumper, contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(364,1)
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area around
the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer for assistance.
7-18. REAR VIEW CAMERA
(If Equipped)
s07br
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC
WARNING (RCTW)
s07bu07
When the rear view is displayed, the icon
flashes when the Rear Cross Traffic
Warning (RCTW) detects a vehicle approaching on the left or right from behind
the vehicle. For details about Rear Cross
Traffic Warning (RCTW), refer to “Rear
Cross Traffic Warning (RCTW)” �P368.
e.g., when the rear view screen is displayed
S_703485-W
A rear view camera is attached to the rear
gate. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position and the select lever is set to
“R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image behind the
vehicle on the center information display.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses a
wide-angle lens, the image on the
monitor is different from the actual
view in terms of distance.
S_703518-W
When there is a vehicle approaching
from the left
When there is a vehicle approaching
from the right
HOW TO GET THE SOURCE
CODE THAT USES OPEN
SOURCE SOFTWARE
s07bu09
Free Open-Source Software Information:
This product uses Free Open-Source
Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL:
http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/n02yrf1e
. Since the range of the image on the
monitor is limited, always check the
rear view and the surrounding area
with your eyes and mirrors, and
move backward at a slow speed.
Moving backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If smoke
comes out or you smell a strange
odor, stop using the rear view
camera immediately. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(365,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION
. When washing your vehicle with a
high-pressure washer, do not allow
water to touch the camera directly.
Entry of water in the camera lens
may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen
on the camera, you must be very
careful when removing it. Otherwise, damage to the camera may
cause a fire or electric shock. Pour
water or lukewarm water over the
camera to remove mud and ice,
and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure to
use a fuse with the specified rating.
Use of a fuse with a different rating
may result in a malfunction.
. If you use the rear view camera for
a long time while the engine is not
operated, the battery may become
completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry
cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has a hard coating to
help prevent scratches. However,
.
.
.
.
363
when washing the vehicle or cleaning
the camera lens, be careful not to
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
lens. The image quality of the rear
view camera may deteriorate.
Strong light shined on the camera lens
may develop vertical lines around the
light source. This is not a malfunction.
Under the fluorescent light, the display
may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
If any of the following malfunctions
occur in the rear view camera system,
refer to “Malfunctions of the Center
Information Display” �P454.
– The screen becomes blue or black.
– The screen does not switch to the
image of the rear view camera.
– The camera status indicator is not
displayed on the screen.
HOW TO USE THE REAR VIEW
CAMERA
s07br01
When the select lever is set to “R”, the
rear view camera automatically displays
the rear view image from the vehicle.
When the lever is set to other positions,
the image before setting to “R” is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle inside mirror or the
outside mirror.
. When “Camera Off Delay” is on, the
rear view image will be displayed on
the center information display for a
certain period of time after the select
lever is shifted to a position other than
the “P” position from “R”. To turn the
function on and off, refer to “EyeSight/
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(366,1)
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Assistance” �P202.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light is shining directly on
the camera lens (occasionally,
there are vertical lines on the
screen).
VIEWING RANGE ON THE
SCREEN
s07br02
Image from camera
S_703163-MW
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view
camera looks shorter than the actual
distance.
Range of view
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with the
rear view camera is limited. Always be
sure to check with your eyes when
moving backward and proceed slowly.
Otherwise, it may cause an accident
or injury.
Range of view
S_703164-MW
Image from camera
S_703214-W
S_703165-MW
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(367,1)
365
STARTING AND OPERATING
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projection cannot be seen on the screen.
HELP LINES
s07br03
The help lines are a guide to help you
realize the actual distance from the
screen image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.
. The actual position may be different from the indication of the help
lines.
. Differences may occur due to the
number of passengers or the
loaded cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
inclined against the road, the
indication is different from the
actual position.
S_703583-W
Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
Vehicle centerline
Dynamic guidelines
Approaching vehicle icon (Rear Cross
Traffic Warning (RCTW)) (if equipped)
NOTE
When “Steering Angle Guides” is off, the
dynamic guidelines will disappear on the
center information display. To turn the
dynamic guidelines on and off, refer to
“EyeSight/Driving Assistance” �P202.
Difference between screen image and actual road
s07br0301
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.
When the select lever is set to “R”, the
monitor screen displays the help lines
together with the rear view image.
NOTE
If you shift to the “R” range within several
seconds after turning on the ignition
switch, the warning message may not be
displayed. Wait for several seconds after
turning on the ignition switch before
shifting to the “R” range. Then, the
warning message will be displayed.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(368,1)
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
When there is an upward slope at the
back:
Feature of distance marker
s07br0302
S_703283-W
S_703281-MW
3 ft (1 m) line
10 ft (3 m) line
3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
When there is a downward slope at the
back:
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or another
object close behind, distance cannot be
correctly displayed.
S_703282-MW
3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther than
the actual distance as in an upward slope.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(369,1)
367
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-19. BSW/RCTW
s07bm
The BSW/RCTW consists of rear corner
radar sensors with Blind Spot Warning
and Rear Cross Traffic Warning.
These functions of BSW/RCTW are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles
to the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver in changing lanes or reversing
safely by monitoring the rear and side
areas of the vehicle. However, you
cannot rely on this system alone in
assuring the safety during a lane
change or reversing. Overconfidence
in this system could result in an
accident and lead to serious injury or
death. Since the system operation has
various limitations, the flashing or
illumination of the BSW/RCTW approach indicator light may be delayed,
or the warning buzzer may be delayed
or inoperative, even if there is a
vehicle traveling in a neighboring lane
or approaching your vehicle from
either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas of
the vehicle.
. When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, etc.
. When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
SYSTEM FEATURES
s07bm01
BSW/RCTW consists of the following
functions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on a
neighboring lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving
the vehicle (Blind Spot Warning)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the
vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Warning)
The system uses rear radar sensors for
the following features.
NOTE
The BSW/RCTW radar sensor is approved under the radio wave related laws
of each country. For details, refer to
“Certification for the BSW/RCTW”
�P550.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
s07bm0101
CAUTION
In the following cases, turn off the
BSW/RCTW system. The system may
not operate properly due to blocked
radar waves.
. When towing a load
. When a bicycle carrier or other item
is fitted to the rear of the vehicle
S_703284-MW
Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the
presence of vehicles in its blind spot.
. If the system detects a vehicle in its
blind spot, it warns the driver by
illuminating the BSW/RCTW ap– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(370,1)
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
proach indicator light(s) on the outside
mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSW/
RCTW approach indicator light is
illuminating, the system warns the
driver of dangers by flashing the BSW/
RCTW approach indicator light on the
outside mirror(s).
Lane Change Assist (LCA):
Rear Cross Traffic Warning
(RCTW)
s07bm0103
S_703286-MW
Operating range
S_703285-MW
Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes.
. If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes, it warns the driver
of dangers by illuminating the BSW/
RCTW approach indicator light(s) on
the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSW/
RCTW approach indicator light is
illuminating, the system warns the
driver of dangers by flashing the BSW/
RCTW approach indicator light on the
outside mirror(s).
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side
when driving in reverse. This feature
helps the driver check the rear and side
areas of the vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving
backward, it warns the driver of dangers
in the following way.
. The BSW/RCTW approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s)
flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the center information display.
Limitations of the detectability of
RCTW:
Since the detectability of RCTW is limited,
the RCTW may not operate properly in
angled parking.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(371,1)
369
STARTING AND OPERATING
Example 1
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle is
passing in front of your vehicle. Always be
sure to check the surroundings with your
eyes when reversing the vehicle.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
s07bm10
S_703287-MW
The detection range of the rear radar
sensors
Area out of detection range of the rear
radar sensors
Vehicle that may not be detected
Parked vehicle
WARNING
An approaching vehicle may not be
detected because the detection range
is limited by the parked vehicle .
Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.
Example 2
The BSW/RCTW will operate when all of
the following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSW/RCTW warning indicator
and BSW/RCTW OFF indicator are
turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above
7 mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The select lever is in the “R” position
(RCTW only).
The BSW/RCTW will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSW/RCTW OFF indicator appears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSW/RCTW
OFF indicator does not appear (except when reversing).
NOTE
S_703288-MW
The detection range of the rear radar
sensors
Vehicle that may be detected
. In the following cases, the BSW/
RCTW will stop operating and the
BSW/RCTW warning indicator will
appear.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSW/RCTW
approach indicator light
. If the BSW/RCTW warning indicator
appears, exercise proper caution. For
details, refer to “BSW/RCTW Warning
Indicator” �P373.
. In the following cases, the BSW/
RCTW will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSW/
RCTW OFF indicator will appear.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the radar sensor is
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(372,1)
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the rear radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no
objects around (such as in a
desert) for a prolonged period of
time
– When the temperature around the
rear radar sensors increases excessively due to long driving on
uphill grades in the summer, etc.
– When the temperature around the
rear radar sensors becomes extremely low
– When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle voltage exceeds
the battery voltage rating
The BSW/RCTW will resume operation once these conditions are corrected, and the BSW/RCTW OFF
indicator will disappear. However, if
the BSW/RCTW OFF indicator appears for a prolonged period of time,
have the system inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The detectability of the rear radar
sensors is restricted. The BSW/
RCTW detection may be impaired and
the system may not operate properly
under the following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around the
rear radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres to
the rear bumper surface around
the rear radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the rear radar sensors
on the rear bumper
– During adverse weather conditions
such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such as
snow-covered roads and through
puddles
. The rear radar sensors may not detect
or may have difficulty detecting the
following vehicles and objects.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that the
radar may not reflect (vehicles with
lower body height such as a trailer
with no cargo and sports cars)
– Vehicles that are not approaching
your vehicle even though they are
in the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or
beside your vehicle when reversing) (The system determines the
presence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the rear
radar sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving in parallel at almost the same speed as your
vehicle for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles traveling at a significantly
lower speed that you are trying to
overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.
BSW/RCTW APPROACH INDICATOR LIGHT/WARNING BUZZER
s07bm03
While the BSW/RCTW is active, the
following item(s) will operate to alert the
driver:
. The BSW/RCTW approach indicator
light (when there are vehicles in the
neighboring lanes).
. The BSW/RCTW approach indicator
light and warning buzzer (when a
vehicle is approaching from the left or
right side while your vehicle is reversing)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(373,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
BSW/RCTW approach indicator
light
371
Vehicle detected in neighboring lane indicator
s07bm0301
S_703584-W
S_703175-W
It is mounted on each side of the outside
mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate when a
vehicle approaching from behind is detected.
The indicator light will flash to warn the
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
. While the indicator light is illuminating,
if the turn signal lever is operated
toward the side in which this light
turned on
. When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side
When a vehicle is detected (white area
with yellow outline is indicated)
When the turn signal lever is being
operated while a vehicle is detected
(yellow area is indicated)
Your vehicle indicator*1
When your vehicle indicator*1 is displayed, the instrument cluster also shows
the vehicle detection status of the neighboring lane.
*1: For details regarding your vehicle indicator,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for
the EyeSight system.
NOTE
When your vehicle indicator is turned off
or your vehicle is reversing, the instrument cluster will not display the vehicle
detected in neighboring lane indicator.
BSW/RCTW approach indicator light
dimming function:
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSW/RCTW approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty seeing the
BSW/RCTW approach indicator light
under the following conditions.
– When sunlight shines directly on it
– When the headlight beams from a
vehicle traveling behind shines
directly on it
. While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position,
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(374,1)
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
even if the headlights are turned on,
the brightness of the BSW/RCTW
approach indicator light will not be
reduced. For details about the illumination brightness control dial, refer to
“Illumination Brightness Control”
�P161.
BSW/RCTW approach warning
buzzer (only when reversing)
s07bm0302
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSW/RCTW approach
indicator light to warn the driver of
dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Sound” �P200.
Safety tips regarding the BSW/
RCTW approach indicator light/
warning buzzer
s07bm0303
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSW/RCTW approach indicator light
and the warning buzzer may be
delayed or the system may fail to issue
these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the
neighboring lane from a lane next
to the neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and
downhill grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring
lane are driving on the far side of
each lane.
– When several narrowly-spaced
vehicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighboring lane
– Immediately after the BSW/RCTW
is activated by touching “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic
Warning (RCTW)”
– Immediately after the select lever is
shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the
BSW/RCTW approach indicator light
and the warning buzzer may be
delayed or the system may fail to issue
these warnings under the following
conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
S_703176-W
. The BSW/RCTW approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close
to solid objects on the road or road
side (such as guardrails, tunnels and
sidewalls).
. When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection, the BSW/RCTW approach indicator light may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSW/RCTW
approach indicator light may flash and
the warning buzzer may sound.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(375,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes
away from your vehicle.
– When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the
corresponding vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
away drives on the near side of its
lane from your vehicle
373
System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
s07bm0802
BSW/RCTW OFF INDICATOR
s07bm08
System temporary stops
s07bm0801
S_703525-W
BSW/RCTW temporary stop message
due to reduced radar sensitivity
BSW/RCTW OFF indicator
This display appears when the detectability of the rear radar sensors is
reduced. Once the condition is corrected,
the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will
disappear.
S_703524-W
BSW/RCTW temporary stop message
BSW/RCTW OFF indicator
This display appears when the system is
used at extremely high or low temperatures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will
disappear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
BSW/RCTW WARNING INDICATOR
s07bm04
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
S_703526-W
BSW/RCTW malfunction message
At first, this message will appear
Then this message will appear
BSW/RCTW warning indicator
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(376,1)
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
HANDLING OF REAR RADAR
SENSORS
s07bm07
TO TURN ON/OFF THE BSW/
RCTW
s07bm09
To turn the BSW/RCTW system on and
off, operate the center information display. Refer to “EyeSight/Driving Assistance” �P202.
BSW/RCTW OFF indicator
S_703487-W
Rear radar sensors
The rear radar sensors, one on each side
of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
CAUTION
S_703355-W
When the BSW/RCTW system is turned
OFF, the BSW/RCTW OFF indicator on
the instrument cluster display will illuminate.
NOTE
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, the last known status
of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position with the BSW/
RCTW deactivated, the BSW/RCTW
remains deactivated the next time the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. When the BSW/RCTW system is
turned off, some EyeSight system
functions will turn off. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for
EyeSight system.
S_703488-W
To ensure correct operation of the
BSW/RCTW, observe the following
precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface
near the rear radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the rear radar sensors. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
rear radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the
rear radar sensors.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(377,1)
375
STARTING AND OPERATING
. Do not expose the bumper near the
rear radar sensors to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may
occur, including the inability to
detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to
contact your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.
. Do not disassemble the rear radar
sensors.
NOTE
If the rear radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area around
the rear radar sensors requires repair,
paintwork or replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer for assistance.
7-20. REVERSE AUTOMATIC
BRAKING (RAB) SYSTEM
s07bn
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a
system designed to help avoid collisions
or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is
detected in the reversing direction, the
system will notify the driver with a warning
sound and may activate the vehicle’s
brakes automatically.
WARNING
. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
is not a system intended to replace
the driver’s responsibility to check
their surroundings for vehicles or
obstacles to avoid a collision.
. The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Before reversing, be sure to
first depress the brake pedal and
visually check the surroundings.
. There are some cases in which the
vehicle cannot avoid collision, because the system operation has
limitations. The warning sound or
automatic braking may be delayed
or may not operate at all even
when an obstacle is present.
. Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking function to OFF when the
vehicle is on the free roller or on the
chassis dynamometer. Otherwise,
the vehicle may move and it may
cause an accident.
. The system is not designed to
detect people (including children),
animals or other moving objects.
. Depending on the vehicle condition
or the surrounding environment,
the sonar sensor’s ability to detect
objects may become unstable.
. When an attachment part (trailer
hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper
guard) is installed on the rear of the
vehicle, turn off the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB). If this func– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(378,1)
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
tion is on when an attachment or a
similar part is installed, it may result
in a system malfunction that
causes an accident resulting in
serious damage, injury or death.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system records and stores the following
data when automatic braking operates. It
does not record conversations, personal
information or other audio data.
. Distance from the object
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status
. Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position
. Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted by
SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehicle
research and development. SUBARU
and third parties contracted by SUBARU
will not disclose or provide the acquired
data to any other third party except under
the following conditions.
. The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based on a
court order or other legally enforceable request.
. Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(379,1)
377
STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) SYSTEM OVERVIEW
s07bn01
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate the following 2 functions
using 4 sonar sensors.
. Proximity Warning Detection function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rearward and warns the
driver by warning message on the center information display and warning beeps.
. Automatic Braking function
The Automatic Braking function detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a
collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and controls the braking to reduce
damage.
7
S_703293-MW
When reversing
When either strong automatic braking
or torque control is applied to prevent
collision (in this case, short warning
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound)
When the vehicle is stopped by the
system (in this case, the continuous
beep will remain sounding)
Object (e.g., a wall)
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(380,1)
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
Detecting range
s07bn0101
S_703356-W
S_703294-W
Detecting range (width): Approximately
6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
Range that the system cannot detect:
Approximately 12 in (30 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle
Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad
crossing and you are trying to escape
by reversing through the crossing
gate, the system may recognize the
crossing gate as an obstacle and
brake may activate. In this case,
remain calm and either continue to
depress the accelerator pedal or
cancel the system. To cancel the
system, refer to “Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Operation” �P386.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
s07bn02
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate when all of the
following conditions are met.
Proximity Warning Detection OFF indicator
RAB OFF indicator
RAB warning indicator
EyeSight warning indicator
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
. The RAB warning indicator is off.
. The RAB OFF indicator is off.
. The select lever is in the “R” position.
. Proximity Warning Detection OFF indicator is off.
Proximity Warning Detection function:
. Proximity Warning Detection is set to
“ON”.
. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph
(0 to 15 km/h).
Automatic Braking function:
. Automatic Braking is set to “ON”.
. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph
(1.5 to 15 km/h).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system will
not operate. Promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indicator is
illuminated.
– The RAB warning indicator is illuminated.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(381,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system
cannot be operated.
– The
(EyeSight Temporary Stop
indicator: White) is illuminated, and
the messages corresponding to
the EyeSight temporary stop are
displayed on the instrument cluster
display. For details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for
the EyeSight system.
– The RAB OFF indicator is illuminated.
. In the following cases, the functions
may not be able to properly work.
Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
applied to the sonar sensors or the
rear bumper.
– The rear bumper is modified.
– The rear bumper has been removed and attached.
– The ground clearance is changed
due to the vehicle’s loading condition or modification.
– There is damage to the sonar
sensors or the rear bumper.
– The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper
is deformed.
. On a steep hill, the system’s automatic
braking ability will be reduced.
. The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard braking
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is
less than approximately 3 mph (5
km/h). However, the system does not
guarantee that the vehicle will be able
to avoid collisions in any situation.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the driver’s operation may be prioritized. In this case,
automatic braking will not operate.
. In the following situations, the system
may not be able to detect an object
correctly:
– When the vehicle is approaching
diagonally to an object
– When the steering wheel is turned
greatly
379
. The system may not be able to detect
and apply the brake with the following
objects.
– Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor.
– Objects that are too close to the
rear bumper when the select lever
is set to the “R” position.
– Objects with a surface which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor such as a
chain link fence or bicycle.
. Objects the system is not designed to
detect and apply brake.
– Pedestrians.
– Moving objects including moving
vehicles.
– Objects which absorbs sound
waves such as cloth or snow.
– Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle.
– Objects that are low to the ground
such as parking blocks.
– Objects that are high above the
ground such as objects hanging
from above.
– Objects that are out of range of the
center of the vehicle in the horizontal direction.
– Objects that are not perpendicular
to the ground.
– The surface of the object is uneven
or wavy.
. When reversing the vehicle, the functions may not be able to work properly
or may cause a system malfunction if
the following conditions exist.
High frequency sound from other
sources are nearby:
– Horn sound from another vehicle.
– Engine sound from other vehicles.
– Sound of an air brake.
– Vehicle detection equipment or a
sonar from another vehicle.
– A sound wave with a frequency
similar to the vehicle’s system is
transmitted near by.
– A vehicle equipped with the same
system is reversing toward your
reversing direction.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(382,1)
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
Weather conditions:
– Extremely high or extremely low
temperatures in which the area
near the sonar sensor becomes
too hot or too cold to operate.
– The sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors are
exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water.
– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
– Air is moving rapidly such as when
a strong wind is blowing.
Parts attached to the rear bumper near
the sonar sensors:
– Commercial electronic parts (fog
light, fender pole, radio antenna)
are attached.
– Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or speaker,
are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the
sonar sensors or the rear bumper
near the sonar sensors.
– The vehicle is significantly inclined.
– The ground clearance is significantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
loading condition, etc.
– When the sonar sensor is misaligned due to a collision or an
accident.
Surrounding environment:
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing direction.
– When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area.
– When reversing in an area where
objects or walls are adjacent to the
vehicle such as narrow tunnels,
narrow bridges, narrow roads or
narrow garages.
– Wheel track or hole is present in
the ground of the reversing direction.
– When reversing over a drainage
cover (grating cover).
S_703186-MW
S_703187-MW
– The path of the reversing direction
is inclined such as on a steep
uphill.
– When reversing downhill.
S_703188-MW
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(383,1)
381
STARTING AND OPERATING
proximity, closest proximity.
NOTE
It may take time to display the wall and
sound warning beeps after the object was
recognized by the Proximity Warning
Detection function.
S_703189-MW
– A curb or step is present in the
reversing direction.
– Reversing in a garage with a low
ceiling or a tunnel.
– There is a patch of snow rearward.
– There is a puddle of water.
– There is an obstacle that is next to
an object.
– Going back along a wall.
– The area where the road starts
touching dirt and snow
– When reversing on an uneven
road.
. In circumstances such as the following, it may not be possible to avoid a
collision even when the system operates normally.
– Roads are slippery.
– The tire air pressure is not correct.
– The tires have become worn.
– Tire chains are installed.
– Tires which are not the designated
size are installed.
– Emergency repairs were performed using a puncture repair kit.
– The suspension was modified.
– Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illuminated.
7
PROXIMITY WARNING DETECTION FUNCTION
s07bn03
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system is in operation, audible
warning beeps will sound to warn the
driver of a potential collision in 4 levels:
long proximity, medium proximity, short
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(384,1)
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
Guideline of detecting range
Alert level
Range of detected object*
Distance indicator
Alarm pattern
Long proximity alert
(object detected)
24 to 43 in (60 to 110 cm)
Green
Short beeps
Medium proximity alert
(approaching the object)
18 to 24 in (45 to 60 cm)
Yellow
Fast beeps
Short proximity alert
(approaching closer to
the object)
12 to 18 in (30 to 45 cm)
Orange
Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert
(too close to the object)
12 in (30 cm) or less
Red
Continuous beep
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(385,1)
383
STARTING AND OPERATING
Obstacle detected and alert level
Center information display (models with
Surround View Monitor)
s07bn0301
When an object is detected in the reversing direction, the range of detected
object will be shown on the center
information display and instrument cluster display.
A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
Instrument cluster display
S_703588-W
Long proximity alert (green)
Medium proximity alert (yellow)
Short proximity alert (orange)
Closest proximity alert (red)
Long proximity alert (object detected)
S_703489-W
Long proximity alert (green)
Medium proximity alert (yellow)
Short proximity alert (orange)
Closest proximity alert (red)
The alert levels are indicated on the
center information display as shown in
the following.
S_703589-W
Green: 24 to 43 in (60 to 110 cm) or
more
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(386,1)
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
AUTOMATIC BRAKING FUNCTION OPERATION
s07bn08
Object close behind warning
s07bn0801
Automatic braking warning
S_703590-W
Yellow: 18 to 24 in (45 to 60 cm)
Short proximity alert (approaching the
object closer)
S_703591-W
S_703595-W
Orange: 12 to 18 in (30 to 45 cm)
Closest proximity alert (too close to the
object)
Surround View Monitor
Rear view camera
Warning message
If the system determine the risk of
collision with the object. Short warning
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound and either strong automatic braking or torque control will be applied to
prevent collision.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the instrument cluster display.
S_703592-W
Red: 12 in (30 cm) or less
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(387,1)
385
STARTING AND OPERATING
Depress brake pedal warning
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal immediately
after the system stops the vehicle by
automatic braking. Depending on the
conditions of the road surface and
tires, the vehicle may not remain
stopped, possibly leading to an accident.
After the vehicle is stopped by
the system
s07bn0802
7
S_703596-W
Surround View Monitor
Rear view camera
Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal
is depressed, a message will be displayed on the center information display
and the continuous beep will remain
sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE
The Proximity Warning Detection function
and Automatic Braking function are different in operation conditions. Therefore,
there are cases in which only one of these
functions will activate.
S_703358-W
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the
system will temporarily stop operating.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the vehicle
has been stopped by the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system,
brake control is released and the
electronic parking brake operates. For
details about releasing the parking
brake, refer to “Electronic Parking
Brake” �P339.
– When 2 minutes pass after the
vehicle is stopped
– When any door is opened
. The Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system may stop operating
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(388,1)
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
temporarily in the following cases and
the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the
sonar sensors or the rear bumper
near the sonar sensors.
– Objects are too close to the rear
bumper when the select lever is set
to the “R” position.
– The system detects sounds of a
similar frequency to the RAB sonar.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF mode is selected.
– The electric power steering system
is in the overheating prevention
status because the steering wheel
has been operated while the vehicle is at a standstill or driving at an
extremely slow speed.
CANCELING THE REVERSE
AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)
SYSTEM OPERATION
s07bn04
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system can be temporarily canceled by
any of the following operations.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the
brake pedal is depressed.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed
continuously (In this case, limited
acceleration will be canceled and the
vehicle will continue reversing.)
. The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the object
is no longer detected.
REVERSE AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) SYSTEM ON/OFF
SETTING
s07bn05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be set by operating the center
information display.
S_703598-W
ON setting key of Automatic Braking
function
OFF setting key of Automatic Braking
function
ON setting key of the Proximity Warning Detection function
OFF setting key of the Proximity
Warning Detection function
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch the ON setting key to turn the
setting OFF.
When the OFF setting is shown, the
corresponding setting is OFF.
Touch the OFF setting key to turn the
setting ON.
When the Automatic Braking function or
the Proximity Warning Detection function
is turned OFF, the following indicator(s)
will illuminate.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(389,1)
387
STARTING AND OPERATING
position, the Proximity Warning Detection will turn on automatically.
Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the center information
display.
. Warning volume
. Proximity Warning Detection
For details, refer to “Sound” �P200 and
“EyeSight/Driving Assistance” �P202.
S_703359-W
RAB WARNING INDICATOR
s07bn07
Proximity Warning Detection OFF indicator
RAB OFF indicator
7
The RAB OFF indicator or the Proximity
Warning Detection OFF indicator will turn
off when the corresponding function is
turned ON.
NOTE
. When the settings cannot be changed,
the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed
out.
. The ON/OFF setting key may be
grayed out if the Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system malfunctions,
etc. In this case, turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position and then
turn it to the “ON” position again. If the
setting cannot be changed even after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position again, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. As soon as you turn off the ignition
switch, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) ON/OFF setting is stored in
the system. Therefore, when you turn
the ignition switch from the “OFF”
state to the “ON” position, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) setting will
revert to the state that was set before
the ignition switch was turned off.
. When you turn the ignition switch off,
the Proximity Warning Detection ON/
OFF settings will always reset, and the
system will not store the settings of the
function. Therefore, every time you
turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
S_703360-W
RAB malfunction message
RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system malfunctions, the above indicator
illuminates on the instrument cluster.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
HANDLING OF THE SONAR
SENSORS
s07bn06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the
rear bumper. To ensure the proper operation of the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system, observe the following
precautions.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(390,1)
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
HOW TO GET THE SOURCE
CODE THAT USES OPEN
SOURCE SOFTWARE
s07bn10
S_703497-W
Free Open-Source Software Information
This product uses Free Open-Source
Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL:
http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/o04d6c00
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the rear
bumper surface.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface clean.
. Do not modify rear bumper.
. Do not paint the rear bumper surface.
. Do not apply high pressure water to
the sonar sensors with a high pressure
car-washing machine.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper surface. If a sensor becomes
misaligned, a system malfunction may
occur, including inability to detect
objects in the reversing direction. If
any strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, contact
your SUBARU dealer for assistance.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(391,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
7-21. DISTRACTION MITIGATION SYSTEM
s07bp
Distraction Mitigation System is introduced as Driver Monitoring System in
some countries.
The Distraction Mitigation System monitors possible cases when the driver is not
paying attention to the forward direction,
and also recognizes individual users.
This system warns the driver of inattentive/drowsy driving, and can support safe
and comfortable driving by automatically
retrieving the following settings.
– Driver’s position (models with driver’s
seat memory function)
– Climate control setting
– Meter setting
– Center information display setting
– Language settings
– Audio and navigation personalization
When a user is registered, various settings are automatically retrieved when the
user enters the vehicle.
S_703465-W
Camera
CAUTION
. Always use the utmost care in
driving
– Overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the
Distraction Mitigation System
could easily lead to a serious
389
accident.
. This system cannot detect if the
driver is feeling drowsy or is
concentrating on safe driving.
. It cannot judge if the driver is
awake or asleep, if their driving
abilities have diminished, or if they
are concentrating on safe driving.
. In some circumstances, the system may not be able to correctly
detect the driver state.
NOTE
. The user recognition camera does not
save images, audio, or video.
. The Distraction Mitigation System
may not operate correctly when sunlight is shining into the vehicle in the
following ways.
– Sunlight is shining directly (or
through glass) onto the user recognition camera.
– There are shadows on the driver’s
face caused by sunlight (or any
light with a strong infrared component).
– There are large momentary fluctuations in the strength of the sunlight (or any light with a strong
infrared component) shining on the
face.
. Correct detection may not be possible
when a device that includes an infrared light source (such as a commercially available Distraction Mitigation
System) is installed in the vehicle
interior.
. The Distraction Mitigation System
may not operate correctly at the
following times when the driver is
wearing glasses or sunglasses.
– The sunglasses do not allow the
easy passage of infrared light.
– The surrounding scenery is reflected strongly in the lenses of the
glasses or sunglasses.
– The eyes are hidden by the frame
of the glasses and the user recog– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(392,1)
390
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
STARTING AND OPERATING
nition camera cannot detect the
eyes.
– The light from an infrared light
source (LED) is reflected in the
lenses of the glasses or sunglasses.
– The driver is wearing an eyepatch.
– The driver is wearing a hat set
deeply over the eyes.
Depending on the type of mask,
correct detection of inattentive/drowsy
driving may not be possible.
Correct user recognition is not possible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is
covered with a mask, muffler, sunglasses, or other item.
The Distraction Mitigation System
may not operate correctly when the
eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth is
hidden due to item that is between the
face and the system.
If a thick cover is attached to the
steering wheel, then depending on the
position set for the tilt/telescopic
steering wheel, the cover may block
the system’s view of the face, and the
system and the Distraction Mitigation
System may not operate correctly.
Do not attach any stickers to the user
recognition camera or the infrared
light source (LED). If the user recognition camera or infrared light source
(LED) is covered by an obstruction, it
will not be possible to correctly monitor
the driver.
If an accessory is hung from the inside
mirror, correct detection may not be
possible.
Do not touch the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
(LED) directly with your fingers. If
there is dirt or a fingerprint on these
parts, it will not be possible to correctly
monitor the driver. If there is dirt or a
fingerprint on these parts, either wipe
them with a soft dry cloth, or wipe
gently with a damp cloth after first
firmly wringing the water out.
If the surface of the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(LED) becomes scratched, correct
detection may not be possible. Be
careful that hard objects do not contact these parts.
If there is condensation on the user
recognition camera or the infrared
light source (LED), correct detection
may not be possible. If there is
condensation on these parts, wipe it
away with a soft dry cloth.
When registering a user for user
recognition, avoid closing your eyes
as much as possible.
If the user recognition success rate is
low, it is possible that the user is not
correctly registered. Delete the registered data and perform registration
again.
If a user frequently drives both with
glasses and contact lenses, it is
recommended that registration be
performed both when wearing glasses
and when wearing contact lenses.
User recognition starts immediately
after entering the vehicle, however if
the user looks downward or at the
driver side mirror for a long time, the
user may not be recognized.
When one person among twins or
another pair of persons with similar
facial features is registered, the other
person may be incorrectly recognized
as the registered user when entering
the vehicle.
If the person in the passenger’s seat
leans into the driver’s seat, or in other
cases when there are two or more
faces near the driver’s seat, the
system may not operate correctly.
There are cases when the system
concludes that the user’s eyes are
closed when the user is looking
downward during driving, such as
when checking instruments or the
navigation screen. In such cases, the
drowsy driving warning buzzer may
sound or the system may otherwise
not operate correctly.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(393,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
391
. If the eyes are narrowed when laughing or when there is a dazzling outside
light, the system may judge that the
eyes are closed and the drowsy
driving warning buzzer may sound or
the system may otherwise not operate
correctly.
. The drowsy driving or asleep warning
states are recognized from the length
of time and percentage of time that the
eyes are closed. The drowsy driving
warning buzzer will not sound simply
when the driver feels sleepy or yawns.
. Even when the driver does not feel
sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or
if he or she blinks frequently, the
drowsy driving warning buzzer may
sound.
. The inattentive driving warning buzzer
may sound if the driver leans forward
or puts his or her head out of the
window while driving.
. The inattentive driving warning buzzer
will not sound when the vehicle is
stopped or traveling at slow speed
even if the driver is not looking ahead.
. The Distraction Mitigation System
collects and stores data regarding
drivers’ facial features. Facial recognition data is stored locally and does
not leave the vehicle. It is not transmitted to or stored by SUBARU or
anyone else. The Distraction Mitigation System may be disabled and any
stored driver data may be deleted by
following the instructions below. If the
Distraction Mitigation System is disabled, it will be unable to provide any
of its safety or convenience functions.
7
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(394,1)
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
The functions which are available vary depending on the Distraction Mitigation System
setting and the user recognition function setting.
Available functions
Distraction Mitigation System*1
ON
OFF
Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning
Available
Not available
User recognition function
Available
Not available
Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning
Available
Not available
Not available
Not available
ON
User recognition function*2
OFF
User recognition function
Available function items
Distraction Mitigation System*1
Driver Profiles items*3
ON
OFF
Available
Available*4
Edit user registration
Available
Not available*5
(Delete
user)
Available
Not available*5
Change User
Available
Not available
Add
Available*4
Available*4
Edit user registration
Not available
Not available*5
(Delete
user)
Available
Not available*5
Not available
Not available
Add
ON
User recognition function*2
OFF
Edit
Edit
Change User
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(395,1)
393
STARTING AND OPERATING
Available function items
Distraction Mitigation System*1
Distraction Mitigation
System items*3
ON
OFF
Auto Retract Driver
Seat*6
Available
Available
Seat and Mirror Position*6
Available
Not available
Auto Retract Driver
Seat*6
Not available
Not available
Seat and Mirror Position*6
Not available
Not available
ON
User recognition function*2
OFF
*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to “Vehicle” �P206.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings. Refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
*3: For details, refer to “Using the Distraction Mitigation System” �P398.
*4: Touch “Add” to enable the system, which will activate the Distraction Mitigation System.
*5: If the Distraction Mitigation System is off, “Edit” will be unavailable.
*6: Models with driver’s seat memory function
The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is
registered.
Available functions
User recognition function
The user is registered.
The user is not registered.
Available
Not available
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(396,1)
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
USER RECOGNITION FUNCTION
s07bp01
WARNING
Perform registration, retrieving, or
delete of the seat position and outside
mirror angle before beginning driving.
There is the risk of an accident if
registration, retrieving, or delete is
performed while driving.
When a user is registered, it is possible to
retrieve the following settings.
Driver position personalization
(models with driver’s seat
memory function)
s07bp0101
Seat position and outside mirror angle:
Retrieves the registered seat position and
outside mirror angle.
Reverse tilt angle:
Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down
outside mirror angle.
Meter personalization
s07bp0102
Instrument cluster display basic
screen:
Displays the screen which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
Center information display personalization
s07bp0103
Climate control personalization
s07bp0104
Climate control settings:
Retrieves the preferred setting temperature, airflow mode selection, and other
settings which the user had selected at
the time when he/she last exited the
vehicle.
NOTE
When a recognized user exits the vehicle
while the MAX A/C mode is on and the
push engine switch is turned off, the
system stores the setting configured
before MAX A/C mode was turned on.
Distraction Mitigation System
ON/OFF status
s07bp0105
Retrieves the Distraction Mitigation System ON/OFF status which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
Language settings
s07bp0111
The language displayed on the center
information display and instrument cluster display is determined by the userregistered settings.
Audio and navigation personalization
s07bp0112
Retrieves the preferred audio and navigation settings that were in effect when
the user last exited the vehicle. For details
about how to set the audio and navigation
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual.
Center information display basic
screen:
Displays the screen which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(397,1)
395
STARTING AND OPERATING
Changing the personalization settings
s07bp0106
Item
Remarks
Seat position/outside mirror angle
Driver’s position personalization
(models with driver’s seat memory Reverse tilt-down outside mirror
function)
angle
Change the setting by using the
center information display customization function. Refer to “Vehi-
Meter personalization*
Instrument cluster display basic
screen
Center information display personalization*
Center information display basic
screen
Climate control personalization*
Climate control settings
Language settings*
Language settings of center information display and instrument
cluster display
Audio and navigation personalization*
Audio and navigation system settings
cle” �P206.
When the customization screen
linked with the synchronized user
function is selected and the setting
is changed, it is automatically
stored.
7
Distraction Mitigation System ON/OFF status
*: When the Distraction Mitigation System is OFF, the Distraction Mitigation System continues to store the
conditions from immediately before the Distraction Mitigation System was turned OFF even if the screen was
selected and the setting was changed.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(398,1)
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
INATTENTIVE/DROWSY DRIVING WARNING
s07bp02
While driving, the Distraction Mitigation
System monitors possible cases of driver
inattention or drowsiness and warns the
driver.
When the inattentive/drowsy driving
warning activates, the buzzer sounds and
an interrupt display appears.
NOTE
. The inattentive/drowsy driving warning operates regardless of the status
of the user recognition function.
. The inattentive driving warning does
not activate when the turn signal is
operating or when the select lever is in
the “R” position.
. When the pre-collision brake system
OFF indicator is illuminated on the
instrument cluster display, the inattentive driving warning activates at the
same timing as usual even when a
vehicle ahead or obstacle is detected.
For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
When the EyeSight system has detected
a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward
direction, the inattentive driving warning
may activate at earlier timing than usual.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
NOTE
When Adaptive Cruise Control and the
Lane Centering function are active,
warning screens other than the inattentive driving warning are displayed on the
instrument cluster display. For details,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Inattentive driving warning
s07bp0201
S_703202-W
When the system monitors that the driver
may be inattentive, it warns the driver.
When the inattentive driving warning
activates, the buzzer sounds and an
interrupt display appears on the instrument cluster display.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(399,1)
397
STARTING AND OPERATING
Drowsy driving warning
s07bp0202
Possible drowsiness is detected from face features, and a warning is given to the driver.
When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display
appears.
Instrument cluster display
Center information display
Warning chime
Drowsy driving
Beep, beep... (Continues
until the driver’s eyes
open.)
Very drowsy
Beep, beep, beep, beep,
beep (5 times)
ZOM0979-W
ZOM0979-W
7
Slightly drowsy
*1
Beep
—
—
ZOM0980-W
Not drowsy
—
*1: The navigation system (if equipped) has a periodic rest notification function. For details, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
When Adaptive Cruise Control and the Lane Centering function are active, warning
screens other than the drowsy driving warning are displayed on the instrument cluster
display. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(400,1)
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
DISTRACTION MITIGATION
SYSTEM INDICATOR/WARNING
s07bp03
Distraction Mitigation System
OFF indicator light
s07bp0302
This indicator illuminates when the Distraction Mitigation System is turned off.
Only the Distraction Mitigation System
will remain activate even if the system is
turned off.
Distraction Mitigation System
temporary stop indicator light
s07bp0303
This indicator illuminates when the Distraction Mitigation System is temporarily
stopped.
S_703361-W
Distraction Mitigation System operation
indicator light (green)
Distraction Mitigation System OFF indicator light
Distraction Mitigation System temporary stop indicator light
Distraction Mitigation System warning
light (yellow)
The Distraction Mitigation System indicator/warning indicates the status of the
Distraction Mitigation System on the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE
When the Distraction Mitigation System
OFF indicator, Distraction Mitigation
System temporary stop indicator, or Distraction Mitigation System warning is
illuminated, the Distraction Mitigation
System function cannot be used. In
addition, the following items cannot be
selected.
. Add
. Change User
. Edit
. Seat and Mirror Position (models with
driver’s seat memory function)
NOTE
The Distraction Mitigation System stops
temporarily in the following circumstances.
. When the temperature of the main unit
of the Distraction Mitigation System is
high or low.
. When the Distraction Mitigation System cannot monitor the driver’s face.
. When the camera and the infrared
light source (LED) are covered and the
Distraction Mitigation System cannot
monitor the driver correctly.
Distraction Mitigation System
warning light (yellow)
s07bp0304
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the Distraction Mitigation
System. Contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
USING THE DISTRACTION MITIGATION SYSTEM
s07bp04
You can register users using the Center
Information Display. Once you are registered in the system, you can use the user
recognition function.
Distraction Mitigation System
operation indicator light (green)
s07bp0301
This indicator illuminates when the Distraction Mitigation System is operating.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(401,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
399
Register User
s07bp0403
1. To access “Driver Profiles”, follow
either of the procedures below.
– Touch (Settings).
?Touch “Profiles”
to access
“Driver Profiles”.
(Driver Profile).
– Touch
?Touch “Driver Profile” to access
“Driver Profiles”.
2. ? “Add”
3. Select the row you want to register.
4. Select the language.
5. ? “Next”
6. Enter the name.
S_703470-W
When the screen changes, the registration of the facial scan is completed.
7
S_703468-W
7. ? “OK”
8. ?
9. Select the preferred icon.
10.? “Next”
S_703519-W
S_703469-W
11. Touch “Next” and then the registration
of the facial scan will start. While
seated in the driver’s seat, face
forward and wait for a few moments.
Left side direction
Right side direction
Slowly turn your face toward the left
outside mirror.
Do not lower your chin.
Slowly turn your face toward the right
outside mirror.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(402,1)
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE
Deleting User
. If user registration cannot be performed, slowly turn your face toward
the left and right door mirrors as
shown in the illustration.
. There are some cases where user
registration cannot be completed
properly. In those cases, refer to
“Distraction Mitigation System”
�P389.
. If “There was a problem with Facial
Registration. Please try again.” appears, repeat the procedure from step
11.
Users can be registered in the Distraction
Mitigation System, and registered users
can be deleted.
Editing User Registration
s07bp0405
You can edit the user information registered in the “Driver Profile”, including
name, language, icon, seat position
(models with driver’s seat memory function), and side mirror position (models
with driver’s seat memory function).
You can only edit the information of the
current user.
1. To access “Driver Profiles”, follow
either of the procedures below.
– Touch (Settings).
?Touch “Profiles”
to access
“Driver Profiles”.
(Driver Profile).
– Touch
?Touch “Driver Profile” to access
“Driver Profiles”.
2. ? “Edit”
3. Select a current user from the list.
4. Select the language.
5. ?“Next”
6. Enter the name.
7. ?
8. Select the preferred icon.
9. ?“Next”
10.Adjust the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors to the desired position.*
11. ?“Next”*
*: If the driver’s seat memory function is
equipped.
s07bp0406
NOTE
User information can also be deleted by
resetting the center information display to
the factory default settings. When the
settings are reset to the factory default
settings, all user information is deleted.
The settings cannot be reset to the factory
default settings when the Distraction
Mitigation System is OFF.
1. To access “Driver Profiles”, follow
either of the procedures below.
– Touch (Settings).
?Touch “Profiles”
to access
“Driver Profiles”.
(Driver Profile).
– Touch
?Touch “Driver Profile” to access
“Driver Profiles”.
2. ? “Edit”
3. Touch of the desired user from the
list.
S_703471-W
4. ? “Delete”
Change User
s07bp0407
To set another registered user as the
driver, perform the following procedure.
1. To access “Driver Profiles”, follow
either of the procedures below.
– Touch (Settings).
?Touch “Profiles”
to access
“Driver Profiles”.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(403,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
– Touch
(Driver Profile).
?Touch “Driver Profile” to access
“Driver Profiles”.
2. ? “Change User”
3. ? “Next”
401
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face
forward for a few moments.
3. When user recognition is completed,
the Hello screen appears on the
instrument cluster display.
The facial scan will start.
User recognition
s07bp0401
When a user is registered with the user
recognition function, the Distraction Mitigation System performs the following.
1. When the door is opened or closed
and the push-button ignition switch is
OFF, the user recognition screen
appears and the Distraction Mitigation
System starts user recognition.
S_703467-W
At this time, climate control settings,
instrument cluster display basic screen,
center information display basic screen,
and customization settings all change
based on the user information.
NOTE
S_703466-W
The user recognition screen may not
appear when the door is opened in
some cases, such as when only a
short time has passed after the pushbutton ignition switch was turned OFF.
In such cases, user recognition starts
when the door is closed however the
user recognition screen does not
appear.
. If the language setting is different
when user recognition is performed, a
message will be displayed to change
the language setting.
. While user recognition is in progress,
executing other operations on the
center information display may result
in the user’s configured settings being
applied improperly.
. When a center information display
operation switch is pressed, the user
recognition screen is canceled, however user recognition continues.
. If user recognition fails, perform recognition again following the instructions, refer to “Change User” �P400.
. User recognition is not performed
while driving.
. When the select lever is not in the “P”
position, the seat position will not
change even when user recognition is
completed (models with driver’s seat
memory function).
. If the seat position or outside mirror
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
7
(404,1)
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
angle are in motion at the time when
user recognition is completed, then it
is not possible to retrieve the seat
position, outside mirror angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle
(models with driver’s seat memory
function).
. If any of the following operations is
performed while retrieving of the seat
position or outside mirror angle, retrieving of the seat position and outside mirror angle is canceled (models
with driver’s seat memory function).
– The power seat adjustment switch
was operated.
– The outside mirror adjustment
switch was operated.
– The “SET” button was pressed.
– The “1” or “2” button was pressed.
– The select lever was moved to a
position other than “P” position.
. User recognition may not be possible
when there is dirt or fingerprints on the
user recognition camera. To clean,
either wipe using a soft cloth or else
wipe gently using a moistened cloth
that has been thoroughly wrung out.
DISTRACTION MITIGATION
SYSTEM ON/OFF SETTINGS
s07bp07
NOTE
. When the Distraction Mitigation System is turned OFF after user recognition was completed, the user recognition function stores the Distraction
Mitigation System ON/OFF state.
. Even when the Distraction Mitigation
System is set to OFF, the Distraction
Mitigation System automatically turns
ON once the driver’s door is opened
and closed while the vehicle is
stopped. When the driver gets in the
vehicle, a message will appear on the
instrument cluster display.
. After the Distraction Mitigation System
was turned OFF, if the Distraction
Mitigation System is turned ON while
the driver’s door is open, user recognition may not occur correctly.
To turn on/off the Distraction
Mitigation System
s07bp0701
To turn the Distraction Mitigation System
on and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Vehicle” �P206. When
the Distraction Mitigation System is
turned OFF, the Distraction Mitigation
System OFF indicator on the instrument
cluster display will illuminate.
NOTE
Even when the Distraction Mitigation
System is turned off, the user recognition
does not switch on or off automatically.
User recognition settings
s07bp0702
The Distraction Mitigation System User
recognition function can be turned ON/
OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to
“Vehicle” �P206.
NOTE
. The user recognition function setting
cannot be changed for each individual
user.
. The default setting for the user recognition function is ON.
. When the user recognition function is
turned OFF, the following items cannot
be selected.
– Change User
– Seat and Mirror Position (models
with driver’s seat memory function)
Automatically retract seat on
entry (models with driver’s seat
memory function)
s07bp0704
The automatically retract seat on entry
which automatically slides back the driver’s seat when the driver’s door is
unlocked and opened.
This function can be turned ON/OFF. For
the setting procedure, refer to “Vehicle”
�P206.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(405,1)
STARTING AND OPERATING
403
CAUTION
Sit in the seat after the power seat
movement backward has been completed. Not doing so could result in
injury.
NOTE
. If the seat position is not registered in
the access key fob memory, the
automatically retract seat on entry
function can be used.
. Even when the automatically retract
seat on entry setting is ON, the
automatically retract seat on entry
function automatically turns OFF
when the user recognition function is
OFF.
. Automatically retract seat on entry
cannot be selected when the Distraction Mitigation System temporary stop
indicator or Distraction Mitigation
System warning is illuminated.
. This function will operate if the seat is
in front of the center of the seat sliding
mechanism.
7
HOW TO GET THE SOURCE
CODE THAT USES OPEN
SOURCE SOFTWARE
s07bp09
Free Open-Source Software Information
This product uses Free Open-Source
Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL:
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/
RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0103/
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(406,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(407,1)
DRIVING TIPS
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
8-8.
8-9.
New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles
s08
(1,600 km) ....................................................................................406
Fuel Economy Hints ...................................................................406
Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)..................................407
Catalytic Converter .....................................................................407
Periodic Inspections ...................................................................408
Driving in Foreign Countries .....................................................409
Frequent Driving Prevents Vehicle Battery from
Discharging .................................................................................409
Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles...................................................410
On-Road and Off-Road Driving.................................................. 411
Before Driving............................................................................. 412
During Driving ............................................................................ 412
After Driving ............................................................................... 413
8-10. Winter Driving .............................................................................414
Operation during Cold Weather ................................................... 414
Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads................................................. 415
Corrosion Protection................................................................... 416
Snow Tires ................................................................................. 417
Tire Chains ................................................................................. 417
Rocking the Vehicle .................................................................... 418
8-11. Loading Your Vehicle..................................................................418
Vehicle Capacity Weight.............................................................. 419
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross
Axle Weight Rating) .................................................................. 419
Roof Rail .................................................................................... 420
Roof Tent.................................................................................... 422
8-12. Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option) ......................................................424
Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch .............................. 425
If Not Towing a Trailer ................................................................. 426
8-13. Trailer Towing..............................................................................426
Warranties and Maintenance ....................................................... 426
Maximum Load Limits ................................................................. 427
Trailer Hitches (Dealer Option) .................................................... 429
When You Do Not Tow a Trailer ................................................... 429
Connecting a Trailer.................................................................... 430
Trailer Towing Tips...................................................................... 431
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(408,1)
406
DRIVING TIPS
8-1. NEW VEHICLE BREAKIN DRIVING – THE FIRST
1,000 MILES (1,600 km)
s08aa
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000
rpm except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either
fast or slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads are replaced
with new ones.
8-2. FUEL ECONOMY HINTS
s08ab
The following suggestions will help to
save your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until
you reach the desired speed. Then try
to maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and
avoid racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire inflation
pressure label, which is located under
the door latch on the driver’s side. Low
pressure will increase tire wear and
fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage
or cargo.
. The indication of the ECO gauge
shows a reference for saving fuel. For
details, refer to “Basic Screens”
�P191.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(409,1)
407
DRIVING TIPS
8-3. ENGINE EXHAUST GAS
(Carbon Monoxide)
8-4. CATALYTIC CONVERTER
s08ac
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and
odorless gas which is dangerous,
or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
s08ad
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or
park the vehicle anywhere near
flammable materials (e.g. grass,
paper, rags or leaves), because the
catalytic converter operates at very
high temperatures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L non-turbo models
. Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine
is running. If that is unavoidable,
then use the ventilation fan to force
fresh air into the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves or
other obstructions to ensure that
the ventilation system always
works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked
and corrected as soon as possible.
If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
S_801558-W
2.4 L turbo models
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas from
entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of
the metals used in the manufacture of the
exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the exhaust
system for a short time after the engine
has been shut off. This sound is normal.
S_801559-W
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(410,1)
408
DRIVING TIPS
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring,
backfiring or incomplete combustion),
have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the exhaust
system.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
8-5. PERIODIC INSPECTIONS
s08ae
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(411,1)
DRIVING TIPS
8-6. DRIVING IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
s08af
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel Requirements”
�P304.
. Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
409
8-7. FREQUENT DRIVING
PREVENTS VEHICLE BATTERY FROM DISCHARGING
s08au
Vehicle batteries are a consumable item.
If the battery charge is not maintained
regularly, the battery will deteriorate and
may require replacement sooner than
expected. The battery is charged by
running the engine. It is recommended to
drive the car for a longer time occasionally to prevent the vehicle battery from
becoming drained, especially if it is
regularly driven only a short time daily (e.
g. only 10 minutes) or if it is parked for 10
days or more. It may be possible to
recover the state of charge and maintain
the battery performance by driving for a
longer time (e.g. more than 30 minutes). If
you cannot drive enough, we recommend
to charge the battery as needed. If no
action is taken, the battery will become
discharged. This is a normal characteristic of any battery.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(412,1)
410
DRIVING TIPS
8-8. DRIVING TIPS FOR AWD
VEHICLES
s08ag
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking
or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle could easily lead to a
serious accident.
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control, and it
can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored in
the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
. When replacing or installing tire(s),
all four tires must be the same for
the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must obey
the specification that is printed on
the tire inflation pressure label. The
tire inflation pressure label is
located on the driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechanical
damage could be caused to the
drivetrain of the car, and affect the
followings.
–
–
–
–
Ride
Handling
Braking
Speedometer/Odometer calibration
S_801498-MW
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive
vehicle. There is little difference in
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(413,1)
411
DRIVING TIPS
handling, however, during extremely
sharp turns or sudden braking.
Therefore, when driving down a slope
or turning corners, be sure to reduce
your speed and maintain an ample
distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on
the tire inflation pressure label, which
is located on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of
the following items than that specified
in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
– Rear differential gear oil
– Continuously variable transmission fluid
– Front differential gear oil
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to
“Towing” �P447.
8-9. ON-ROAD AND OFFROAD DRIVING
s08ah
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking
or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle could easily lead to a
serious accident.
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a
seatbelt. The driver and all passengers should fasten their seatbelts before starting to drive in
order to minimize the chance of
serious injury or death.
. Do not make sharp turns or quick
maneuvers unless absolutely unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous, as you may lose control,
possibly resulting in a rollover
which could cause death or serious
injury.
. Whenever strong crosswinds are
present, slow down sufficiently to
maintain control of your vehicle.
Remember that your vehicle, with
its higher profile and center of
gravity, is more likely to be affected
by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars.
. Never attempt to drive through
pools and puddles, or roads
flooded with water. Water entering
the engine air intake or the exhaust
pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your
vehicle and may cause it to stall. In
this case, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately. Regardless of
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(414,1)
412
DRIVING TIPS
its depth, it can wash away the
ground from under your tires,
resulting in possible loss of traction
and even vehicle rollover.
CAUTION
. Frequent driving of an AWD model
under hard-driving conditions such
as rough roads or off roads will
necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than
that specified in the maintenance
schedule described in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
sense precautions such as those
listed here is not eligible for
warranty coverage.
. After driving on gravel roads or
rough roads, check the undercarriage of the vehicle body for any
damage, deformation, or paint
removal. If you notice any irregularities, contact a SUBARU dealer
for an inspection as soon as
possible.
and allowing you to anticipate problems
earlier. However, remember that your
utility vehicle is not designed for highspeed cornering comparable to ordinary
passenger cars and that your vehicle
could roll over if you make a sharp turn at
high speed.
If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain
common sense precautions such as
those in the following list should be taken.
BEFORE DRIVING
s08ah09
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a
shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and
cell phone or citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured
cargo could be thrown around in the
vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile
heavy loads on the roof. Those loads
raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
and make it more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this
manual.
DURING DRIVING
s08ah10
Your vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher
ground clearance which enables them to
be used for wide applications including
off-road driving. However, please keep in
mind that your vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an allterrain vehicle. A higher center of gravity
in relation to the tread width as compared
with ordinary passenger cars makes
vehicles of this type more likely to roll
over. In reality, utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. The high ground
clearance of this vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a better view of the road
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous
areas or over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution
at all times. When driving off-road, you
will not have the benefit of marked
traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic
signs and the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. A vehicle
can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid
driving straight up or down slopes that
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(415,1)
DRIVING TIPS
are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers,
especially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk
the wheel and injure your hands.
Instead, drive with your fingers and
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass
or fallen leaves, as they may burn
easily. The exhaust system is very hot
while the engine is running and right
after the engine stops. This could
create a fire hazard.
413
could occur.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after
off-road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt
buildup, so they need to be washed
thoroughly.
Precautions when driving under
especially dangerous situations:
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the
select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race
the engine. For the best possible
traction, avoid spinning the wheels
when trying to free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction
by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to
“Selection of Manual Mode” �P325.
8
AFTER DRIVING
s08ah11
. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud or water. Do this by driving
slowly and stepping on the brake
pedal. Repeat that process several
times to dry out the brake discs and
brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags,
stones, sand, etc. adhering to or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If
the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(416,1)
414
DRIVING TIPS
8-10. WINTER DRIVING
s08ai
OPERATION DURING COLD
WEATHER
s08ai01
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen, use
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
If you fill the washer fluid tank with a fluid
with a different concentration from the
one used previously, purge the old fluid
from the piping between the washer fluid
tank and washer nozzles by operating the
washer for a certain period of time.
Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid
remaining in the piping is too low for the
outside temperature, it may freeze and
block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside
temperature. If the concentration is
inappropriate, sprayed washer
fluid may freeze on the windshield
and obstruct your view, and the
fluid may freeze in the washer fluid
tank.
. Be careful foreign matter does not
contaminate the washer fluid when
filling the tank. Contamination
could cause malfunctions, such as
clogging the pump.
. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only
if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades or
washer system.
Before driving your vehicle
s08ai0101
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
Parking in cold weather
s08ai0102
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle if you park the
vehicle in snow with the engine run-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(417,1)
415
DRIVING TIPS
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
ning.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake when
parking for long periods in cold
weather since it could freeze in that
position.
. When the vehicle is parked in snow
or when it snows, raise the wiper
blades off the glass to prevent
damage to them.
. Under either of the following conditions, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause
poor braking action.
– When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads
heavily covered with snow
– When the vehicle has been left
parked during a snowstorm
Check for snow or ice buildup on
the suspension, disc brakes and
brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice,
remove it, being careful not to
damage the disc brakes and brake
hoses and ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following tips.
1. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
Refueling in cold weather
s08ai0103
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
Opening rear gate (models with
power rear gate)
s08ai0104
CAUTION
Before operating the power rear gate,
check that there is no frost or snow
between the power rear gate and the
vehicle body. If you notice frost or
snow etc. on the power rear gate,
remove it. If you forcibly operate the
power rear gate with frost or snow, it
may cause a malfunction.
DRIVING ON SNOWY AND ICY
ROADS
s08ai02
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of vehicle
control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving in
snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine’s intake system and may hinder
the airflow, which could result in
engine shutdown or even breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration,
high-speed driving, and sharp turning
when driving on snowy or icy roads.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(418,1)
416
DRIVING TIPS
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock,
possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
washer. Refer to “Windshield washer”
�P225.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For
information about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)” �P330 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control System” �P332.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and
freezing temperatures. Blades of this type
give superior wiping performance in
snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades
that are suitable for your vehicle.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
Refer to “Hazard Warning Flasher”
�P158.
Wiper operation when snowing
CAUTION
s08ai0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to
the windshield or rear window, perform
the following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade
rubbers, use the defroster with the
airflow selection in “ ” and the
temperature set for maximum warmth
until the wiper blade rubbers are
completely thawed. Refer to “Climate
Control” �P253.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer
to “Defogger and Deicer” �P226.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
use the rear window defogger. Refer
to “Defogger and Deicer” �P226.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow
starts to stick on the surface of the
windshield despite wiper operation, use
the defroster with the airflow selection in
“ ” and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets
warmed enough to melt the frozen snow
on it, wash it away using the windshield
During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may not perform
as well as standard wiper blades. If
this happens, reduce the vehicle
speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing
type wiper blades is over, replace them
with standard wiper blades.
Lighting operation when snowing
s08ai0202
Check that the headlights are clean
before driving. If snow, frost or ice are
attached to the headlights, remove it.
If the headlights are not clean, they will
not light the front normally. Also if the
indicators and brake lamps are not clean,
the vehicle will not be able to inform its
status to other drivers and it may result in
an accident.
CORROSION PROTECTION
s08ai03
Refer to “Corrosion Protection” �P463.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(419,1)
417
DRIVING TIPS
SNOW TIRES
s08ai04
WARNING
. When replacing or installing winter
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of
tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
CAUTION
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must obey
the specification that is printed on
the tire inflation pressure label. The
tire inflation pressure label is
located on the driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechanical
damage could be caused to the
drivetrain of the car, and affect the
followings.
–
–
–
–
Ride
Handling
Braking
Speedometer/Odometer calibration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control, and it
can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of radial,
belted bias or bias tires since it may
cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
Do not use 225/55R19 winter or snow
tires on models with 19-inch wheels.
Doing so may result in damage
caused by contact between the tire
and the vehicle body. For winter or
snow tires, SUBARU recommends
using 225/60R18 tires in combination
with 18-inch genuine SUBARU
wheels.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
TIRE CHAINS
s08ai05
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle
body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use of
another type of traction device (such as
spring chains) may be acceptable if use
on your vehicle is recommended by the
device manufacturer, taking into account
tire size and road conditions. Follow the
device manufacturer’s instructions,
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(420,1)
418
DRIVING TIPS
especially regarding maximum vehicle
speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
do not spin your wheels. Damage caused
to your vehicle by use of a traction device
is not covered under warranty.
Make certain that any traction device you
use is an SAE class S device, and use it
on the front wheels only. Always use the
utmost care when driving with a traction
device. Overconfidence because you are
using a traction device could easily lead
to a serious accident.
8-11. LOADING YOUR VEHICLE
s08aj
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the cargo
area. Doing so may result in serious
injury.
WARNING
ROCKING THE VEHICLE
s08ai06
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st.
For information on holding the transmission in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
Manual Mode” �P325.
S_103045-MW
. Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward
and injure passengers in the event
of a sudden stop or accident. Keep
luggage or cargo low, as close to
the floor as possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever you
can to prevent it from being thrown
around inside the vehicle during
sudden stops, sharp turns or in an
accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
These loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more
prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on your
vehicle can break, or it can change
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(421,1)
DRIVING TIPS
419
the way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control and
cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause serious
injury.
S_801501-W
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids or
any other dangerous items inside the
vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT
The maximum load you can carry in your
vehicle is shown on the tire inflation
pressure label attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
GVWR AND GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross
Axle Weight Rating)
s08aj02
s08aj01
S_801512-W
S_801500-W
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space.
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(422,1)
420
DRIVING TIPS
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle,
you should confirm that GVW and front
and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because
they may lower the GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher load range than the originals do
not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
loads (cargo, roof crossbars and carrying
attachments) of no more than 220 lbs
(100 kg). Be sure not to exceed your
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
CAUTION
. When using the carrying attachments, make sure that the total
carrying load of the cargo, roof
crossbars and carrying attachments does not exceed 220 lbs
(100 kg). Overloading may cause
damage to the vehicle. Read the
manufacturer’s instructions and
pay attention to not exceed the
load limit of the parts.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the roof crossbars and any
appropriate carrying attachment
that may be needed. The roof rails
must never be used alone to carry
cargo. Otherwise, damage to the
roof or paint, or a dangerous road
hazard due to loss of cargo could
result.
ROOF RAIL
s08aj04
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
S_801608-W
Roof rails
Cargo can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof crossbars to the roof
rails and installing the appropriate carrying attachments. When installing the roof
crossbars and the carrying attachments,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
The roof rail system is designed to carry
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(423,1)
421
DRIVING TIPS
Rope hooks (attached to the
roof rails)
s08aj0402
S_703594-W
When placing a load laterally on the
vehicle, such as by tying a rope directly to
the roof rails, ensure you follow these
guidelines. Incorrect usage of the roof
rails can warp or damage both the vehicle
body and the roof rails.
. Mount the crossbars in two places
near the roof rail pillars (mount only
crossbars approved by SUBARU). For
detailed installation instructions, refer
to the manual that comes with the
crossbars.
. When fastening ropes or other items
to the roof rails, ensure the rope is
secured in the middle between the two
installed crossbars.
. The maximum weight capacity for
ropes or other items secured directly
to the roof rail is 220 lbf (100 kgf).
. Do not attempt to secure items such
as a tarp to the roof rail by using a rope
with a hook or stay at the end.
. Ensure that you park on a level
surface before attaching a rope to a
roof rail to support a load such as a
tarp.
. Avoid applying a lateral load directly to
the roof rails when the crossbars are
carrying more than 220 lbs (100 kg).
. Ensure that the rope does not damage
the doors or any other part of the
vehicle body.
S_801609-W
Rope hooks
Covers
8
CAUTION
. When you use the rope hooks,
always secure the rope at all four
hook points.
. The cover cannot be removed.
. Do not tighten the rope excessively. Otherwise, it may lead to
damage to the vehicle body or
cargo.
. Check that the rope is not loose
before driving the vehicle.
. When you use the rope hooks,
never exceed the maximum load
limit.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(424,1)
422
DRIVING TIPS
ROOF TENT
s08aj14
When driving the vehicle
s08aj1401
S_801610-W
Roof tents may be used under certain
conditions at your own risk.
WARNING
Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof can
adversely affect handling, braking,
and rollover resistance. The vehicle
must never be driven with a total roof
rail load in excess of 220 lbs (100 kg).
S_801530-W
CAUTION
. The roof rail load limit for stationary
vehicles (800 lbs (363 kg)) applies
only when the vehicle is parked
and the load is evenly distributed
left/right and front/rear and the roof
crossbars and roof tent are tightly
secured to the vehicle. If these
conditions are not met, the load
limit will be lower.
Roof rails
Roof crossbars
Roof tent
+
< 220 lbs (100 kg)
The total load on the roof rails during
driving must not exceed the value specified here.
. The maximum load limit of the roof
crossbars must be obtained from
the manufacturer or retailer of the
roof rack. When driving the vehicle,
the maximum roof rail load is 220
lbs (100 kg) or the crossbar load
limit (whichever is lower).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(425,1)
DRIVING TIPS
When the vehicle is parked on
level ground
s08aj1402
423
within the roof rail load limit of 220 lbs
(100 kg). Refer to the user manual that
accompanied the roof tent for important
safety information and instructions on the
proper installation and use of the tent.
8
S_801531-W
Roof rails
Roof crossbars
Roof tent
Occupants in the roof tent
The total weight on the roof rails –
including the roof crossbars, roof tent,
and all occupants and contents in the roof
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s
roof rail load limit (800 lbs (363 kg)),
evenly distributed, or the load limit of the
roof crossbars, whichever is lower.
Load limit of the roof rails .
+
+
< (800 lbs (363 kg))
Exceeding this load limit could cause
damage to the vehicle or racking system.
The vehicle must never be driven with
occupants in the roof tent. Before the
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo
must be removed from the roof tent and
the roof rail load must be restored to
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(426,1)
424
DRIVING TIPS
8-12. TRAILER HITCH (Dealer Option)
s08ak
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer hitch.
Exceeding the maximum weight
could cause an accident resulting
in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes
depending on the situation. For
possible recommendations and
limitations, refer to “Trailer Towing”
�P426.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the tow load exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
. Be sure your trailer has safety
chains and that each chain will hold
the trailer’s maximum gross
weight. Towing trailers without
safety chains could create a traffic
safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling
damage or hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If
the ball mount separates from the
receiver the trailer could become
loose and create a traffic safety
hazard.
. Although towing regulations for
trailer or caravan vehicles vary by
state/region, all regulations agree
that specifications such as the
maximum gross trailer weight must
not exceed the lesser of the
following:
– Maximum gross trailer weight
– Maximum gross tongue weight
– GVWR
– GAWR
. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also
negate your insurance coverage
and/or may violate the state road
and traffic acts and regulations.
. It is recommended to only use the
Genuine SUBARU Ball Mount developed for use with this trailer
hitch available at your SUBARU
dealership. Use the hitch only as a
weight carrying hitch. Do not use
with any type of weight distributing
hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased
and there is increased risk of injury
to passengers in the case of an
accident if the SUBARU genuine
trailer hitch or a standard bumper
beam is not installed. One of them
must always be installed on the
vehicle.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not
possible to install the rear towing
hook.
When any of the tires are punctured, you
can seal the tire temporarily. However, do
not tow a trailer when a sealed tire is
used. We recommend that you consult
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
2.4 L turbo
models
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
2.5 L non-turbo
models
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
270 lbs
(122 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
Towing” �P426.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(427,1)
425
DRIVING TIPS
CONNECTING A SUBARU
GENUINE TRAILER HITCH
s08ak01
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the
ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole
located on the hitch receiver tube so
that the pin passes through the ball
mount.
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on
the ball mount.
S_801613-W
Hitch ball installation point
Hooks for safety chains
S_801611-W
3. Insert the safety pin through the
provided hole on the hitch pin securely.
S_801612-W
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not
come off the hitch receiver.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. In case the
trailer hitch connector or hitch ball
should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard. For
safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains.
Two chains should be used in total,
one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the
chains crossing each other under the
trailer tongue to prevent the trailer
from dropping onto the ground in case
the trailer tongue should disconnect
from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight turn
situations into account; however, be
careful not to let them drag on the
ground.
WARNING
. For safety, always connect the
towing vehicle and trailer with
safety chains.
. Do not connect safety chains to
any part of the vehicle other than
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(428,1)
426
DRIVING TIPS
8-13. TRAILER TOWING
the safety chain hooks.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If
the ball mount comes off the hitch
receiver, the trailer could get loose
and create a traffic safety hazard.
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
Hitch harness connector
S_801614-W
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating
the brake, stop and turn signal lights
on the trailer.
NOTE
. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available
from your SUBARU dealer.
. Always disconnect the trailer wire
harness before launching or retrieving
a watercraft.
IF NOT TOWING A TRAILER
s08ak02
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch electrical wire
harness to protect against possible
damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal
grease.
s08al
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension
and has an adverse effect on fuel
economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your
safety and satisfaction depend upon
proper use of correct equipment and
cautious operation of your vehicle.
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer
to assist you in purchasing a hitch and
other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. Do not use
towing equipment other than genuine
SUBARU towing equipment. In addition,
be sure to follow the instructions for
proper installation and use provided by
the trailer or caravan’s manufacturer.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for
your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch
mounting bolts and nuts are tightened
securely.
WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE
s08al01
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(429,1)
427
DRIVING TIPS
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component
(engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
s08al02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight in the following table.
2.4 L turbo models
Conditions
Maximum total
trailer weight
Maximum tongue weight
When towing a
trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs (453
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
When towing a
trailer with
brakes.
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
2.5 L non-turbo models
Conditions
Maximum total
trailer weight
Maximum tongue weight
When towing a
trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs (453
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
When towing a
trailer with
brakes.
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
270 lbs (122 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
s08al0202
Total trailer weight
s08al0201
S_801511-W
S_801510-W
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the
vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage,
trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any
other optional equipment installed on
your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW
changes depending on the situation.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(430,1)
428
DRIVING TIPS
Determine the GVW each time before
going on a trip by putting your vehicle and
trailer on a vehicle scale.
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
Tongue load
s08al0204
S_801512-W
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located at the bottom of driver’s side
door pillar of your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR)
s08al0203
S_801514-W
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and
does not exceed the maximum value. For
details about the trailer tongue load, refer
to “Trailer hitch” “Trailer Hitch (Dealer
Option)” �P424.
S_801513-W
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and
rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
S_801535-W
Jack
Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration above. When weighing the tongue
load, be sure to position the towing
coupler at the height at which it would be
during actual towing, using a jack as
shown.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(431,1)
429
DRIVING TIPS
the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and
odorless gas which is dangerous, or
even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the
frame or under-body of your vehicle
could cause deterioration of strength
of your vehicle and cause corrosion
around the drilled hole.
S_801536-W
Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as
evenly as possible on both the left and
right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more weight
in the back of trailer’s axle than in the
front, the load is taken off the rear axle
of the towing vehicle. This may cause
the rear wheels to skid, especially
during braking or when vehicle speed
is reduced during cornering, resulting
in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
TRAILER HITCHES (Dealer Option)
s08al03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body of
your vehicle to install a commercial
trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous
exhaust gas, water or mud may enter
the passenger compartment through
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, or other
systems when installing a hitch or
other trailer towing equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than a
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
SUBARU trailer hitch is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
WHEN YOU DO NOT TOW A
TRAILER
s08al14
CAUTION
. The housing should be kept dirt
and corrosion-free at the points of
contact. The surfaces only require
cleaning with a cloth. Grease or
other lubricants should never be
used.
. If the ball is not installed, the plastic
insert and/or bumper cover should
then be installed for protection and
to prevent it from getting dirty.
When the ball is not used, place the ball
cap and store securely.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(432,1)
430
DRIVING TIPS
CONNECTING A TRAILER
s08al04
Trailer brakes
s08al0401
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydraulic brake system to the
hydraulic brake system in your
vehicle. Direct connection would
cause the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate and could
lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
Trailer safety chains
s08al0402
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due to
coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the
chains crossing each other under the
trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from
dropping onto the ground in the event the
trailer tongue should disconnect from the
hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
Outside mirrors
s08al0403
S_801517-W
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard outside mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle’s
standard outside mirrors, use towing
mirrors that conform with Federal, state/
province and/or other applicable regulations.
Trailer lights
s08al0404
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage
your vehicle’s electrical system and
cause a malfunction of your vehicle’s
lighting system.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(433,1)
431
DRIVING TIPS
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer
lights are connected properly, please
consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for
proper operation of the turn signals and
the brake lights each time you connect a
trailer to your vehicle.
Tires
s08al0405
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary
spare tire is not designed to sustain
the towing load. Use of the temporary
spare tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or less
stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”
�P517.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s specifications. Also check federal,
state, province and/or other applicable
regulations.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service representative or professional to repair the flat tire.
ing support systems, when towing
a trailer, touch “Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Warning
(RCTW)” to deactivate the system.
The system may not operate
properly due to the blocked radar
waves. For details about how to
turn on/off the BSW/RCTW, refer to
“EyeSight/Driving Assistance”
�P202.
. For models equipped with the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, consult your SUBARU
dealer for additional information
about towing a trailer.
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly country
on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different when compared to normal
operation. For safety’s sake, you
should employ extra caution when
towing a trailer and you should
never drive at excessive speeds.
You should also keep the following
tips in mind:
. The braking power of the parking
brake may not be sufficient when
stronger braking power is needed
(e.g., when parking on a steep
slope while towing a trailer).
Before starting out on a trip
s08al0501
If you carry a regular size spare tire in
your vehicle or trailer as a precaution
against getting a flat tire, be sure that the
spare tire is firmly secured.
TRAILER TOWING TIPS
s08al05
CAUTION
. For models equipped with the BSW
(Blind Spot Warning) and RCTW
(Rear Cross Traffic Warning) driv-
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the
procedures set forth will not only
compromise your safety, but will also
negate your insurance coverage and/
or may violate the state road and traffic
acts and regulations.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-tohitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow
the trailer.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(434,1)
432
DRIVING TIPS
. Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the
vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front
and down at the rear, check the total
trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the
load and its distribution are acceptable.
. Check that the tire rating and pressures are correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that:
– The trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– The trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that
the trailer’s turn signal lights flash
when the vehicle’s turn signal lever
is operated.
– The safety chains are connected
properly.
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– The outside mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a
significant blind spot.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer,
causing sway. Crosswinds can be due
to weather conditions or the passing of
large trucks or buses. If swaying
occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel
and promptly begin decelerating your
vehicle at a gradual pace.
. When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of
the added weight and length caused
by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can
be difficult and requires experience.
Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and
grip the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand.
. Sufficient time should be taken to
learn the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer
combination before starting out on a
trip. In an area free of traffic, practice
turning, stopping and backing up.
Driving with a trailer
s08al0502
. You should allow for considerably
more stopping distance when towing a
trailer. Avoid sudden braking because
it may result in skidding or jackknifing
and loss of control.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns
and rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
larger than normal turning radius
because the trailer wheels will be
closer than the vehicle wheels to the
inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the
trailer could hit your vehicle.
S_801518-W
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure.
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the
opposite direction to the way you want
to turn.
2. Once the trailer begins to swing
around, straighten the steering wheel.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(435,1)
DRIVING TIPS
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direction.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
with the trailer, then straighten the
steering again.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop
towing the trailer and have repairs
performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
433
Warning Light (Red)” �P167.
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP
Warning Light” �P169.
. Do not use the accelerator pedal to
stay stationary on an uphill slope
instead of using the parking brake or
foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
Parking on a grade
s08al0504
Driving on grades
s08al0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if
necessary, use 1st gear) in order to
utilize the engine braking effect and
prevent overheating of your vehicle’s
brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather,
because the engine and transmission
are relatively prone to overheating,
pay attention to the following items.
– Engine coolant temperature gauge
– Coolant temperature high warning
light
– AT OIL TEMP warning light
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until
the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into the “P” position and shut off
the engine.
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner
and stop the vehicle in the nearest
safe location. Refer to “If You Park
Your Vehicle in an Emergency”
�P436 and “Engine Overheating”
�P446.
– Engine coolant temperature gauge
needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer to “Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge”
�P160.
– Coolant temperature high warning
light illuminates. Refer to “Coolant
Temperature Low Indicator Light
(Blue)/Coolant Temperature High
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
8
(436,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(437,1)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ...............................436
s09
Temporary Spare Tire .................................................................436
Maintenance Tools ......................................................................438
9-4.
Flat Tires......................................................................................439
Tool Locations ............................................................................ 438
Changing a Flat Tire.................................................................... 439
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (Except for
Canada-Spec. Models)............................................................... 442
TPMS Screen (Except for Canada-Spec. Models) ......................... 443
9-5.
Jump Starting..............................................................................443
9-6.
Engine Overheating ....................................................................446
How to Jump Start ...................................................................... 445
If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment ...................... 446
If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment ................. 446
9-7.
Towing .........................................................................................447
Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes..................................... 447
Using a Flat-Bed Truck................................................................ 449
Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ........................................ 450
9-8.
9-9.
If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released ..............451
If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ........................451
Locking and Unlocking ............................................................... 451
Switching Power Status .............................................................. 452
Starting Engine ........................................................................... 452
9-10.
9-11.
9-12.
9-13.
9-14.
If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened..........................................453
Malfunctions of the Center Information Display ......................454
If the Moonroof (If Equipped) Does Not Close .........................454
If the Fuel Filler Lid Cannot Be Opened ...................................455
If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident ................................456
To Restart the Engine When Involved in an Accident ................... 456
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved
in an Accident........................................................................... 456
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
9
(438,1)
436
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-1. IF YOU PARK YOUR VEHICLE IN AN EMERGENCY
9-2. TEMPORARY SPARE
TIRE
s09aa
s09ab
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used. The
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.
Use of the temporary spare tire
when towing can result in failure of
the spare tire and/or less stability of
the vehicle and may lead to an
accident.
S_308337-W
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be
activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
When the hazard warning flashers are
flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator light will also flash.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
. Except for Canada-spec. models,
when a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire
pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for
approximately one minute. This
indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to
monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible for tire and sensor
replacement and/or system resetting.
CAUTION
. Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train
of your vehicle.
. Always conform to the following
instructions when using the temporary spare tire. Otherwise, a
seriously dangerous situation may
occur.
The temporary spare tire is stored under
the under-floor storage compartment.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(439,1)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
437
wheel with a rear wheel and install the
temporary spare tire in place of the
removed rear wheel.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. For the correct pressure, refer to “Temporary Spare Tires”
�P517.
When using the temporary spare tire,
note the following.
. Drive with caution when the temporary
spare tire is installed. Avoid hard
acceleration and braking, or fast cornering, as control of the vehicle may
be lost.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the
temporary spare tire. Because of the
smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit
properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road
clearance is reduced.
9
S_901519-W
Tread wear indicator bar
Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be
used only on a rear wheel. If a front
wheel tire gets punctured, replace the
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(440,1)
438
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-3. MAINTENANCE TOOLS
For Subaru Outback Wilderness models
s09ah
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
. Wheel nut wrench
TOOL LOCATIONS
S_901723-W
s09ah15
For Outback models
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Jack
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
The maintenance tools are stored under
the under-floor storage compartment. For
the method to use the jack, refer to “Flat
Tires” �P439.
S_901671-W
Wheel nut wrench
Jack handle
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Jack
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(441,1)
439
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-4. FLAT TIRES
s09ac
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
s09ac01
WARNING
. Use only the jack and the jack
handle provided with your vehicle.
The jack supplied with the vehicle
is designed only for changing a tire.
Never put any part of your body
under the vehicle while the vehicle
is being supported by the jack.
Doing so could result in serious
injury or death.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface. The
jack can come out of the jacking
point or sink into the ground and
this can result in serious injury or
death.
. Before jacking up the vehicle, be
sure that there are no occupants or
cargo on board.
. Do not start the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Doing so
could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor
backing plate when removing and
installing the tire. A bent backing plate
may scrape against the disc rotor and
cause noise while the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking
up the vehicle using a garage jack.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
select lever in the “P” position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and unload all occupants and luggage
from the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat
tire.
. Do not jack up the vehicle with an
object on or underneath the jack.
The jack can be unstable and this
can result in a severe accident.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or push
the vehicle supported with the jack.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point due to a jolt and this
can result in serious injury or death.
. All passengers must exit the vehicle before you raise it with the jack.
Raising the vehicle with someone
inside of it could result in serious
injury or death.
S_901428-MW
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to
“Maintenance Tools” �P438.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
9
(442,1)
440
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE
. Make sure that the jack is well
lubricated before using it.
. To take out the tools and spare tire,
remove the multi-use cargo cover to
open the under-floor storage compartment. Refer to “Maintenance
Tools” �P438.
6. Take out the under-floor storage
compartment and turn the attaching
bolt counterclockwise, then take the
spare tire out.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to
the flat tire.
S_901426-W
9. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the
jack head engages firmly into the jackup point.
S_901429-W
NOTE
Carefully read “Temporary Spare Tire”
�P436 and strictly follow the instructions.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the
wheel nut wrench but do not remove
the nuts.
S_901431-W
10.Insert the jack handle into the hole of
the wheel nut wrench.
S_901430-MW
S_B02531-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(443,1)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
441
11. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the
vehicle higher than necessary.
16.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order
in the illustration.
S_B02532-W
S_901522-MW
12.Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
13.Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and
hub with a cloth.
NOTE
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” �P517. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
17.Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment. Install with the support
holder facing upward and secure the
flat tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.
S_901433-MW
14.Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts to
become loose and lead to an accident.
S_901523-W
Support holder
15.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
NOTE
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try
turning the support holder upside down.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
9
(444,1)
442
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
18.Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in the
proper place.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (Except for
Canada-Spec. Models)
s09ac02
S_703351-W
The tire pressure monitoring system
provides the driver with the warning
message indicated by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
hicle damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure to
the COLD tire pressure shown
on the tire inflation pressure
label on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If
you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat
Tires” �P439.
. When a replacement tire is
mounted or a wheel rim is replaced
without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred,
the low tire pressure warning light
will illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute. This
indicates the TPMS is unable to
monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible for tire and sensor
replacement and/or system resetting.
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly. Instead, perform
the following procedure. Otherwise
an accident involving serious ve-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(445,1)
443
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TPMS SCREEN (Except for
Canada-Spec. Models)
9-5. JUMP STARTING
s09ad
s09ac05
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with
water immediately. Get medical
help if the fluid has entered your
eyes.
S_308086-W
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic Screens” �P191.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large
amount of milk or water, and obtain
immediate medical help.
Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst or
explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other
metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have loose
or missing insulation.
. Do not jump start unless cables in
suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from
the cooling fan, drive belt and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
9
(446,1)
444
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are unsure
about the proper procedure for
jump starting, consult a competent
mechanic.
S_901524-W
Fuse
. Never connect the jumper cables
to a fuse near the terminal of the
vehicle battery. Doing so may
ignite gases generated by the
battery and result in an explosion,
which could damage the electronic
devices and the engine.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting
your battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(447,1)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
445
HOW TO JUMP START
s09ad01
9
S_901525-W
Booster battery
Strut mounting nut
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal
of the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the
cable to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any
other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the
vehicle that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(448,1)
446
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-6. ENGINE OVERHEATING
s09ae
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has
fully cooled down. When the engine is
hot, the coolant is under pressure.
Removing the cap while the engine is
still hot could release a spray of boiling
hot coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
CAUTION
If the engine overheats, the engine
speed or the vehicle speed may be
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately.
perature Low Indicator Light (Blue)/
Coolant Temperature High Warning
Light (Red)” �P167.
5. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
mark.
6. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill
the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.
IF STEAM IS COMING FROM
THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
s09ae01
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
IF NO STEAM IS COMING FROM
THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
s09ae02
NOTE
For details about how to check the coolant level or how to add coolant, refer to
“Engine Coolant” �P479.
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine Hood”
�P473.
3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning.
If the fan is not turning, immediately
turn off the engine and contact your
authorized dealer for repair.
4. After the coolant temperature high
warning light that has blinked or
illuminated in RED turns off, turn off
the engine. For details about the
warning light, refer to “Coolant Tem-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(449,1)
447
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-7. TOWING
s09af
. Never use the tie-down hole closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
Front towing hooks
s09af0112
The front towing hooks are located on the
bottom of the body on the front left and
right side of the vehicle.
S_901438-MW
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the front
wheels raised off the ground while the
rear wheels are on the ground, or with
the rear wheels raised off the ground
while the front wheels are on the
ground. This will cause the vehicle to
spin away due to the operation or
deterioration of the center differential.
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recommends it be done by your SUBARU
dealer or a commercial towing service.
TOWING HOOK AND TIEDOWN HOOKS/HOLES
s09af01
9
S_901674-W
Rear towing hook
s09af0105
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle
from the under-floor storage compartment.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the cutout of the
cover and pry open the cover.
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency.
SUBARU recommends towing be done
by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing hook
and tie-down hooks/holes. Never
use suspension parts or other parts
of the body for towing or tie-down
purposes.
S_901672-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(450,1)
448
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its thread can no
longer be seen.
. Be sure to remove the towing hook
after towing. Leaving the towing
hook mounted on the vehicle could
interfere with proper operation of
the fuel pump shut off function
when the vehicle is struck from
behind.
CAUTION
S_901673-W
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle and wheel nut
wrench.
S_901635-W
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply an excessive load to the
towing hook.
. For models equipped with the
BSW/RCTW system, when towing
another vehicle, touch “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic
Warning (RCTW)” to deactivate the
system. The system may not operate properly due to the blocked
radar waves. For details about how
to turn on/off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic
Warning (RCTW), refer to
“EyeSight/Driving Assistance”
�P202.
Front tie-down hooks
s09af0106
After towing, remove the towing hook
from the vehicle and stow it in the underfloor storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
S_901674-W
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(451,1)
449
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
USING A FLAT-BED TRUCK
Rear tie-down holes
s09af02
s09af0107
S_901446-MW
S_901526-W
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each
safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to
pull the chains so tightly that the
suspension bottoms out.
Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove
the plugs. After using the rear tie-down
holes, return the plugs to their original
places.
CAUTION
Transport by flat-bed truck may cause
the headlights to become misaligned.
In such a case, have the headlight
alignment checked by a SUBARU
dealer after transporting the vehicle by
flat-bed truck.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are used
to anchor the vehicle in any other
direction, cables may slip out of the
holes, possibly causing a dangerous
situation.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
9
(452,1)
450
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING WITH ALL WHEELS
ON THE GROUND
s09af03
. Use a flat-bed truck if there are
long distance downgrades or steep
slopes. However, do not apply the
brake pedal for a long time because the engine braking will not
work while towing. Doing so could
overheat the brake.
. Drive carefully and do not make an
impact on the towing rope by
suddenly starting.
S_901447-MW
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is
being towed because the steering
wheel and the direction of the
wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not function
when the engine is not running.
Because the engine is turned off, it
will take greater effort to operate
the brake pedal and steering
wheel.
. Use a specific towing rope for
towing. If wire ropes and metal
chains are needed to be used for
towing, wrap the contact portion of
the bumper with cloth to protect it
from damage.
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is
being towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-bed
truck.
. Sometime damaged vehicles cannot be towed because of their
damaged condition. In that case,
use a flat-bed truck for transportation.
. The traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h)
and the traveling distance to less
than 31 miles (50 km). For greater
speeds and distances, transport
your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(453,1)
451
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-8. IF THE ELECTRONIC
PARKING BRAKE CANNOT
BE RELEASED
9-9. IF ACCESS KEY FOB
DOES NOT OPERATE
PROPERLY
s09an
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.
s09ap
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters away
from the area between the access key
fob and the push-button ignition
switch. They may interfere with the
communication between the access
key fob and the push-button ignition
switch.
The following functions may be inoperable because of strong radio signals in
the surrounding area or a low battery
condition of the access key fob.
. Locking/unlocking all the doors including rear gate
. Switching the power status
. Starting the engine
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the
access key fob is discharged, replace it
with a new one. Refer to “Replacing
Battery of Access Key Fob” �P507.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
s09ap01
S_204470-MW
Release button
Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
9
(454,1)
452
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
emergency key in the procedure described in “Locking and Unlocking from
the Outside” �P132.
5. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated,
press the push-button ignition switch
with the brake pedal released. The
status of the push-button ignition
switch then changes to “ON”.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the emergency key back to the
access key fob.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even though
the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
SWITCHING POWER STATUS
s09ap02
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the
push-button ignition switch with it.
STARTING ENGINE
s09ap03
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the
push-button ignition switch with it.
S_901675-W
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is
completed, a chime (ding) will sound.
At the same time, the status of the
push-button ignition switch changes to
either of the following.
. When the keyless access with
push-button start system is deactivated: “ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
S_901675-W
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is
completed, a chime (ding) will sound.
At the same time, the push-button
ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position,
while depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even though
the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(455,1)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
453
9-10. IF THE REAR GATE
CANNOT BE OPENED
s09ag
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by pressing the rear gate opener
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Remove the access cover at
the bottom-center of the rear gate trim
using flat-head screwdriver.
S_901452-W
9
S_901695-W
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers because doing so may cause an injury.
Always use a flat-head screwdriver or
a similar tool.
2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to
the right position using a flat-head
screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the
rear gate will open.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(456,1)
454
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-11. MALFUNCTIONS OF
THE CENTER INFORMATION
DISPLAY
s09av
If the screen becomes blue or black,
temporary errors or malfunctions may
occur in the center information display.
If they are only temporary errors, the
following procedure may help to eliminate
them.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition switch once to the
“OFF” position.
3. Open and close the door.
4. Wait for the good-bye screen to
appear on the center information display, and then for it to disappear.
5. Start the engine.
6. If the center information display is not
recovered by restarting it, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
9-12. IF THE MOONROOF (If
Equipped) DOES NOT
CLOSE
s09aj
If the moonroof does not close, have the
system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(457,1)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-13. IF THE FUEL FILLER
LID CANNOT BE OPENED
455
3. Pull the clip to unlock the fuel filler lid.
s09aw
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to
a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be
opened from the cargo area.
1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Remove the access cover at
the right-side of the cargo area trim
using a flat-head screwdriver.
S_901682-W
9
S_901680-W
2. Remove the clip from the trim.
S_901681-W
Clip
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(458,1)
456
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9-14. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS
INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT
s09ar
TO RESTART THE ENGINE
WHEN INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT
s09ar02
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that fuel
has leaked on the ground, do not try to
restart the engine. The fuel system
has been damaged and is in need of
repair. Immediately contact the nearest automotive service facility. Consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage. However,
depending on the impact conditions at the
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off
system may not operate.
Perform the following procedures to
restart the engine after the system is
activated.
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING/
UNLOCKING OPERATION
WHEN INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT
deploy, the door locks may be unlocked
automatically to enable emergency escape. Generally, an impact sustained
from a rear end collision does not trigger
the airbags to deploy. However if the
impact is strong enough to deploy the
airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking
function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic
door locking/unlocking function will be
suspended and the doors will remain
unlocked.
Confirm the safety of the surroundings
first and carry out the following to retrieve
the automatic door locking/unlocking
function.
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the impact,
the emergency unlocking may not function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. The doors unlock automatically
while driving.
. With all doors shut, the doors
unlock when pressing the lock side
of the power door locking switch.
. The automatic door locking/unlocking function does not operate.
s09ar03
When the automatic door locking/unlocking function is ON, all the doors will be
locked automatically while driving. For
further details, refer to “Automatic Door
Locking/Unlocking” �P134.
When the vehicle sustains a strong
impact which may trigger the airbags to
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(459,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(460,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(461,1)
APPEARANCE CARE
10-1. Exterior Care ...............................................................................460
s10
Washing ..................................................................................... 460
Waxing and Polishing ................................................................. 461
Cleaning Alloy Wheels ................................................................ 462
Cleaning Tire (Vehicle with White Letter Tires)............................. 462
10-2. Corrosion Protection ..................................................................463
Most Common Causes of Corrosion ............................................ 463
To Help Prevent Corrosion .......................................................... 463
10-3. Cleaning the Interior ...................................................................464
Seat Fabric Material .................................................................... 464
Leather Seat Materials................................................................. 464
Synthetic Leather Upholstery ...................................................... 464
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches, Instrument
Cluster, and Other Plastic Surface ............................................. 465
Center Information Display.......................................................... 465
10
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(462,1)
460
APPEARANCE CARE
10-1. EXTERIOR CARE
NOTE
s10aa
WASHING
s10aa01
CAUTION
. When using detergent to wash
your vehicle, use plenty of water
and thoroughly rinse away the
detergent so that none remains on
the brake calipers. If the brakes
(brake calipers) are wet, the braking distance will be longer. To dry
the brakes (brake calipers), drive
the vehicle at a safe speed while
lightly pressing the brake pedal to
warm up the brakes (brake calipers).
. Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction of
the power steering.
. When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers and protruding
objects such as exhaust pipes and
exhaust finishers, be careful to
prevent injuries from contacting
sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if a
detergent with organic solvents is
used to wash the cover surface,
completely rinse off the detergent
with water. Otherwise, the cover
surface may be damaged.
. If the climate control system is
operating when you wash the
vehicle, do not set the air inlet
selection of the climate control to
outside air circulation mode. There
is a risk that water may enter the
vehicle through the air inlets.
When having your vehicle washed in an
automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be
washed off by using a light detergent, as
required. If you use a light detergent,
make certain that it is a neutral detergent.
Do not use strong soap or chemical
detergents. All cleaning agents should be
promptly flushed from the surface and not
allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle
thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water.
Wipe the remaining water off with a
chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves
and use a hand brush when washing
down underbody, inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and
dirt off.
Washing the underbody
s10aa0101
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely
corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of
underbody components, such as the
exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and
suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and
inside of the fenders with lukewarm or
cold water at frequent intervals to reduce
the harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(463,1)
461
APPEARANCE CARE
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing suspension components.
. When cleaning the lower part of the
car body, keep a sufficient distance
between the car wash nozzle and
the car body, and do not wash the
same area continuously. Doing so
may damage components of the
engine, electrical system, rubber
trim, or other parts.
Using a pressure washer
s10aa0102
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle
and the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continuously.
. If you are unable to remove a stain
easily using the pressure washer,
wash the area by hand. Note that
some pressure washers may spray
hot or high pressure water that will
damage the vehicle body paint, damage or deform moldings or other
resin parts, or cause water to leak into
the vehicle.
WAXING AND POLISHING
s10aa02
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has
diminished to the point where the luster or
tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A No.
2000 grain compound is recommended.
Never use a coarse-grained compound.
Coarser grained compounds have a
smaller grain-size number and could
damage the paint. After polishing with a
compound, coat with wax to restore the
original luster. Frequent polishing with a
compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is applied
to the cover surface, completely wipe
off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the
cover surface may be damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
For Subaru Outback Wilderness models,
if wax gets onto the hood decal when you
are waxing your vehicle, this could enhance the reflective appearance of the
hood decal and impair the antireflective
function.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome
trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss
of wax on a painted surface leads to loss
of the original luster and also quickens the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
10
(464,1)
462
APPEARANCE CARE
CLEANING ALLOY WHEELS
s10aa04
Vehicles without matte painted
wheels
s10aa0403
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean
of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is
left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a
neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse
thoroughly with water. Do not clean
the wheels with a stiff brush or expose
them to a high-speed washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy
wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or
other agents.
CLEANING TIRE (Vehicle with
White Letter Tires)
s10aa05
It is recommended to clean the white
letter part on the side of the tire frequently
because it easily gets dirty. When cleaning, use a neutral detergent and wash
with a sponge.
Vehicles with matte painted
wheels
s10aa0404
CAUTION
Be sure to observe the following
precautions as matte painted wheels
can be damaged.
. Do not scrub or polish the wheels
using a brush or dry cloth.
. Do not use any wheel coatings or
abrasive detergents.
As matte painted wheels require different
cleaning methods than conventional alloy
wheels, be sure to observe the following.
For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Remove dirt using water. If the wheels
are excessively dirty, use a sponge or
soft cloth dampened with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the dirt.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(465,1)
APPEARANCE CARE
10-2. CORROSION PROTECTION
s10ab
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used
on most parts of the vehicle to help
maintain fine appearance, strength, and
reliable operation.
MOST COMMON CAUSES OF
CORROSION
s10ab01
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the
air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range
just above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which
cannot dry quickly due to lack of
proper ventilation.
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION
463
. Roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components,
such as the exhaust system, fuel and
brake lines, brake cables, suspension,
steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If
any of them are found to be rusted, they
should be given an appropriate rust
prevention treatment (except for the exhaust system) or should be replaced.
Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform
this kind of maintenance and treatment if
you need assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor
mats because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and
other corrosive materials are used, the
door hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and
hood latch should be inspected and
lubricated periodically.
s10ab02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
10
(466,1)
464
APPEARANCE CARE
10-3. CLEANING THE INTERIOR
s10ac
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the
climate control panel, audio equipment,
instrument panel, center console, instrument cluster panel, and switches. (Do not
use organic solvents.)
SEAT FABRIC MATERIAL
s10ac01
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner.
Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
make sure it does not affect the fabric
adversely. Use the cleaner according to
its instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage the
surface and cause the color to deteriorate.
LEATHER SEAT MATERIALS
s10ac02
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on
the surface can cause leather to become
brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain
its resiliency, leather should be cleaned
monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.
Some types of clothing textiles may
transfer color to the leather.
Before cleaning leather upholstery, vacuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and
lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm
water and mild soap, taking care not to
soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. Use a gentle
circular motion while cleaning the leather
- do not rub or apply extreme pressure.
Wipe the leather again with another
clean, slightly damp cloth to remove soap
residue and dry with a soft cloth.
Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt
spots may be treated with a commercial
leather spray.
CAUTION
Never use alcohol, cleaning solvents,
leather oils, varnishes or polishes on
your leather as it will dry out the leather
finish.
If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
You will discover that each leather seat
section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,
which is characteristic of genuine leather.
SYNTHETIC LEATHER UPHOLSTERY
s10ac03
The synthetic leather material used on
the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild
soap or detergent and water, after first
vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt.
Allow the soap to soak in for a few
minutes and wipe off with a clean, damp
cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners
suitable for synthetic leather materials
may be used when necessary. Much like
genuine leather, some types of fabric
used in clothing may transfer color to
synthetic leather. If you do not clean
transferred color from synthetic leather
for an extended period of time, it may be
difficult to remove the color, so be sure to
clean any such stains from synthetic
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(467,1)
465
APPEARANCE CARE
leather promptly.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner
or gasoline must never be used on
leather or synthetic interior materials.
Doing so could damage the surface
and cause the color to deteriorate.
INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE PANEL, SWITCHES, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER, AND
OTHER PLASTIC SURFACE
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the display(s). Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the display(s) with a
hard cloth. Doing so could scratch
the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, gasoline, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches on the
display(s).
s10ac04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the
instrument panel, center console, instrument cluster panel, and switches.
CAUTION
10
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that contain
those solvents. Doing so could
damage the surface and cause the
color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents that
contain silicone on the vehicle
audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or any
switches. If silicone adheres to
these parts, it may cause damage
to electrical components.
CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY
s10ac11
To clean the center information display,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely
dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened
with neutral detergent then carefully wipe
off any remaining detergent.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(468,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(469,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-1. Maintenance Schedule ...............................................................469
s11
11-2. Maintenance Precautions ...........................................................469
Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment........... 470
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment ............ 471
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment While
the Engine Is Running............................................................... 471
11-3. Maintenance Tips ........................................................................472
When Replacing Parts................................................................. 472
Removing and Reinstalling Clips................................................. 472
11-4. Engine Hood................................................................................473
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview .................................................475
11-6. Engine Oil ....................................................................................476
Engine Oil Consumption ............................................................. 476
Checking the Oil Level ................................................................ 476
Changing the Oil and Oil Filter .................................................... 477
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ............................................ 477
Synthetic Oil ............................................................................... 478
11-7. Cooling System...........................................................................478
Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ........................................... 479
Engine Coolant ........................................................................... 479
11-8. Air Cleaner Element....................................................................480
Replacing the Air Cleaner Element .............................................. 480
11-9. Spark Plugs .................................................................................482 11
Recommended Spark Plugs ........................................................ 482
11-10. Drive Belt .....................................................................................482
11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid ...............................483
11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil .......483
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ............................................ 483
11-13. Brake Fluid ..................................................................................484
Checking the Fluid Level............................................................. 484
Recommended Brake Fluid ......................................................... 484
11-14. Brake Pedal .................................................................................485
11-15. Replacement of Brake Pad.........................................................485
Breaking-In of New Brake Pads ................................................... 485
11-16. Tires and Wheels ........................................................................486
Types of Tires ............................................................................. 486
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (Except for
Canada-Spec. Models)............................................................... 487
Tire Inspection ............................................................................ 488
Tire Pressures and Wear ............................................................. 489
Wheel Balance ............................................................................ 490
Wear Indicators........................................................................... 491
Rotational Direction of Tires........................................................ 491
Tire Rotation ............................................................................... 492
Tire Replacement ........................................................................ 493
Wheel Replacement .................................................................... 493
11-17. Alloy Wheels ...............................................................................494
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(470,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-18. Windshield Washer Fluid ...........................................................495
11-19. Replacement of Wiper Blades....................................................496
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly .............................................. 497
Window Wiper Blade Rubber....................................................... 498
Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber............................................... 499
11-20. Battery .........................................................................................500
11-21. Fuses ...........................................................................................502
11-22. Installation of Accessories.........................................................503
11-23. Replacing Bulbs..........................................................................504
Headlights .................................................................................. 504
Rear Combination Lights............................................................. 504
Other Bulbs ................................................................................ 505
Adjusting Headlight Aim ............................................................. 506
11-24. Replacing Battery .......................................................................507
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob.......................................... 507
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(471,1)
469
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
U.S. models
s11aa
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet”. For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required
to be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule, read the separate “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
11-2. MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
s11ab
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be performed
on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will result in
transmission damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries
to persons nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehicle.
Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery acid.
. Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent to
do so. Serious personal injury may
result to persons not experienced
in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(472,1)
470
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
. Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in a
poorly ventilated area, such as a
garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open flames
around the fuel or battery. This will
cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only by
your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids in
your eyes. If something does get in
your eyes, thoroughly wash them
out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of the
SRS airbag system or seatbelt
pretensioner system, or attempt to
take its connectors apart, as that
may activate the system or it can
render it inoperative. NEVER use a
circuit tester for these wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Check the inside of the engine
compartment to see if there are any
cloths and tools left. If they are left
inside, they may be a cause of
malfunction and fire.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing systems
and strongly advises against performing
these services on a SUBARU vehicle.
Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents
which have not been tested or approved
by SUBARU. SUBARU warranties do not
cover any part of the vehicle which is
damaged by adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those
approved or recommended by SUBARU.
BEFORE CHECKING OR SERVICING IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
s11ab01
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after the
engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan may
operate suddenly even when the
engine is stopped. If your body or
clothes come into contact with a
rotating fan, that could result in
serious injury. To avoid risk of
injury, always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF” position
and confirm that the operation
indicator on the switch is turned off.
Then take the access key fob out
from the vehicle.
. Before performing any servicing on
a vehicle equipped with a remote
engine start system temporarily
place that system in the service
mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(473,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
471
WHEN CHECKING OR SERVICING IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
s11ab03
CAUTION
S_B02470-W
Safety stand
S_B02345-W
. Do not contact the cover while
checking the components in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause your hand to slip off the
cover and result in an unexpected
injury.
For any maintenance and inspection
performed on AWD models which requires a running engine and wheels
turning, jack up all four wheels or use free
rollers to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Never race the engine or brake suddenly.
11
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil filter
becomes very hot when the engine
is running and remains hot for
some time after the engine has
stopped.
WHEN CHECKING OR SERVICING IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT WHILE THE ENGINE IS RUNNING
s11ab02
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(474,1)
472
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-3. MAINTENANCE TIPS
s11bi
WHEN REPLACING PARTS
s11bi04
For information about replacement parts
for maintenance, contact any authorized
SUBARU dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Type B:
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as
shown in the illustration.
REMOVING AND REINSTALLING CLIPS
s11bi01
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
element or specific bulbs.
Removing clips
S_B02349-MW
s11bi0101
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
Type A:
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
S_B02347-MW
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
Type C:
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
S_B02350-MW
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(475,1)
473
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-4. ENGINE HOOD
Reinstalling clips
s11bi0102
s11ac
CAUTION
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
S_B02351-MW
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to the
engine hood. If the engine hood
becomes too heavy, the stay may
not be able to support holding it
open.
. Check that the end of the hood
prop is inserted into the slot. If it is
not inserted properly, the hood may
drop and cause injury.
NOTE
If the base of the hood prop is jammed,
put the hood prop back in position without
applying excessive force.
Opening the engine hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original position.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(476,1)
474
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Closing the engine hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood
and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm)
above its closed position and then let it
drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
S_B02355-MW
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is properly
locked before you start driving. If it is
not, it might fly open while the vehicle
is moving and block your view, which
may cause an accident and serious
bodily injury.
S_B02559-W
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
Hold the grip for handling the hood
prop.
S_B02560-W
Grip
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(477,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
475
11-5. ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
s11ad
11
S_B02593-W
Brake fluid reservoir (page 484)
Main fuse box (page 502)
Battery (page 500)
Washer fluid tank (page 495)
Engine oil filler cap (page 476)
Engine coolant reservoir (page 479)
Radiator cap (page 479)
Engine oil filter (page 477)
Engine oil level gauge (page 476)
Air cleaner case (page 480)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(478,1)
476
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-6. ENGINE OIL
s11ae
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Otherwise,
you may be injured accidentally
straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
s11ae07
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance
intervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods
of time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of
time)
. When towing a trailer
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under
severe thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil
more frequently. Different drivers in the
same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is
greater than expected, contact your
authorized SUBARU dealer who may
perform a test under controlled conditions.
CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL
s11ae01
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil
level just after stopping the engine,
wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan before
checking the level.
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right and
left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you
may be injured accidentally straining
yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
S_B02473-W
Oil level gauge
Oil filler cap
Oil filter
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(479,1)
477
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
S_B02474-MW
Full level
Low level
Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of
the level gauge. The engine oil level
must be judged by the lowest of the
two levels. If the oil level is below the
low level mark, add oil so that the full
level is reached.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to touch the engine
oil filter when removing the oil filler
cap. Doing so may result in a burn,
a pinched finger, or may cause
some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do
not add any additional oil above the
full level when the engine is cold.
. After adding or changing the engine
oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a
level surface, then start the engine
after a lapse of 1 minute or more.
Confirm that the warning light has
turned off after the engine has started.
Refer to “Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light” �P168.
CHANGING THE OIL AND OIL
FILTER
s11ae02
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when driving in
extremely cold weather.
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil
filter. Fully trained mechanics are on
standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize
the special tools, spare parts and
recommended oil for this work, and
also, used oils are properly disposed
of.
. If performing oil replacement yourself,
observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
RECOMMENDED GRADE AND
VISCOSITY
s11ae03
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(480,1)
478
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Refer to “Engine Oil” �P513.
11-7. COOLING SYSTEM
s11af
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However, in
hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the engine.
SYNTHETIC OIL
s11ae05
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
Oil” �P513. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recommended
engine oil for optimum engine performance. Conventional oil may be used if
synthetic oil is unavailable.
WARNING
. Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and
has cooled down completely. Since
the coolant is under pressure, you
may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
. Be careful of the rotating cooling
fan when the engine hood is open.
When the engine temperature is
high, the cooling fan in the engine
compartment may operate when
the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, even if the engine is
stopped. Touching the cooling fan
while it is rotating may result in
injury.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
that does not require the first
change for 11 years/137,500 miles
(11 years/220,000 km). Do not mix
this coolant with any other brand or
type of coolant during this period.
Mixing with a different coolant will
reduce the life of the coolant. When
necessary to top up the coolant for
any reason, use only SUBARU
SUPER COOLANT.
If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is
diluted with another brand or type,
the maintenance interval is shortened to that of the mixing coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(481,1)
479
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
COOLING FAN, HOSE AND
CONNECTIONS
Checking the coolant level
s11af0201
s11af03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not
operate even when the coolant temperature high warning light blinks or illuminates in RED, the cooling fan circuit may
be defective. Refer to “Coolant Temperature Low Indicator Light (Blue)/Coolant Temperature High Warning Light
(Red)” �P167.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is
cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to
the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve
tank is empty, remove the radiator cap
and refill coolant up to just below the
filler neck as shown in the following
illustration.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, check the radiator cap for
debris and the gasket rubber for
damage.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. Refer to “Fuses” �P502. If the fuse
is not blown, have the cooling system
checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If the frequent addition of coolant is
necessary between vehicle service visits,
it is recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer to check for leaks,
damage, or looseness.
11
S_B02477-W
ENGINE COOLANT
s11af02
Fill up to this level.
S_B02476-W
“FULL” level mark
“LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level, such as at fuel
stops.
S_B02364-MW
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If engine coolant gets on the
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(482,1)
480
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
4. Reinstall the cap and check that the
rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
Changing the coolant
11-8. AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
s11ag
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the air
cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters intake
air but also stops flames if the engine
backfires. If the air cleaner element is
not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.
s11af0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used, there
is the possibility of causing a negative
effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the air cleaner element is perforated or removed, engine
wear will be excessive and engine life
shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the air
cleaner element.
REPLACING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
s11ag01
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine
SUBARU parts.
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(483,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
S_B02478-W
481
S_B02367-W
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Clips
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
NOTE
Install the air cleaner element so that the
surface with “UPR” printed on it faces
upward.
11
S_B02366-W
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
case (both front and rear) with a damp
cloth and install a new air cleaner
element.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the projections on the air cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(484,1)
482
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-9. SPARK PLUGS
11-10. DRIVE BELT
s11ah
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
RECOMMENDED SPARK
PLUGS
s11ai
It is unnecessary to check the deflection
of the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement
of the drive belt should be done according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
s11ah01
Refer to “Electrical System” �P517.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(485,1)
483
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-11. CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE TRANSMISSION
FLUID
s11ay
There is no fluid level gauge. It is
unnecessary to check the continuously
variable transmission fluid level. However, if necessary, consult your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
11-12. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL AND REAR
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
s11bl
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
RECOMMENDED GRADE AND
VISCOSITY
s11bl01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Front Differential and Rear Differential
Gear Oil” �P516.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other than
the specified oil may cause a decline
in vehicle performance.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(486,1)
484
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-13. BRAKE FLUID
s11ao
Visually check the brake fluid level of the
reservoir monthly on the even surface.
CHECKING THE FLUID LEVEL
s11ao01
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately
flush them thoroughly with clean
water. For safety, when performing
this work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air. Any absorbed moisture can
cause a dangerous loss of braking
performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If you
suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake fluid
may damage them.
S_B02479-W
“MAX” level line
“MIN” level line
Be sure to check the brake fluid level from
the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid
level is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to
“MAX”. Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.
RECOMMENDED BRAKE
FLUID
s11ao02
Refer to “Fluids” �P516.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT
3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they
are the same brand.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(487,1)
485
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-14. BRAKE PEDAL
s11ar
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
11-15. REPLACEMENT OF
BRAKE PAD
s11at
CAUTION
. If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
. It is recommended that you disconnect the vehicle battery before
replacing the brake pad. However,
it is dangerous to disconnect the
vehicle battery. Have your
SUBARU dealer replace the brake
pad.
11
S_B02369-MW
The disc brakes have audible wear
indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
BREAKING-IN OF NEW BRAKE
PADS
s11at01
When replacing the brake pad, use only
genuine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(488,1)
486
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
11-16. TIRES AND WHEELS
s11av
Brake pad
s11at0101
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
TYPES OF TIRES
s11av01
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires
s11av0101
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in yearround driving including snowy and icy
road conditions. However, all season tires
do not offer as much traction performance
as winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose
snow or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow)
on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires
s11av0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snowcovered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
Winter (snow) tires
s11av0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However,
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on
roads other than snow-covered and icy
roads.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(489,1)
487
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (Except for
Canada-Spec. Models)
s11av02
The tire pressure monitoring system
provides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor
that is installed in each wheel when tire
pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only
when the vehicle is driven. Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. To avoid
this problem when adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, inflate the
tires to pressures higher than those
shown on the tire inflation pressure label.
Specifically, inflate them by an extra 1 psi
(6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for every difference of 10°F (5.6°C) between the temperature in the garage and the temperature outside. By way of example, the
following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various
outside temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 60°F (15.6°C).
Example:
Tire size: 225/65R17 102T, 225/60R18
100H, 225/55R19 99H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
Front
Rear
30°F (−1°C)
38 (260, 2.7)
36 (250, 2.5)
10°F (−12°C)
40 (275, 2.8)
38 (265, 2.75)
−10°F (−23°C)
42 (290, 3.0)
41 (280, 2.9)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described above. Then, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and
check to see that the low tire pressure
warning light goes off a few minutes later.
If the low tire pressure warning light does
not go off, the tire pressure monitoring
system may not be functioning normally.
In this event, go to a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected as soon as
possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned on or the light
illuminates steadily after blinking for
approximately one minute, you should
have your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System checked at a SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(490,1)
488
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
form the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
3) Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the
COLD tire pressure shown on the
tire inflation pressure label on the
door pillar on the driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may have significant damage and a
fast leak that causes the tire to lose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to
“Flat Tires” �P439.
When a replacement tire is mounted
or a wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute. This indicates the TPMS
is unable to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible for tire and sensor
replacement and/or system resetting.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
TPMS valve self-registration
s11av0201
When the wheels are replaced (such as
when installing snow tires) or when a new
TPMS valve is mounted on a new
installed wheel, you will need to perform
TPMS valve self-registration. Refer to the
following procedure to perform TPMS
valve self-registration.
1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves
on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified value. For information about the
specified value of the tire pressure,
refer to “Tires” �P517.
3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40
km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until
the low tire pressure warning light
turns off.
NOTE
. When installing TPMS valves, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
. Registration of TPMS valves can also
be done at a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer.
TIRE INSPECTION
s11av03
Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same
time, check the tires for abnormal
wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires
strike curbs or are subjected to
harsh treatment as when the
vehicle is driven on a rough
surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the
naked eye. This type of damage
does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive
over curbs, potholes or on other
rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
speed down to a walking pace
or less, and approach the curbs
as squarely as possible. Also,
make sure the tires are not
pressed against the curb when
you park the vehicle.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(491,1)
489
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
. If you feel unusual vibration
while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight
line, one of the tires and/or
wheels may be damaged. Drive
slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the
vehicle inspected.
TIRE PRESSURES AND WEAR
s11av04
Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires’
service lives and is essential for
good running performance. Check
and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month
and before any long journey.
Tire inflation pressure label
side temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful
not to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire in-
creases by approximately 4.3
psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when
the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or
has been driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will
result in low tire pressure.
S_B02370-MW
Incorrect tire pressures detract
from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to
wear abnormally.
Check the tire pressures when the
tires are cold. Use a pressure
gauge to adjust the tire pressures
to the values shown on the tire
inflation pressure label. The tire
inflation pressure label is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire
pressures are affected by the out– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(492,1)
490
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
. Correctly inflated tires (tread
worn evenly)
. Over inflated tires (tread worn in
center)
S_B02371-MW
S_B02373-MW
Roadholding is good, and steering
is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also
lower.
. Under inflated tires (tread worn
at shoulders)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road surface bumps and dips, possibly
resulting in vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly become
hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the
tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
S_B02372-MW
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel
consumption is also higher.
WHEEL BALANCE
s11av05
Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new,
but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn
during use. Wheel imbalance
causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle
speeds and detracts from the
vehicle’s straight-line stability. It
can also cause steering and sus-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(493,1)
491
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
pension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly
balanced, have them checked and
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire
repairs and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one
side and reduces the vehicle’s
running stability. Contact your
SUBARU dealer if you notice
abnormal tire wear.
grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6
mm). A tire must be replaced when
the tread wear indicator appears
as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable
limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high speeds
in wet weather can cause the
vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a
certain alignment (relative to the
other wheels and to the road) for
optimum straight-line stability and
cornering performance.
WEAR INDICATORS
s11av06
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread
regularly and replace the tires
before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
ROTATIONAL DIRECTION OF
TIRES
s11av11
Example of rotational direction
marked on the sidewall:
S_B02480-MW
New tread
Worn tread
Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread
S_B02481-MW
Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(494,1)
492
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing forward direction when the wheels
are fitted.
Models with a spare tire of the
same wheel type as the installed
tires:
TIRE ROTATION
s11av07
Vehicles equipped with 4 nonunidirectional tires:
S_B02545-W
Front
NOTE
S_B02482-MW
Front
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires:
S_B02483-MW
Front
In prior to carrying out a tire
rotation, check the side wall of the
tires and confirm the following.
. All 5 tires are the same in brand
and tread pattern.
. The rotational directions and
sizes match.
Tire wear varies from wheel to
wheel. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each
time they are rotated. For the tire
rotation schedule, refer to the
“Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation.
After tire rotation, adjust the tire
pressures and make sure the
wheel nuts are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel
nuts again and retighten any nut
that has become loose.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(495,1)
493
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
TIRE REPLACEMENT
s11av08
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire inflation pressure label.
For more details about tire inflation
pressure, refer to “Tires” �P517.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort,
braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also
creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances
and inappropriately changes the vehicle’s
ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern),
construction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard
equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing tire(s),
all four tires must be the same for
the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
For items (a) to (c), you must obey
the specification that is printed on
the tire inflation pressure label. The
tire inflation pressure label is
located on the driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechanical
damage could be caused to the
drivetrain of the car, and affect the
followings.
–
–
–
–
Ride
Handling
Braking
Speedometer/Odometer calibration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control, and it
can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously reduce
controllability, resulting in an accident.
WHEEL REPLACEMENT
s11av09
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not
meeting specifications could interfere
with brake caliper operation and may
cause the tires to rub against the
wheel well housing during turns. The
resulting loss of vehicle control could
lead to an accident.
(h) Degrees of wear
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(496,1)
494
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed and
replaced for tire rotation or to change a
flat tire, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
11-17. ALLOY WHEELS
s11bm
Alloy wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If
any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU
parts designed for alloy wheels.
. When stacking and storing removed
tires, place shock-absorbing material
between the tires to protect the wheels
from becoming scratched.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(497,1)
495
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-18. WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
s11ax
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark
on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield
washer fluid.
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
S_308080-W
When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will appear.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as
follows.
If you fill the washer fluid tank with a fluid
with a different concentration from the
one used previously, purge the old fluid
from the piping between the washer fluid
tank and washer nozzles by operating the
washer for a certain period of time.
Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid
remaining in the piping is too low for the
outside temperature, it may freeze and
block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside
temperature. If the concentration is
inappropriate, sprayed washer
fluid may freeze on the windshield
and obstruct your view, and the
fluid may freeze in the washer fluid
tank.
. Be careful foreign matter does not
contaminate the washer fluid when
filling the tank. Contamination
could cause malfunctions, such as
clogging the pump.
S_B02617-W
“FULL” mark
. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(498,1)
496
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades or
washer system.
11-19. REPLACEMENT OF
WIPER BLADES
s11az
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results
in jerky wiper operation and streaking on
the glass. If you cannot remove the
streaks after operating the windshield
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
clean the outer surface of the windshield
and rear window using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mildabrasive cleaner. Do not, however, use
detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use
only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when
you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe
the rubber of the blade strongly, the black
coating component will peel off, which will
cause the wiper to judder. Also, after
wiping it off, check that the rubber has not
come loose. After cleaning the window
glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to
rinse them with clean water. Rinse the
window until the water does not form
beads on the glass. This indicates that the
glass is clean.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades with
gasoline or a solvent, such as paint
thinner or benzine. This will cause
deterioration of the wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the passenger-side wiper arm, first raise
the driver-side wiper arm. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper arm
to its original position. Otherwise,
the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly
will touch each other, possibly
resulting in scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(499,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
to the original positions, return the
wipers slowly on the windshield by
hand. Returning the wipers from
the detached positions by the
spring operation might change the
shape of the wiper arm or scratch
the windshield.
497
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
hand, open the lock cover to release
the lock.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not return
the wiper arms to the original
positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following procedures.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE
ASSEMBLY
S_B02610-W
Lock cover
3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
holding its pivot area and pushing it in
the direction shown by the arrow.
s11az01
NOTE
Do not lower the wiper arm while the
wiper blade assembly is removed.
11
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
First raise the driver’s side wiper arm
and then raise the front passenger’s
side wiper arm.
CAUTION
S_B02611-W
S_B02380-MW
Hold the wiper arm when replacing the
wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade,
may result in blade deformation.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(500,1)
498
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
4. When installing the wiper blade assembly, align it with the wiper arm
connection part and then slide it in the
opposite direction of removal to install.
After installing the wiper blade assembly, close the lock cover and
check that the connection part is
locked completely.
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the
metal spines from the old blade rubber
and install them in the new blade
rubber.
S_B02614-W
Metal spines
S_B02612-W
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
3. Align the claws of the support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the
blade rubber assembly into the support until it locks.
WINDOW WIPER BLADE RUBBER
s11az05
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until
the stoppers on the rubber are free of
the support.
S_B02615-W
S_B02613-W
Support
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(501,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
499
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the
wiper blade may scratch the windshield.
S_B02389-W
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the
metal spines from the old blade rubber
and install them in the new blade
rubber.
S_B02616-W
Stopper
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
RUBBER
11
s11az04
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
S_B02487-W
Metal spines
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
S_B02388-W
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
S_B02391-W
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic sup– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(502,1)
500
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
port ends. If the rubber is not retained
properly, the wiper may scratch the
rear window glass.
11-20. BATTERY
s11ba
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
S_B02392-W
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in
place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection or
shield your eyes when working
near any battery. Never lean over a
battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large
amount of milk or water, and seek
medical attention immediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact with
any other metallic portion of the
vehicle because a short circuit will
result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(503,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
harm. Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash
hands after handling.
LN3 Battery
501
NOTE
To avoid battery drain, do not use electric
power (e.g., lights, wipers, climate control, seat heaters, etc.) for longer than
necessary when the engine is off. If using
the radio, room lights or other electrical
equipment with the engine off, even if the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” position, the
battery will drain.
S_B02609-W
Cap
Upper level
Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water. Refer to
“Electrical System” �P517.
For MySubaru Connected Services
without navigation system:
When the vehicle battery is discharged or
replaced, certain internal settings can be
restored only by pairing the vehicle to a
smartphone via Bluetooth, or by visiting a
SUBARU dealer. Until those internal
settings are restored, certain convenience features, including the “Service
Appointment Scheduler,” may be unavailable.
11
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because it
will shorten battery life.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(504,1)
502
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-21. FUSES
s11bb
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a
higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
in the engine compartment. Also, the
spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in
the fuse box cover.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller
when removing it from the main fuse box.
NOTE
Fuse rating and used circuit are described on behind each fuse box cover.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
S_B02491-W
Good
Blown
S_B02394-MW
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
S_B02607-W
Spare fuses
Fuse puller
S_B02594-W
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the
same rating.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(505,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for repairs.
503
11-22. INSTALLATION OF
ACCESSORIES
s11bd
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories on your vehicle.
11
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(506,1)
504
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-23. REPLACING BULBS
s11be
We recommend that you have your
vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
REAR COMBINATION LIGHTS
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clips of the covers.
s11be05
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new bulb
of the specified wattage. Using a bulb
of different wattage could result in a
fire. For the specified wattage of each
bulb, refer to “Bulb Chart” �P518. For
replacement, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Do not touch the glass portion of the
light bulb with bare hands. When
holding the glass portion is unavoidable, hold it with a clean dry cloth to
avoid getting moisture and grease on
the bulb. If there are any fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface, wipe them
away with a soft cloth moistened with
alcohol. Also, if the bulb is scratched
or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
S_B02561-W
2. Slide the side cover upward and
remove it.
HEADLIGHTS
s11be18
S_B02562-W
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
S_B02514-W
The LED headlight warning light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction.
S_B02563-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(507,1)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
4. Slide the rear combination light assembly rearward to remove it from the
vehicle.
505
8. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
9. Reconnect the electrical connector.
10.Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged
part of the combination light assembly
securely to each holder of the vehicle
side.
S_B02564-W
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
S_B02567-W
11. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
12.Reinstall the side cover.
OTHER BULBS
s11be29
S_B02565-W
6. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We
recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
S_B02566-W
7. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(508,1)
506
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
ADJUSTING HEADLIGHT AIM
s11be57
Headlight aim adjustment
s11be5702
1. Turn the screw A clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust it.
Remember the direction of the rotation
and number of rotations.
S_B02547-W
Adjustment direction mark
2. Turn screw B the same number of
turns and in the same direction as step
1.
S_B02546-W
Adjustment screw A
Adjustment screw B
Before checking the headlight
aiming
s11be5701
1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of
gasoline and the area around the
headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Sit in the driver’s seat.
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
S_B02548-W
Adjustment direction mark
NOTE
. If the headlight aim cannot be adjusted, contact your SUBARU dealer.
. To inspect of the headlight aim position, consult a SUBARU dealer.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(509,1)
507
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11-24. REPLACING BATTERY
s11bk
The access key fob battery may be
discharged under the following conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable.
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable.
. The transmitter does not operate
properly when used within the standard distance.
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key fob when
replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the access
key fob when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any removed
parts; children could swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion if
the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of the battery.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key fob functions
properly.
. To clear the access key fob battery
warning message after replacing the
battery, carry the key fob into the
vehicle. Then, without depressing the
brake pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position and then to the
“OFF” position.
– If the access key fob battery
warning message does not disappear even after you replace the
battery, it is possible that another
access key fob, other than the one
you are holding, is nearby and the
warning message is responding to
that access key fob. Replace the
battery of the second access key
fob as well and follow the same
procedure.
– Do not perform the warning message clearing procedure while
holding two or more access key
fobs.
REPLACING BATTERY OF ACCESS KEY FOB
s11bk01
Button battery: CR2032 or equivalent
CAUTION
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according to
the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be
careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. When removing or fitting the access key fob cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
. Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
11
(510,1)
508
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
1. Take out the emergency key.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive
(+) side facing upward as shown in the
figure.
S_204470-MW
Release button
Emergency key
S_B02413-MW
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with
vinyl tape or a cloth, and insert it in the
gap to remove the cover.
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
by fitting the projections and recesses
together.
S_B02414-MW
S_B02411-MW
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
S_B02412-MW
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(511,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(512,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(513,1)
SPECIFICATIONS
12-1. Specifications..............................................................................512
s12
Dimensions................................................................................. 512
Engine ........................................................................................ 512
Fuel ............................................................................................ 512
Engine Oil................................................................................... 513
Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil ........................... 516
Fluids ......................................................................................... 516
Engine Coolant ........................................................................... 516
Electrical System ........................................................................ 517
Tires ........................................................................................... 517
Temporary Spare Tires ................................................................ 517
Brake Disc .................................................................................. 517
12-2. Bulb Chart ...................................................................................518
Safety Precautions ...................................................................... 518
Bulb Chart .................................................................................. 519
12-3. Vehicle Identification ..................................................................521
12-4. Function Settings........................................................................522
Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information
Display ..................................................................................... 522
Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center
Information Display................................................................... 522
Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer.......... 522
12
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(514,1)
512
SPECIFICATIONS
12-1. SPECIFICATIONS
s12aa
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
DIMENSIONS
s12aa01
in (mm)
Item
Outback
Subaru Outback Wilderness
Overall length
191.7 (4,870)
191.7 (4,870)
Overall width
74.0 (1,880)
74.0 (1,880)
Overall height
67.5 (1,715)
68.3 (1,735)
Wheel base
108.1 (2,745)
108.1 (2,745)
Front
62.4 (1,585)
62.0 (1,575)
Rear
63.4 (1,610)
63.0 (1,600)
8.66 (220)
9.45 (240)
Tread
Ground clearance*
*: Measured with vehicle empty
ENGINE
s12aa02
Engine model
FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4
cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4
cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline
engine
Displacement cu-in (cc)
152 (2,498)
146 (2,387)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm)
3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)
3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0)
Compression ratio
Firing order
12.0
10.6
1–3–2–4
1–3–2–4
FUEL
s12aa08
Fuel requirement
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
18.0 US gal (68 liters, 15.0 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “Fuel” �P304.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(515,1)
SPECIFICATIONS
513
ENGINE OIL
s12aa12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine Oil”
�P476.
NOTE
Have the procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter performed by a properlytrained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your
SUBARU dealer.
Approved engine oil
s12aa1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the
next page.
Alternative engine oil
s12aa1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for
replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will
enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy.
However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable
temperatures.
. When adding oil, you may use different brands together as long as they are the
same ILSAC and API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by
SUBARU.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
12
(516,1)
514
SPECIFICATIONS
2.5 L non-turbo models:
Oil grade
ZOM0981-W
ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory
Committee) GF-6B, which
can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark
(Shield mark)
ZOM0982-W
ZOM0983-W
ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory
Committee) GF-6A, which
can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark
(Starburst mark)
API (American Petroleum
Institute) classification SP
with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
0W-16 synthetic oil is the required oil for optimum engine performance and protection.
Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
SAE viscosity No.
and applicable
temperature
ZOM0984-W
*: If 0W-16 synthetic oil is not available, 0W-20 conventional oil may be used if
replenishment is needed but should be changed to 0W-16 synthetic oil at the next oil
change.
.
Engine oil capacity .
.
Adding the oil from L to F level: 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)
Changing the oil and oil filter: 4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
Changing the oil: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(517,1)
515
SPECIFICATIONS
2.4 L turbo models:
Oil grade
ZOM0982-W
ZOM0983-W
ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6A, which
can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with the words “RESOURCE
CONSERVING”
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil for optimum engine performance and protection.
Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
SAE viscosity No.
and applicable
temperature
12
ZOM1020-W
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 5W-30 conventional oil may be used if you need to
add oil. However, you should change to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.
Engine oil capacity
.
.
.
Adding the oil from L to F level: 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)
Changing the oil and oil filter: 4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
Changing the oil: 4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(518,1)
516
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL AND REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
s12aa13
Oil
Oil grade
Oil capacity*1
Remarks*2
.
.
Front differential gear oil
Rear differential gear oil
SUBARU Extra MT*3
API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*4
API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
2.5 L non-turbo models: 1.4 US qt (1.3
liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
2.4 L turbo models: 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1
Imp qt)
0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” �P483
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly
depending on the temperature and other factors. Check the oil level after refilling the gearbox with oil.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.
*4: You may use this type of differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from fuel efficiency.
FLUIDS
s12aa10
Fluid
Fluid type*1
Continuously variable transmission fluid
Brake fluid
Consult your SUBARU dealer.
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake
fluid
2.5 L non-turbo models for Outback:
12.4 US qt (11.7 liters, 10.3 Imp qt)
Fluid capacity*2
Remarks*3
—
2.4 L turbo models for Outback/Subaru
Outback Wilderness:
12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)
“Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid” �P483
“Brake Fluid” �P484
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly
depending on the temperature and other factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
ENGINE COOLANT
s12aa11
Coolant capacity
Coolant type
2.5 L non-turbo models: 8.7 US qt (8.2 liters, 7.2 Imp qt)
2.4 L turbo models: 9.2 US qt (8.7 liters, 7.7 Imp qt)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly
depending on the temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to
“Cooling System” �P478.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(519,1)
517
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
s12aa03
Battery type
LN3
Alternator
2.5 L non-turbo models: 12 V-150 A
2.4 L turbo models: 12 V-190 A
Spark plugs
2.5 L non-turbo models: DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)
2.4 L turbo models: SILKFR8A6 (NGK)
TIRES
s12aa05
Tire size
225/65R17 102T
225/60R18 100H
225/55R19 99H
Wheel size
17 6 7 J
18 6 7 J
19 6 7 J
Front
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Pressure
Wheel nut tightening torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut
wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest
automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a
Flat Tire” �P439.
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRES
s12aa15
Temporary spare tire size
T155/80 D17
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
BRAKE DISC
s12aa18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for
measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
12
(520,1)
518
SPECIFICATIONS
12-2. BULB CHART
s12ac
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s12ac03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a
risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new bulb
of the specified wattage. Using a bulb
of different wattage could result in a
fire.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(521,1)
SPECIFICATIONS
519
BULB CHART
s12ac04
S_C00669-W
NOTE
Light sources indicated by a number are light bulbs, and light sources indicated by a
letter are LEDs. For LED replacement, consult your SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
12
(522,1)
520
SPECIFICATIONS
Wattage
Bulb No.
Vanity mirror lights
12 V-2 W
—
Door step lights
12 V-5 W
W5W
Rear turn signal lights
12 V-21 W
WY21W
Map lights
—
—
Dome light
—
—
Side turn signal lights
—
—
License plate lights
—
—
High-mounted stop light
—
—
Backup light (Outback)
—
—
Tail lights
—
—
Stop lights
—
—
Rear side marker lights
—
—
Front side marker light
—
—
Low and high beam headlights
—
—
Front turn signal lights
—
—
Front fog lights
—
—
Daytime running light
—
—
Front position lights
—
—
Accessory lamp
—
—
Backup light (Subaru Outback Wilderness)
—
—
Rear gate light (if equipped)
—
—
Cargo area light
—
—
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(523,1)
SPECIFICATIONS
521
12-3. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
s12ad
12
S_C00670-W
Air conditioner label
Emission control label
Vehicle identification number
Certification label
Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle
placard)
Model number label
Fuel label
Vehicle identification number (under
the floor carpet of the right-hand front
seat)
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(524,1)
522
SPECIFICATIONS
12-4. FUNCTION SETTINGS
s12ag
FUNCTION SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS ON THE CENTER
INFORMATION DISPLAY
s12ag01
Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to
meet your personal requirements. Refer to “Center Information Display (CID) Features”
�P194.
INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS EXCLUDING CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY
s12ag02
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item
Function
Available settings
Factory default setting
Page
Alarm system
Alarm system
Operation/Non-operation
Operation
138
Remote keyless entry system
Audible signal
Operation/Non-operation
Operation
131
FUNCTION SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS PERFORMED BY A
DEALER
s12ag03
Item
Function
Available settings
Factory default setting
Monitoring start delay time
(after closing doors)
0 seconds/30 seconds
30 seconds
Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light illumination
ON/OFF
OFF
Keyless access with
push-button
Audible signal volume*1
Level 1 to 7
Level 6
Remote keyless entry
system
Audible signal volume*1
Level 1 to 7
Level 6
Key lock-in prevention
Key lock-in prevention
Operation/Non-operation
Operation
Auto dimmer cancel
Sensitivity of the operation
of the auto dimmer cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max
Mid
High beam assist function
High beam assist function
Operation/Non-operation
Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper
Reverse gear interlocked
rear wiper operation
Operation/Non-operation
Except for Canada and
Mexico: Non-operation
For Canada and Mexico:
Operation
Automatic rain sensing
windshield*2
Automatic adjusting mode
of wiper timing
Rain-sensing mode/vehicle speed interlocking
mode
Rain-sensing mode wiper
Power rear gate open
and close function
Power rear gate opening
and closing by access key
fob
Non-operation/Pressing
twice/Pressing and holding
Pressing and holding
Alarm system
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(525,1)
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Power rear gate open
and close function
523
Function
Available settings
Factory default setting
Manual operation
Operation/Non-operation
Non-operation
*1: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.
*2: If equipped
12
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(526,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(527,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
13-1. For U.S.A. ....................................................................................526
s13
13-2. Tire Information...........................................................................526
Tire Labeling............................................................................... 526
Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................... 529
Glossary of Tire Terminology ...................................................... 530
Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices ............................. 535
Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine ....................................... 535
Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle Load Capacities .... 538
Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading on Handling and
Stopping and on Tires............................................................... 538
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit.................................... 539
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ..................................540
TREADWEAR .............................................................................. 540
TRACTION AA, A, B, C ................................................................ 540
TEMPERATURE A, B, C ............................................................... 540
13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA) ................................................541
13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in Order to Report
a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................542
13-6. Certifications of Radio Frequency Devices ..............................542
Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System and Immobilizer System................................................ 542
Certification for the Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with
HomeLink® (If Equipped) ........................................................... 544
Certification for the Smart Rearview Mirror/Compass with
HomeLink® (If Equipped) ........................................................... 546
Certification for the Wireless Charger.......................................... 548
Certification for Remote Engine Starter ....................................... 550
Certification for Tire Pressure Monitoring System........................ 550
Certification for the BSW/RCTW .................................................. 550
Certification for the Front Cross Traffic Information/Front Cross
Traffic Braking .......................................................................... 551
Certification for MySubaru Connected Services ........................... 553
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
13
(528,1)
526 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
13-1. FOR U.S.A.
13-2. TIRE INFORMATION
s13aa
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
s13ab
TIRE LABELING
s13ab01
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful information on the tire.
Tire size
s13ab0101
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a
breakdown of its individual elements.
P Metric
s13ab0104
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire
size.
Example:
ZOM0243
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as
passenger cars
Section Width in millimeters
Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
R = Radial Construction
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(529,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(5)
Rim diameter in inches
Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
s13ab0105
The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the
size designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire’s speed rating.
Example:
ZOM0239
(6)
Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum
load a tire can carry at the
speed indicated by its speed
symbol, at maximum inflation
pressure.
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs
(600 kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs
(580 kg)
WARNING
527
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if the
tires are worn out, damaged,
repaired, retreaded, or
otherwise altered from their
original condition. If tires are
repaired, retreaded, or
otherwise altered, they may
not be suitable for original
equipment tire designed
loads and speeds.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
s13ab0102
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is 13
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. Here is a brief review of
the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a
load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7)
Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire’s
capability to travel at established and predetermined
speeds.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(530,1)
528 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Type A
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
ZOM0793
(1)
(2)
DOT symbol*
Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(3) Tire Size Code
(4) Tire Type Code (Optional,
within 4 letters)
(5) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the
calendar year; the second two
figures represent the year. For
example, 0101 means the 1st
week of 2001.
*: The DOTsymbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Type B
ZOM0925
(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Plant Code
(3) Manufacturer’s Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the
calendar year; the second two
figures represent the year. For
example, 0101 means the 1st
week of 2001.
*: The DOTsymbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
Other markings
s13ab0103
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
s13ab0106
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “350 kPa (51
PSI) MAX. PRESS”
Maximum load rating
s13ab0107
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated tire
on any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be loaded up to
the tire’s rated load.
Construction type
s13ab0108
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
Construction
s13ab0109
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(531,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
STER”
529
Quality Grading Standards” �P540.
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading information.
RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
s13ab0110
For details, refer to “Uniform Tire
s13ab02
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
s13ab0201
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “Tires” �P517.
Vehicle placard
s13ab0202
s13ab0203
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper inflation
s13ab0204
S_801501-W
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
S_D01240-W
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the 13
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature.
It is best to check tire pressure
outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm,
the air inside it expands, causing
the tire pressure to increase. Be
careful not to mistakenly release
air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(532,1)
530 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY
s13ab03
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may
be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the
extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to
fit the rim.
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Bias ply tire
. Groove
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Bead separation
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside
surface of a tubeless tire that
contains the inflating medium
within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(533,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that
must always face outward
when mounting on a vehicle.
531
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Light truck (LT) tire
. Open splice
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
13
gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or
less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Measuring rim
. Pneumatic tire
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
A mechanical device made of
rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel
or other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(534,1)
532 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
. Production options weight
flanges.
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
. Section width
. Radial ply tire
. Sidewall separation
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the
sidewall.
. Recommended inflation pres-
A tire that attains a traction index
equal to or greater than 110,
compared to the ASTM E1136-93
Standard Reference Test Tire,
when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and IceCovered Surfaces, and that is
marked with an Alpine Symbol “ ”
on at least one sidewall.
sure
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Snow tire
. Test rim
. Rim diameter
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Tread
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
. Rim type designation
. Tread rib
The industry of manufacturer’s
designation for a rim by style or
code.
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.
. Rim width
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
Nominal distance between rim
. Tread separation
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(535,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
533
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capacity.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that is
appended to the end of this section) and dividing by 2.
13
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(536,1)
534 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front.
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(537,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TIRE CARE – MAINTENANCE
AND SAFETY PRACTICES
s13ab04
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the
same time, check the tires for
abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become
visible. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the
tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at even low
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000
km). For details about tire rotation, refer to “Tire Rotation”
�P492. Replace any damaged
or unevenly worn tire at the time
of rotation. After tire rotation,
adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are
correctly tightened. For information about the tightening torque and tightening sequence for
the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat
535
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT – HOW
TO DETERMINE
s13ab05
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by
available cargo space. The load
limit of your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment
such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or
bike carrier, etc., and the tongue
load of a trailer. Therefore cargo
capacity can be calculated by the
following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations
s13ab0501
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following
examples:
Tires” �P439.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
13
(538,1)
536 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
Example 1A
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo
can be carried.
Example 1B
S_D01241-W
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or 800
lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
S_D01242-W
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
ZOM0043
ZOM0032
2. Calculate the available load
capacity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle
capacity weight of 800 lbs (363
kg).
2. Calculate the available load
capacity.
ZOM0044
3. The total weight now exceeds
ZOM0042
the capacity weight by 81 lbs
(37 kg), so the cargo weight
must be reduced by 81 lbs (37
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(539,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
537
2. Calculate the available load
kg) or more.
capacity.
Example 2A
ZOM0046
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo
can be carried.
S_D01243-W
Example 2B
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or 800
lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
S_D01244-W
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
ZOM0045
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
13
(540,1)
538 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
1. Calculate the total weight.
ZOM0041
2. Calculate the available load
capacity.
ZOM0048
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs
(10 kg), so the cargo weight
must be reduced by 22 lbs (10
kg) or more.
DETERMINING COMPATIBILITY OF TIRE AND VEHICLE
LOAD CAPACITIES
s13ab06
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the
maximum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and
each axle’s GAWR are shown on
the vehicle certification label affixed to the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not
only the maximum load rating of
tires but also loaded capacities of
the vehicle’s suspension, axles
and other parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
ADVERSE SAFETY CONSEQUENCES OF OVERLOADING
ON HANDLING AND STOPPING
AND ON TIRES
s13ab07
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle and tire as shown in the
following. This could lead to an
accident and possibly result in
severe personal injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles
and other parts of the body
could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten
vehicle life.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(541,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
539
load capacity of your vehicle.
STEPS FOR DETERMINING
CORRECT LOAD LIMIT
s13ab08
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and
there will be five 150 lbs (68 kg)
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650
lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step
4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
13
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(542,1)
540 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
13-3. UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING STANDARDS
s13ac
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger
car tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
s13ac02
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
TRACTION AA, A, B, C
s13ac03
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE A, B, C
s13ac04
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(543,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
541
13-4. REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS (USA)
s13ah
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To
contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.
gov; or write to: Administrator,
13
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(544,1)
542 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
13-5. HOW TO CONTACT
TRANSPORT CANADA IN
ORDER TO REPORT A
SAFETY CONCERN RELATING TO THE VEHICLE
(Canada)
s13cf
13-6. CERTIFICATIONS OF
RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES
s13ci
CERTIFICATION FOR KEYLESS
ACCESS WITH PUSH-BUTTON
START SYSTEM AND IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
s13ci01
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AKE
FCC ID: Y8PSU23S-1
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
S_D01245-W
ZOM0993-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(545,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
. Canada-spec. models
– Type 1
543
– Type 2
ZOM0994-W
13
ZOM0995-W
. Mexico-spec. models
ZOM1029-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(546,1)
544 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
CERTIFICATION FOR THE
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR/
COMPASS WITH HOMELINK® (If
Equipped)
s13ci03
In the event that there are still
programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos
can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free
HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-3553515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
ZOM0996
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(547,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
545
. Canada-spec. models
ZOM0996
13
ZOM0997
HomeLink® and the HomeLink®
house are registered trademarks
of Gentex Corporation.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating a garage door opener or
other device. Make sure that
people and objects are out of
the way of the garage door or
other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(548,1)
546 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
. U.S.-spec. models
. Do not use the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System with
a garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and
reverse feature as required
by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to
stop and reverse, does not
meet these safety standards.
Using a garage door opener
without these features increases risk of serious injury
or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink®
website at
www.homelink.com or call 1800-355-3515.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
CERTIFICATION FOR THE
SMART REARVIEW MIRROR/
COMPASS WITH HOMELINK® (If
Equipped)
s13ci04
Certification:
In the event that there are still
programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos
can be found at
www.HomeLink.com/Subaru,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free
HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-3553515.
ZOM0996
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(549,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
547
. Canada-spec. models
ZOM0996
13
ZOM0997
HomeLink and the HomeLink®
house are registered trademarks
of Gentex Corporation.
®
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(550,1)
548 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating a garage door opener or
other device. Make sure that
people and objects are out of
the way of the garage door or
other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System with
a garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and
reverse feature as required
by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to
stop and reverse, does not
meet these safety standards.
Using a garage door opener
without these features increases risk of serious injury
or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink®
website at www.HomeLink.
com/Subaru or call 1-800355-3515.
CERTIFICATION FOR THE
WIRELESS CHARGER
s13ci05
The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries:
FCC ID: ACJ932AF2201
CAUTION
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the
limits for a wireless power charger, pursuant to part 18 of the
FCC Rules.
This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in
a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio
communications, which can be
determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of
the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(551,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
– Increase the separation be-
549
Canada-spec. models:
tween the equipment and
receiver.
– Connect the equipment into
an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
This equipment complies with
FCC radiation exposure limits
set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at
least 20 cm or more away from
person’s body.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15
and part 18 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
13
ZOM1003
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(552,1)
550 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
CERTIFICATION FOR REMOTE
ENGINE STARTER
s13ci06
U.S.-spec. models
CERTIFICATION FOR TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
s13ci07
s13ci0601
ZOM0993-W
ZOM0993-W
Canada-spec. models
s13ci0602
CERTIFICATION FOR THE
BSW/RCTW
s13ci08
The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries:
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
ZOM0994-W
ZOM0993-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(553,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Canada-spec. models:
551
Mexico-spec. models:
ZOM1026-W
CERTIFICATION FOR THE
FRONT CROSS TRAFFIC INFORMATION/FRONT CROSS
TRAFFIC BRAKING
s13ci09
. U.S.-spec. models
ZOM0999-W
13
ZOM0993-W
ZOM1000-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(554,1)
552 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
. Canada-spec. models
ZOM1024-W
. Mexico-spec. models
ZOM1025-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(555,1)
CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
553
CERTIFICATION FOR MySubaru Connected Services
s13ci10
. U.S.-spec. models
13
ZOM1027-W
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(556,1)
554 CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
. Canada-spec. models
ZOM1028-W
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(557,1)
INDEX
s14
14
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(558,1)
556
INDEX
There is an illustrated index in this Owner’s Manual. If you have difficulty finding your
target items in the index, try to use the illustrated index.
Illustrated index ......................................................................................... 19
A
Abbreviation ................................................................................................ 8
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................................................... 330
Warning light ....................................................................................... 170
Access key fob ........................................................................................ 117
Warning indicator................................................................................. 176
Accessories ............................................................................................ 503
Accessory power outlet ............................................................................ 282
Adjustable storage net.............................................................................. 298
Air cleaner element .................................................................................. 480
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control...................................................................... 257
Manual climate control.......................................................................... 259
Air filtration system .................................................................................. 265
Airflow mode ........................................................................................... 259
Alarm system .......................................................................................... 136
All-Wheel Drive warning light..................................................................... 174
Alloy wheel ............................................................................................. 494
Cleaning ............................................................................................. 462
Antenna
Roof antenna ...................................................................................... 270
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................................................... 330
Arming the system ................................................................................... 137
Armrest .................................................................................................... 52
Ashtray................................................................................................... 290
Assist grip............................................................................................... 291
AT OIL TEMP warning light ....................................................................... 169
Audio
Antenna.............................................................................................. 270
Set..................................................................................................... 270
Auto dimmer cancel function ..................................................................... 161
Auto Start Stop system............................................................................. 348
Indicator light....................................................................................... 182
No Activity Detected indicator light......................................................... 182
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 181
Warning light ....................................................................................... 181
Auto Vehicle Hold function
ON indicator light ................................................................................. 173
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ................................................................... 229
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ............ 56
B
Battery ...................................................................................................
Jump starting ......................................................................................
500
443
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(559,1)
INDEX
557
Replacement (access key fob) .............................................................. 507
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........................................ 319
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) ........................................... 131
Vehicle battery..................................................................................... 500
Booster cushion......................................................................................... 76
Booster seat.............................................................................................. 76
Bottle holder............................................................................................ 281
Brake
Assist ................................................................................................. 328
Disc ................................................................................................... 517
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ................................................. 329
Fluid............................................................................................ 484, 516
Pad .................................................................................................... 486
Parking............................................................................................... 339
Pedal ................................................................................................. 485
System ............................................................................................... 328
Tips.................................................................................................... 328
Brake system .......................................................................................... 328
Warning light ....................................................................................... 171
Braking................................................................................................... 328
Tips.................................................................................................... 328
Breaking-in of new brake pads .................................................................. 485
BSW/RCTW ............................................................................................ 367
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer.................................................. 370
OFF indicator ............................................................................... 183, 373
Warning indicator.......................................................................... 183, 373
Warning volume................................................................................... 372
Bulb
Chart.................................................................................................. 518
Replacing ........................................................................................... 504
C
Camera
Front view camera ...............................................................................
Rear view camera................................................................................
Smart Rearview Mirror camera ..............................................................
Cargo area
Light...................................................................................................
Multi-use cargo cover ...........................................................................
Tie-down hooks ...................................................................................
Catalytic converter ...................................................................................
Center console ........................................................................................
Center console tray..................................................................................
Center information display (CID)................................................................
11.6-inch display models.......................................................................
Center tray..............................................................................................
Changing
Coolant...............................................................................................
Flat tire...............................................................................................
353
362
239
275
294
297
407
279
279
194
197
279
480
439
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
14
(560,1)
558
INDEX
Oil and oil filter .................................................................................... 477
Charge warning light ................................................................................ 168
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light ............................. 166
Checking
Coolant level ....................................................................................... 479
Fluid level (brake fluid) ......................................................................... 484
Fluid level (washer fluid) ....................................................................... 495
Oil level (engine oil) ............................................................................. 476
Child restraint systems ............................................................................... 67
Installation of a booster cushion .............................................................. 76
Installation of a booster seat ................................................................... 76
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................................................... 72
Lower and top tether anchors.................................................................. 78
Child safety............................................................................................... 10
Locks ................................................................................................. 139
Chime
Light................................................................................................... 212
Seatbelt .............................................................................................. 163
Cleaning
Alloy wheels........................................................................................ 462
Center information display .................................................................... 465
Interior................................................................................................ 464
Ventilation grille ................................................................................... 264
Climate control system ............................................................................. 255
Automatic ........................................................................................... 257
Manual ............................................................................................... 259
Clock...................................................................................................... 210
Coat hook ............................................................................................... 292
Compass ......................................................................................... 228, 229
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................................................... 321
Fluid............................................................................................ 483, 516
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) .......................................... 169
Coolant............................................................................................ 479, 516
Changing ............................................................................................ 480
Temperature gauge .............................................................................. 160
Temperature high warning light.............................................................. 167
Temperature low indicator light .............................................................. 167
Cooling system........................................................................................ 478
Corrosion protection ................................................................................. 463
Cup holder .............................................................................................. 280
Front passenger’s ................................................................................ 280
Rear passenger’s ................................................................................ 281
D
Daytime running light system .................................................................... 218
Defogger ................................................................................................ 226
Defrosting ............................................................................................... 263
Deicer .................................................................................................... 226
Differential gear oil ............................................................................ 483, 516
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(561,1)
INDEX
559
Dimensions ............................................................................................. 512
Disarming the alarm system...................................................................... 137
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ..................................................... 329
Distraction Mitigation System .................................................................... 389
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 184
Operation indicator light........................................................................ 184
Temporary stop indicator light................................................................ 184
Warning light ....................................................................................... 184
Dome light .............................................................................................. 274
Door
Locks ................................................................................................. 132
Open indicator light .............................................................................. 174
Double trip meter ..................................................................................... 159
Drainage reduction functions ..................................................................... 157
Drive belts .............................................................................................. 482
DriverFocus ............................................................................................ 389
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................................................. 174
AWD models ....................................................................................... 410
Drinking ................................................................................................ 11
Drugs ................................................................................................... 11
Foreign countries ................................................................................. 409
Off road .............................................................................................. 411
Pets ..................................................................................................... 13
Snowy and icy roads............................................................................ 415
Tips...................................................................................... 326, 406, 410
Tired or sleepy ...................................................................................... 12
Winter ................................................................................................ 414
E
Electrical system...................................................................................... 517
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system........................................ 331
Warning .............................................................................................. 172
Electronic parking brake ........................................................................... 339
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ...................................... 342
Indicator light....................................................................................... 172
Warning ....................................................................................... 172, 342
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................................................ 56
Engine.................................................................................................... 512
Compartment overview......................................................................... 475
Coolant........................................................................................ 479, 516
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ....................................................... 11, 407
Hood .................................................................................................. 473
Hood open warning light ....................................................................... 174
Low oil level warning light ..................................................................... 168
Oil............................................................................................... 476, 513
Overheating ........................................................................................ 446
Starting & stopping .............................................................................. 310
Event data recorder ................................................................................... 16
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
14
(562,1)
560
INDEX
Exterior care ...........................................................................................
460
F
Flat tires ................................................................................................. 439
Floor mat ................................................................................................ 293
Fluid
Brake ................................................................................................. 484
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)............................................... 483
Fluid level ........................................................................................... 516
Fog light ................................................................................................. 220
Indicator light....................................................................................... 181
Switch ................................................................................................ 220
Folding mirror switch ................................................................................ 247
Front
Differential gear oil ........................................................................ 483, 516
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators .................................. 166
Seatbelt pretensioners............................................................................ 64
Front seat heater ....................................................................................... 53
Front seats................................................................................................ 37
Forward and backward adjustment .......................................................... 39
Head restraint adjustment ....................................................................... 45
Manual seat .......................................................................................... 39
Power seat............................................................................................ 40
Reclining .............................................................................................. 39
Fuel ....................................................................................................... 304
Consumption indicator .......................................................................... 191
Economy hints..................................................................................... 406
Filler lid and cap .................................................................................. 305
Gauge ................................................................................................ 159
Requirements............................................................................... 304, 512
Function settings ..................................................................................... 522
Fuses ..................................................................................................... 502
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ............................................................
Glove box ...............................................................................................
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................................................
419
278
419
H
Hazard warning flasher...................................................................... 158, 436
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ............................................................................................. 45
Rear seat.............................................................................................. 50
Headlight
Aim adjustment.................................................................................... 506
Bulb replacement................................................................................. 504
Bulb wattage ....................................................................................... 518
Control switch ..................................................................................... 212
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(563,1)
INDEX
561
Flasher ............................................................................................... 215
Indicator light....................................................................................... 181
OFF delay function .............................................................................. 214
Warning light ................................................................................ 181, 504
Welcome lighting function ..................................................................... 214
High beam assist
Function ............................................................................................. 215
Indicator light....................................................................................... 181
High/low beam change (dimmer) ............................................................... 215
Hill descent control .................................................................................. 337
Indicator light....................................................................................... 183
HomeLink® ....................................................................................... 229, 235
Hook
Cargo tie-down .................................................................................... 297
Coat ................................................................................................... 292
Shopping bag...................................................................................... 294
Towing and tie-down ............................................................................ 447
Horn....................................................................................................... 250
Hose and connections .............................................................................. 479
I
Icy road surface warning indicator.............................................................. 183
Illumination brightness control ................................................................... 161
Immobilizer ............................................................................................. 129
Indicator light (security indicator light)..................................................... 180
Indicator light
Auto Start Stop.................................................................................... 182
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected ...................................................... 182
Auto Start Stop OFF ............................................................................ 181
Auto Vehicle Hold ON .......................................................................... 173
BSW/RCTW OFF.......................................................................... 183, 373
BSW/RCTW warning..................................................................... 183, 373
Coolant temperature low....................................................................... 167
Distraction Mitigation System OFF ......................................................... 184
Distraction Mitigation System operation .................................................. 184
Distraction Mitigation System temporary stop ................................... 184, 398
Door open........................................................................................... 174
Electronic parking brake ....................................................................... 172
Front Cross Traffic Braking OFF ............................................................ 184
Front fog light ...................................................................................... 181
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators .......................... 166
Headlight ............................................................................................ 181
High beam .......................................................................................... 181
High beam assist ................................................................................. 215
Hill descent control .............................................................................. 183
Immobilizer ......................................................................................... 180
Malfunction ......................................................................................... 166
Proximity Warning Detection OFF .......................................................... 184
RAB OFF............................................................................................ 183
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
14
(564,1)
562
INDEX
Security .............................................................................................. 180
Select lever/Gear position ..................................................................... 180
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF ...................................................... 181
Turn signal.......................................................................................... 180
Vehicle detected in neighboring lane ...................................................... 182
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF.............................................................. 176
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ....................................................... 176
X-MODE ............................................................................................. 182
Inside mirror.............................................................................. 228, 229, 235
Instrument cluster display ......................................................................... 185
Interior lights ........................................................................................... 274
J
Jack-up point...........................................................................................
Jump starting ..........................................................................................
439
443
K
Key
Replacement .......................................................................................
Keyless access entry function ...................................................................
Keyless access with push-button start system.............................................
Disabling keyless access functions ........................................................
Locking and unlocking doors .................................................................
Warning chimes and warning indicator ...................................................
When access key fob does not operate properly .....................................
Keyless entry system ...............................................................................
129
120
117
126
120
176
451
130
L
Lap belt pretensioner ................................................................................. 65
Leather seat materials .............................................................................. 464
Light
Backup ............................................................................................... 519
Cargo area .................................................................................. 275, 519
Control switch ..................................................................................... 212
Daytime running ........................................................................... 218, 519
Dome ................................................................................................. 274
Front fog...................................................................................... 220, 519
Front turn............................................................................................ 519
Map ............................................................................................ 274, 519
Rear combination................................................................................. 504
Rear gate .................................................................................... 275, 519
Stop ................................................................................................... 519
Tail..................................................................................................... 519
Turn signal............................................................................ 221, 504, 519
Vanity mirror................................................................................. 277, 519
Loading your vehicle ................................................................................ 418
Low tire pressure warning light .................................................................. 169
Lower and top tether anchor ....................................................................... 78
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(565,1)
INDEX
563
M
Maintenance
Precautions......................................................................................... 469
Schedule ............................................................................................ 469
Seatbelt ................................................................................................ 63
Tips.................................................................................................... 472
Tools .................................................................................................. 438
Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) ........................... 166
Manual
Mode (continuously variable transmission) .............................................. 325
Seat ..................................................................................................... 39
Map light ................................................................................................ 274
Maximum load limits................................................................................. 427
Meters and gauges .................................................................................. 158
Mirror defogger........................................................................................ 226
Mirrors.................................................................................................... 228
Moonroof ......................................................................................... 149, 454
Multi-use cargo cover ............................................................................... 294
N
New vehicle break-in driving .....................................................................
406
O
Odometer ............................................................................................... 158
Off road driving........................................................................................ 411
Oil filter................................................................................................... 477
Oil level
Differential gear ................................................................................... 483
Engine................................................................................................ 476
Warning light ....................................................................................... 168
Oil pressure warning light ......................................................................... 168
On-road and off-road driving ....................................................................... 13
Outside
Mirror defogger.................................................................................... 226
Mirrors................................................................................................ 245
Overhead console.................................................................................... 278
Overheating engine.................................................................................. 446
P
Parking
Brake .................................................................................................
Tips....................................................................................................
Passenger seatbelt reminder.....................................................................
Periodic inspections .................................................................................
Petrol fuel ...............................................................................................
PIN Code Access ....................................................................................
Power
Outlets ...............................................................................................
339
342
163
408
304
122
282
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
14
(566,1)
564
INDEX
Outside mirrors.................................................................................... 245
Rear gate ........................................................................................... 142
Rear gate button.................................................................................. 144
Seat ..................................................................................................... 40
Steering.............................................................................................. 327
Steering warning light........................................................................... 174
Precautions against vehicle modification................................................ 66, 112
Preparing to drive .................................................................................... 309
Push-button
Ignition switch ..................................................................................... 156
Starting and stopping engine................................................................. 310
R
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
OFF indicator ...................................................................................... 183
ON/OFF setting ................................................................................... 386
Warning indicator.......................................................................... 183, 387
RCTW .................................................................................................... 368
Rear
Combination lights ............................................................................... 504
Differential gear oil ........................................................................ 483, 516
Gate................................................................................................... 453
Gate light............................................................................................ 275
Turn signal light ................................................................................... 504
Rear seat.................................................................................................. 47
Armrest ................................................................................................ 52
Folding down......................................................................................... 47
Head restraint adjustment ....................................................................... 50
Heater .................................................................................................. 54
Reclining .............................................................................................. 50
Rear Seat Reminder .................................................................................. 67
Rear view camera.................................................................................... 362
Rear window
Defogger ............................................................................................ 226
Wiper and washer switch...................................................................... 225
Wiper blade rubber .............................................................................. 499
Recommended
Brake fluid .......................................................................................... 516
Continuously variable transmission fluid ................................................. 516
Differential gear oil ............................................................................... 516
Engine oil ........................................................................................... 513
Spark plugs......................................................................................... 517
Refueling ................................................................................................ 305
Remote engine start system...................................................................... 314
Remote keyless entry system.................................................................... 130
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................................................ 485
Wiper blades ....................................................................................... 496
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(567,1)
INDEX
Replacing
Access key fob battery .........................................................................
Air cleaner element ..............................................................................
Battery (remote keyless entry system)....................................................
Battery of access key fob .....................................................................
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......................................
Replacing bulbs .......................................................................................
Headlight ............................................................................................
Rear combination light..........................................................................
Rear turn signal light ............................................................................
Reverse Automatic Braking system............................................................
Rocking the vehicle..................................................................................
Roof rails ................................................................................................
Roof tent ................................................................................................
565
507
480
131
507
132
504
504
504
504
375
418
420
422
S
Safety
Precautions when driving.......................................................................... 9
Symbol ................................................................................................... 7
Warnings ................................................................................................ 7
Seat
Fabric................................................................................................. 464
Front .................................................................................................... 37
Front seat ventilation.............................................................................. 54
Heater .................................................................................................. 53
Manual seat .......................................................................................... 39
Power................................................................................................... 40
Rear..................................................................................................... 47
Seatbelt ................................................................................................ 9, 55
Fastening.............................................................................................. 57
Maintenance ......................................................................................... 63
Pretensioners ........................................................................................ 64
Safety tips............................................................................................. 55
Warning light and chime ....................................................................... 163
Security
Alarm system ...................................................................................... 136
Immobilizer ......................................................................................... 129
Indicator light....................................................................................... 180
Select lever
Position indicator ................................................................................. 180
Shift lock function ................................................................................ 323
Shopping bag hook .................................................................................. 294
Shoulder pretensioners............................................................................... 64
Smart Rearview Mirror.............................................................................. 235
Snow tires........................................................................................ 417, 486
Snowy and icy roads................................................................................ 415
Sounding a panic alarm............................................................................ 131
Spark plugs...................................................................................... 482, 517
Specifications .......................................................................................... 512
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
14
(568,1)
566
INDEX
Speedometer........................................................................................... 158
SRS
Curtain airbag ..................................................................................... 103
Frontal airbag........................................................................................ 92
Side airbag ......................................................................................... 103
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ................................. 9, 83
SRS airbag system
Monitors ............................................................................................. 110
Servicing ............................................................................................. 111
Warning light ....................................................................................... 165
Starting & stopping engine ........................................................................ 310
State emission testing (U.S. only) .............................................................. 308
Steering lock ........................................................................................... 313
Steering Responsive Headlight.................................................................. 219
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 181
Warning light ....................................................................................... 181
Steering wheel
Heated Steering Wheel system ............................................................. 249
Lock ................................................................................................... 313
Power................................................................................................. 327
Tilt/telescopic ...................................................................................... 249
Warning light ....................................................................................... 174
Stop light ......................................................................................... 504, 519
Storage compartment ............................................................................... 278
Sun visors............................................................................................... 276
Sunshade ............................................................................................... 151
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ............................................... 83
Synthetic leather upholstery ...................................................................... 464
T
Tachometer ............................................................................................. 158
Temperature gauge .................................................................................. 160
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ...................................................................................... 169
Coolant............................................................................................... 167
Temporary spare tire ................................................................................ 436
Tether (child restraint system) ..................................................................... 78
Tie-down hooks ....................................................................................... 447
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ..................................................................... 249
Tire
Chains................................................................................................ 417
Information.......................................................................................... 526
Inspection ........................................................................................... 488
Pressures and wear ............................................................................. 489
Replacement ....................................................................................... 493
Rotation.............................................................................................. 492
Size and pressure................................................................................ 517
Types ................................................................................................. 486
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(569,1)
INDEX
567
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ...................................... 338, 442, 487
Screen ............................................................................................... 339
Warning light ....................................................................................... 169
Tires and wheels ..................................................................................... 486
Tools ...................................................................................................... 438
Top tether anchors ..................................................................................... 78
Towing.................................................................................................... 447
All wheels on the ground ...................................................................... 450
Flat-bed truck ...................................................................................... 449
Hooks................................................................................................. 447
Weight................................................................................................ 427
Trailer
Connecting ......................................................................................... 425
Hitch ........................................................................................... 424, 429
Towing................................................................................................ 426
Towing tips.......................................................................................... 431
Trip meter ............................................................................................... 159
Turn signal
Indicator lights ..................................................................................... 180
Lever.................................................................................................. 221
U
Under-floor storage compartment...............................................................
USB power supply ...................................................................................
298
283
V
Vanity mirror............................................................................................ 277
Vehicle
Capacity weight ................................................................................... 419
Identification........................................................................................ 521
Symbols ................................................................................................. 9
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 176
Operation indicator light........................................................................ 176
System ............................................................................................... 332
Warning light ....................................................................................... 175
Ventilator ................................................................................................ 254
W
Warning and indicator lights ...................................................................... 162
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system......................................... 176
Seatbelt .............................................................................................. 163
Warning indicator
Icy road surface................................................................................... 183
RAB ............................................................................................ 183, 387
Warning light
ABS ................................................................................................... 170
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
14
(570,1)
568
INDEX
Access key ......................................................................................... 176
All-Wheel Drive.................................................................................... 174
AT OIL TEMP ...................................................................................... 169
Auto Start Stop.................................................................................... 181
Brake system ...................................................................................... 171
Charge ............................................................................................... 168
CHECK ENGINE ................................................................................. 166
Coolant temperature high ..................................................................... 167
Distraction Mitigation System ................................................................ 184
Engine hood open ............................................................................... 174
Engine low oil level .............................................................................. 168
Icy road surface................................................................................... 183
Keyless access with push-button start system......................................... 176
LED headlight ..................................................................................... 181
Low fuel.............................................................................................. 174
Low tire pressure ................................................................................. 169
Oil pressure ........................................................................................ 168
Power steering .................................................................................... 174
Seatbelt .............................................................................................. 163
SRS airbag system .............................................................................. 165
Vehicle Dynamics Control ..................................................................... 175
Windshield washer fluid ........................................................................ 174
Warranties .................................................................................................. 6
Warranties and maintenance..................................................................... 426
Washing ................................................................................................. 460
Waxing and polishing ............................................................................... 461
Wear indicators ....................................................................................... 491
Welcome lighting function ......................................................................... 214
Wheel
Alloy................................................................................................... 494
Balance .............................................................................................. 490
Nut tightening torque............................................................................ 517
Replacement ....................................................................................... 493
Windows................................................................................................. 139
Windshield
Washer fluid ........................................................................................ 495
Wiper and washer switches .................................................................. 223
Wiper blades ....................................................................................... 497
Wiper deicer........................................................................................ 226
Winter
Driving................................................................................................ 414
Tires............................................................................................ 417, 486
Wiper and washer.................................................................................... 221
Wiper deicer............................................................................................ 226
X
X-MODE .................................................................................................
Indicator light.......................................................................................
335
182
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(571,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(572,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
(571,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 4/ 7
(20,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 4/ 7
(571,1)
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
—————————————————————————
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 4/ 7
(573,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE
GAS STATION REFERENCE
FUEL
s99
s99aa
s99aa01
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
FUEL OCTANE RATING
s99aa02
AKI
s99aa0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly
referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
RON
s99aa0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
LIMIT OF ETHANOL CONTENT
s99aa09
No more than 15%
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
s99aa03
18.0 US gal (68 liters, 15.0 Imp gal)
ENGINE OIL
s99aa04
Use only the following oils.
2.5 L non-turbo models:
. ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6B, which can be identified
with the ILSAC certification mark (Shield mark)
. or ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6A, which can be identified
with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
. or API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
2.4 L turbo models:
. ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6A, which can be identified
with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
. or API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine Oil” �P513.
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY
s99aa05
2.5 L non-turbo models: 4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
2.4 L turbo models: 4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is
changed with an oil filter. Check the oil level using an oil level gauge after refilling the engine with oil. For
more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Engine Oil” �P476.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
Refer to “Tires” �P517.
s99aa06
北米Model "A2650BE-A" EDITED: 2025/ 6/ 27
15
">